001-065 thesis gb

Dear customer,

Congratulations and thank you for choosing LANCIA.We wrote this handbook to help you get the most out of your car’s outstanding qualities.We advise to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time.You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help

you derive the maximum from your LANCIA’s technological features. You will discover unique fea-tures and details; you will also find essential information for car care and servicing as well as drivingand operating safety not to mention the long-term wellbeing of your LANCIA.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services you have acquired and contains details relating tothe following:

• the Warranty Certificate, with terms and conditions for maintaining it• the range of services offered to LANCIA owners.

We are sure that these instruments will help you easily attune to and appreciate both your new carand the LANCIA team that will be on hand to provide you with any help you may require.

Best regards and have a great trip!

This Owner Handbook describes all the THESIS versions. You should therefore consider only theinformation concerning the engine and bodywork version of the car you have bought.

MUST BE READ!REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.

Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.

The use of other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warrantydue to the damage caused.

ENGINE START-UP

Petrol engines with manual gearbox: make sure the parking brake is pulled (instrument panel warning light xon); put the gear lever to neutral; press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turnthe ignition key or the Keyless System knob to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

Engines with automatic electronic transmission (COMFORTRONIC): make sure the parking brake is pulled (in-strument panel warning light x on) and the gear lever is to P; hold the clutch pedal pressed down to the floorwithout touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key or the Keyless System knob to AVV and release it as soonas the engine starts.

Diesel engines: make sure the parking brake is pulled; put the gear lever to neutral; press the clutch pedal downto the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key or the Keyless System knob to MAR, andwait for the instrument panel warning light m to go out, then turn immediately the ignition key or the KeylessSystem knob to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.

PARKING OVER FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

When functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not parkthe car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.

K

�

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit aLancia Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car's electric sys-tem can support the required load.�

CODE card

Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on theCODE card with you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safetyfeatures, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS …

… information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its mainte-nance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection)â (the car’swellbeing).

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protec-tion is fitted in your car.

U

TRAVELLING SAFELY AND IN HARMONY WITH NATURE

Safety and respect for the environment are the guidelines that inspired the THESIS design from thedrawing board onwards.

This concept has meant that the THESIS has been able to face and pass the strictest safety tests.So much so that, from this point of view, the car is the best in its class and has probably already incor-porated features that belong to the future.

In addition, ongoing research into new and effective features to help safeguard the environmentmakes the THESIS a car to imitate for this reason as well.

All versions are in fact equipped with environmental protection devices that reduce harmful exhaustfumes in compliance with the limits provided for by current legislation.

SAFEGUARDING THE ENVIRONMENT

Safeguarding the environment has directed the design and manufacturing of the THESIS right fromthe start. The result is the use of materials and the perfection of devices that can reduce or sweep-ingly reduce harmful influences on the environment.

The THESIS is equipped with environment safeguarding devices which curtail harmful exhaust gasemissions, is ready to travel well ahead of the most stringent international pollution control stan-dards.

USE OF ENVIRONMENT-FRIENDLY MATERIALS

None of the car’s components contain asbestos. Padding and the climate control system do not con-tain CFCs (chlorofluorocarbides) - the gases considered responsible for the destruction of the ozonelayer. Other substances that might pollute air and water tables, such as the cadmium in the rust-proofcoating of the bolts, have been completely replaced with substances that do not harm the environ-ment.

DEVICES FOR REDUCING PETROL ENGINE EMISSIONS

Three-way catalytic converter (catalytic exhaust pipe)

The exhaust system is equipped with a catalyst made up of noble metal alloys; it is housed in astainless steel container capable of withstanding the very high operating temperatures.

The catalyst converts the unburnt hydrocarbons, the carbon monoxide and the nitric oxides foundin the exhaust gases (though in small amounts, thanks to the electronic-injection ignition systems)into non-polluting substances.

When functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason donot park the car over inflammable material (e.g. paper, fuel oil, grass, dead leaves, etc.).

Lambda sensors

The Lambda sensors detect the oxygen content in the exhaust gas. The signal sent by the oxygensensor is used by the injection system electronic control unit to constantly mix air and fuel in the cor-rect proportion.

Fuel evaporation canister

As it is impossible to stop the build up of petrol fumes, also when the engine is not running, the sys-tem traps them in a special container holding active carbon.

The fumes are sucked in from here and burnt while the engine is running.

DEVICES FOR REDUCING DIESEL ENGINE EMISSIONS

Oxidising catalytic converter

This device converts the polluting substances in the exhaust gas (carbon monoxide, unburnt hydro-carbons and particulates) into harmless substances, thus reducing the smokiness and smell associat-ed with diesel engine exhaust fumes.

The catalytic converter consists of a stainless steel case containing a honeycomb ceramic core inwhich there is the precious metal that carries out the catalysing action.

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (E.G.R.) system

This system recirculates or reuses part of the exhaust gas in a proportion which varies according toengine operating conditions.

When necessary, it is used for the control of nitrogen oxide emissions.

THE SIGNS TO HELP YOU DRIVE CORRECTLY

The signs you see on this page are very important. They highlight those parts of the handbookwhere, more than elsewhere, you should stop for a minute and read carefully.

As you can see, each sign has a different symbol to make it immediately clear and easy to identifythe subjects in the different areas:

Personal safety. Important. Total or partial failure tofollow these instructions can placedriver, passengers or others in seri-ous danger.

Environmental protection. This shows you the correct proce-dures to follow to ensure that the cardoes not harm the environment.

Car wellbeing. Important. Total or partial failure tofollow these instructions will resultin the risk of serious damage to thecar and may invalidate the warrantyas well.

The texts, illustrations and technical specifications contained in this handbook refer to the car at the time of going topress.As part of our ongoing effort to improve our products, LANCIA may introduce technical modifications during pro-duction and therefore technical specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice. For more detailed information, please apply to LANCIA Dealerships.

9

Battery

Corrosive fluid.

SYMBOLSSpecial coloured labels have been

attached near or actually on some ofthe components of your THESIS.These labels bear symbols thatremind you of the precautions to betaken as regards that particularcomponent.

A list of the symbols to be found onyour THESIS is given below with thename of the component to which itrelates at the side of it.

These symbols are divided into thefollowing four categories: danger,prohibition, warning and obligation.

DANGER SYMBOLS

Battery

Explosion.

Fan

May cut in automaticallyeven when the engine isturned off.

Expansion tank

Do not remove the capwhen the coolant is hot.

Coil

High voltage.

Belts and pulleys

Moving parts; keep partsof the body and clothesaway.

Climate control tubing

Do not open. Gas underhigh-pressure.

Front headlights

Danger - Electric shocks.

Diesel engines

Use diesel fuel only.DIESEL

Expansion tank

Only use fluid of the typespecified in section“Capacities”.

Battery

Protect your eyes.

Battery

Jack

See the Owner hand-book.

OBLIGATION SYMBOLS

10

Battery

Keep away from nakedflames.

Battery

Keep away from chil-dren.

Heat shields - belts -pulleys - fan

Do not touch.

PROHIBITION SYMBOLS

Power steering

Do not exceed the maxi-mum fluid level in thereservoir. Use only thefluid specified in section“Capacities”.

Catalytic converter

Do not park over inflam-mable materials. Seechapter: “Protecting theemission control devices”.

WARNING SYMBOLS

Engine

Use only the oil specifiedin section “Capacities”.

Unleaded petrol vehicle

Use only unleaded petrolwith a rated octane num-ber (R.O.N.) of not lessthan 95.

Windscreen wiper

Only use fluid of the typespecified in section“Capacities”.

Brake circuit

Do not exceed the maxi-mum fluid level in thereservoir. Use only thefluid specified in section“Capacities”.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

DRIVING YOUR CAR

IN AN EMERGENCY

CAR MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

CONTENTS

11

12

fig. 1

DASHBOARDThe presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the version.

L0A

6000

b

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR

13

1) Front door air outlets

2) Side window vents

3) Side vents

4) Instrument panel

5) Windscreen vent

6) Driver’s side vents

7) Central vents

8) Hazard light switch

9) Passenger’s side vent

10) Front passenger’s airbag

11) Front passenger’s airbag deactivation switch

12) Glove compartment/CD CHANGER compartment/power socket

13) Glove compartment on/off button

14) CONNECT multifunction display (for controldescription see the following pages)

15) Cassette player, CD and SIM telephone card slot flap

16) Automatic climate control and heated rear windowswitch

17) Ashtray and cigar lighter

18) SOS button (for assistance services and functions)

19) Windscreen/headlight wiper/washer stalk

20) Trip meter reset button (long pressure)/Button fordeleting failure messages on the display (short pres-sure)

21) Ignition switch

22) CONNECT controls on the steering wheel (for con-trol description see the following pages)

23) Horn

24) Driver’s airbag

25) Steering wheel electric adjustment button

26) Radar Cruise Control controls/Cruise Control/direc-tion indicator stalk and main/dipped beam head-light switch

27) Glove compartment/fusebox cover

28) Bonnet opening lever

29) Outside light stalk knob - Front and rear fog lightbuttons - Instrument panel dimmer and twilight sen-sor sensitivity ring nuts

14

fig. 2

CONNECT INFOTELEMATIC SYSTEM

The key for this figure ison pages 16-17.

L0A6001b

15

THESIS CONNECT infotelematicsystem, in its most refined version,includes: colour TV set, sound sys-tem with cassette player, CD-ROM/Audio CD player, CD-chang-er, GSM cell phone, navigator, tripcomputer and voice commands (forcertain functions of cell phone,audio system and navigator).

The following pages describe thesystem controls and main functions.The car is provided with a specialsupplement dealing with CONNECTinfotelematic system to be used asquick reference guide for using thesystem. Read through this supple-ment carefully and keep it alwayswithin reach (e.g. in the glove com-partment).

IMPORTANT For the navigationsystem of the CONNECT, only useonly the original CD provided withthe car or, in any case other CDs ofthe same brand.

If you drive with the vol-ume too high you put bothyour own life and that of

others in jeopardy. You shouldadjust the volume so that you canhear noises from outside the car(e.g. horns, ambulance/policesirens, etc.).

CONNECT CONTROLS (fig. 2)

The CONNECT system functionscan be managed by means of 29buttons and 2 rotating selectors(knobs). Certain controls have mul-tiple functions that are dependent onthe system operating conditionsactive.

The type of function that can beactuated by means of the controlsdepend, in some cases, on how longthe button is pressed down (long orshort push), as shown in the follow-ing table.

The Lancia navigationsystem helps driver whilehe drives, by suggesting

vocally or graphically, the opti-mum routing to reach his presetdestination. Navigation systemsuggestions do not excuse driverfrom his full responsibilities dueto his driving behaviour and tohis compliance with road andother traffic regulations. Theresponsibility for road safetyalways lies with the car driver,and it falls on him in any case.

IMPORTANT The provided phoneis of the Single-Band type and there-fore if your network provider is notoperating with the 900 Mhz GSMstandard, coverage troubles may arisenotwithstanding the roaming. Contactyour network provider for further in-formation.

16

Legend

1 – SOS234 – CD5 – CC6 – ¯

7 – ˙

8

9 – SETUP

10 – TRIP11 – AUDIO

12 – SRC

13 – MAIN

Short push(less than 2 seconds)

Assistance services and functionsSlot for navigator CD-ROM or Audio CDSlot for cassetteEject navigator CD-ROM or Audio CDEject cassette

Radio mode: search for the first radio station that can betuned at a lower frequencyCD mode: selection of the previous trackCassette mode: fast tape rewind with return to beginningof listened track or to previous trackTV mode: search for the first channel that can be tunedat a lower frequencyRadio mode: search for the first radio station that can betuned at a higher frequencyCD mode: selection of the next trackCassette mode: fast tape feed to end of listened track orto next track.TV mode: search for the first channel that can be tunedat a higher frequencySystem switching on/off: pressing the knobVolume control: rotating the knob

System set-up and car functions that can be modifiedTrip computer screen selection

Turning on Audio mode and/or selecting specific screendisplayAudio source selection: FM1, FM2, FM3-AS, MW, LW,CC, CD, CDC, TVMAIN screen selection (main screen)

Long push(more than 2 seconds)

–––––

Radio mode: actuation of the “Scan” mode withscanning of the stations in the selected radio band starting from the lower frequency onesCD mode: fast backwardCassette mode: fast tape rewinding

Radio mode: actuation of the “Scan” function withstation scanning in the radio bandselected starting from the higher frequency onesCD mode: fast forwardCassette mode: fast tape feed

–

–

–

Turning off Audio mode (Radio, CC, CD/CDC)

–

–

17

Legend

14 – DARK

15 – £

16 – TEL

17 – RPT18 – NAV19 – MAP20 – •21

2223 – ESC

24 – SIM25 – ¯˙2627-28-29-30-31-32

33

Short push(less than 2 seconds)

DARK mode actuation: the display is completely darkenedForwarding the phone call setAccepting the incoming callEnding the ongoing call

Phone mode actuation and/or specific screen selection

Repetition of the last navigator voice instructionNavigation mode actuation and/or specific screenNavigator map mode selectionAccess to Targasys servicesRequired function selection byturning the knob.Selected function confirmation bypressing the knob.Remote control receiver Exit from a selection option or shift from a submenu to ahigher menuEject SIM telephone cardReverse tape side being listened toSlot for SIM telephone cardDouble “multifunction” buttons: their functionsdepend on the system active mode shown on the display.The function associated to the “multifunction” buttons isidentified from time to time by a writing on the display,just next to each buttonIn some cases, the writing covers several adjacent buttons:the function associated to all these buttons is the same.Radio/TV mode: select stored stations.CD-changer mode: select CD in the magazine.Reset button for system restart

Long push(more than 2 seconds)

–

Refusing the incoming phone call

Phone mode off–––––

––

–––

Radio/TV mode: station storage

–

18

CONTROLS ON THE STEERINGWHEEL (fig. 3)

The main CONNECT functioncontrols are duplicated on the steer-ing wheel, thus facilitating its con-trol.

The steering wheel also includesthe VOICE button, used to switchthe phone/audio system voice con-trols on/off, and record short voicemessages.

The control functions are as fol-lows:

A - Voice Recognition:– voice recognition on/off:

short push– voice message memorization:

long push– voice recorder stop: short

push

B - Audio source selection: FM1,FM2, FM3-AS, MW, LW, CC, CD,CDC, TV

C - Turning down the volumeD -Turning up the volumeE - Radio mode: search for the first

radio station that can be tunedat a higher frequencyCassette mode: fast tape feed toend of listened track or to nexttrackCD/CDC mode: selection ofnext trackTV mode: channel search in anincreasing order

F - Radio mode: search for the firstradio station that can be tunedat a lower frequency

Cassette mode: fast tape rewindwith return to beginning of lis-tened track or to previous trackCD/CDC mode: selection ofprevious trackTV mode: search for the firstchannel that can be tuned at alower frequency

G - Cyclic selection of main screensMAIN – AUDIO – TRIP – SETUP –TEL – NAV – CONNECT (access toTargasys services)

H - Phone button:– accepting the incoming call:

short push– ending the ongoing call: short

push– to display the last dialled

number: brief press– forwarding the call set: short

push– reading the SMS just

received: short push– refusing the incoming call:

long pushL - Display function upward selec-

tionM - Selected function confirmationN - Display function downward

selectionfig. 3L0

A60

02b

19

REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 4-5)

The infrared-ray remote controlcontrols certain main functions ofthe TV and audio system.

The remote control can be usedonly when the CONNECT isswitched on.

The remote control functions canbe switched off and on again byselecting the corresponding item ofthe SETUP function (set-up).

To use remote control A (fig. 5) takeit out from support B.

The remote control buttons per-form the following functions (fig. 4):

A - Radio mode: “Audio Mute”function on/off (volume mut-ing) only with TP functionactive (symbol “ ” near TP onthe main Radio screen).

CC/CD/CDC mode: play/stopcurrent track.

TV mode: TV off and return topreviously active Audio sourcescreen

B - Turning down the volume

C - Turning up the volume

D - Radio mode:– short push = search for the

first radio station that can betuned at a higher frequency

– long push = actuation of the“Scan” function with scan-ning of the stations in theselected radio band startingfrom the higher frequencyones

CD mode:– short push = selection of next

track– long push = fast forward

Cassette mode: – short push = fast tape feed to

end of listened track or tonext track

– long push = fast tape feed

TV mode: search for the firstchannel that can be tuned at ahigher frequency

fig. 5L0

A50

03b

fig. 4

L0A

5004

b

20

E - Radio mode:– short push = search for the

first radio station that can betuned at a lower frequency

– long push = actuation of the“Scan” function with scan-ning of the stations in theselected radio band startingfrom the lower frequencyones

CD mode:– short push = selection of pre-

vious track– long push = fast backward

Cassette mode: – short push = fast tape rewind

with return to beginning oflistened track or to previoustrack

– long push = fast tape rewind

TV mode: search for the firstchannel that can be tuned at alower frequency

F - Radio mode:– short push = search for the

first radio station that can betuned at a higher frequency

– long push = actuation of the“Scan” function with scanning ofthe stations in the selected radioband starting from the higherfrequency ones

CD mode:– short push = selection of next

track– long push = fast forwardCassette mode: – short push = fast tape feed to

next track– long push = fast tape feedTV mode: search for the firstchannel that can be tuned at ahigher frequency

G - Radio mode:– short push = search for the

first radio station that can betuned at a lower frequency

– long push = actuation of the“Scan” function with scan-ning of the stations in theselected radio band startingfrom the lower frequencyones

CD mode:– short push = selection of pre-

vious track– long push = fast backward

Cassette mode: – short push = fast tape rewind

to previous track– long push = fast tape rewind

TV mode: search for the firstchannel that can be tuned at alower frequency

H -Audio source selection: FM1,FM2, FM3-AS, MW, LW, CC,CD, CDC, TV

1-2-3-4-5-6 - Radio mode: – short push = Recall of stored

stations no. 1-2-3-4-5-6– long push = storing the sta-

tion being listened to

CD-changer mode: CD selec-tion from 1 to 6

TV mode: stored channel selec-tion from 1 to 6

21

Function

Audio module switching on

Audio module switching off

Audio mute (only with TP active on the main Radio screen)

Audio source selection

Turning the volumeup/down

Selection of stored radio stations

Radio station memorization

Search for the first radio station that can be tuned at a higher frequency

Search for the first radio station that can be tuned at a lower frequency

CONNECT buttons

Short push on AUDIO button

Long push on AUDIO button

“Audio Mute” selection and con-firmation on Radio menu by theright knob 21 (fig. 2)

Press the multifunction but-tons FM, AM, CC, CD, CDC,TV or the SOURCE button

Rotate the left-hand knob

Short push on buttons1 to 6

Long push on buttons 1 to 6

Short push on button ˙

Short push on button ¯

Steering wheel buttons

–

–

–

Press the SOURCE button

Press VOL+/- buttons

–

–

Short push on SCAN+ button

Short push on SCAN- button

Remote control buttons

–

–

Press the ON/OFF key

Press the SOURCE button

Press VOL+ or VOL- buttons

Short push on buttons 1 to 6

Long push on buttons 1 to 6

Short push on button N

Short push on button O

AUDIO AND TV FUNCTION: CONTROL SUMMARIZING TABLE

The TV and audio system (FM/AM radio and Cassette/CD/CDC player) functions can be switched on/off without dis-tinction by means of the controls on the CONNECT, the steering wheel or the remote control. To make it easier gettingacquainted with the controls, a table is shown below with the various functions and their respective control buttons.

To use voice commands, refer to the relevant chapter provided in the CONNECT supplement.

22

Function

Actuation of the “Scan” function with scanningof the stations in the selected radio band starting from the higher frequency ones

Actuation of the “Scan” function with scanningof the stations in the selected radio band starting from the lower frequency ones

Reversingcassette tape

Fast tape rewind to previous track

Fast taperewinding

Fast tape feedto next track

Fast tape feed

Play/pause of listened track CC/CD

Search for next track while playing a CD

CONNECT buttons

Long push on button ˙

Long push on button ¯

Press button ¯˙


Long push on button ¯


Long push on button ˙

Push multifunction buttonsPlay/Pause



Long push on SCAN+ button

Long push on SCAN- button

–


Long push on SCAN- button


Long push on SCAN+ button

–



Long push on button N

Long push on button O

–

Short push on button O or ¯

Long push on button O

Short push on button N or ˙

Long push on buttonN

Push ON/OFF button


23

Function

Search for previous track while playing a CD

Selection of CD in CDCmode

Play/stopthe track being listened to in CDC mode

Selection of memorized TV channels

Search for next tunable TV channel

Search for previous tunable TV channel

TV module off (return to previously active Audio source screen)

CONNECT buttons

Short pressure of button ¯

Press buttons 1 to 6

–




Press OFF multifunction key



–

–

–

Press SCAN+ button

Press SCAN- button

–


Short pressure of button ¯


Press ON/OFF button


Short push on button N

Short push on button O

Press the ON/OFF key

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-ter-market operation in-

volving steering system or steeringcolumn modifications (e.g.: instal-lation of anti-theft Device) thatcould badly affect performanceand safety, cause the lapse of war-ranty and also result in non-com-pliance of the car with homologa-tion requirements.

24

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

The steering column lock isengaged automatically after remov-ing the ignition key.

IGNITIONSWITCH

The key can be turned to three dif-ferent positions (fig. 6):

STOP: engine off, key can beremoved, steering column locked.Some electrical devices can be oper-ated (e.g. CONNECT).

MAR: driving position correspond-ing to: dashboard on and steeringcolumn lock off. All the electricaldevices can be operated.

AVV: engine ignition. Release thekey as soon as the engine is started.

If the ignition switch hasbeen tampered with (e.g.someone has tried to steal

your car), get a LanciaDealership to make sure it is stillfunctioning properly before youstart driving again.

Always remove the igni-tion key when you get outof the car. This will pre-

vent anyone from accidentallyworking the controls. Rememberto apply the handbrake and, ifthe car is faced down on a steepslope engage the first gear. If it isfacing up, engage the reversegear.

IMPORTANT For versions equip-ped with the recognition system,refer to paragraph “Recognition sys-tem (Keyless System)” in this chap-ter.

fig. 6

L0A

0021

b

Versions with Keyless System

The steering column lock isengaged when central door lockingis actuated by means of the remotecontrol. This condition is indicatedon the instrument panel display bymessage “STEERING LOCKEDWHEN DOORS CLOSED”.

25

Steering column lock always off

The user can set the condition“Steering column lock always off”by means of the CONNECT menu.To set this mode, refer to the CON-NECT supplement provided withthe car.

In an emergency

The steering column lock cannot bedisengaged when the battery is rundown. In this case, open the bonnetwith the emergency key and connectan auxiliary battery to the car bat-tery.

Do not carry out thisprocedure if you lackexperience; if it is not

done correctly it can cause veryintense electrical discharges andthe battery might even explode.Contact a Lancia Dealership. Inany case, refer to paragraph“Jump starting”.

The steering columnlock is not engaged if cen-tral door locking is actu-

ated by means of the emergencykey or if central locking is acti-vated automatically (“Autoclose”function).

The steering column lock is disen-gaged automatically when depress-ing the clutch pedal (versions withmanual gearbox) or brake pedal(versions with automatic transmis-sion).

Before opening the lug-gage compartment bonnetto reload the battery or to

connect an auxiliary battery, care-fully read and comply with the in-structions contained in the para-graph “If battery is to be discon-nected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

26

THE LANCIA CODESYSTEM

To further protect your car fromtheft, it has been fitted with anengine immobilising system (LanciaCODE) which is automatically acti-vated when the ignition key isremoved. An electronic device, infact, is fitted in each ignition keygrip. The device transmits a radio-frequency signal when the engine isstarted through a special aerial builtinto the ignition switch. The modu-lated signal is a password. Only ifthe control unit recognises the keycan the engine be started.

OPERATION

Each time the ignition key isturned to STOP the Lancia CODEsystem will deactivate the engineelectronic control unit functions.

When the key is turned to MAR tostart the engine, the Lancia CODEsystem sends a password code to theengine control unit to deactivate thefunction lock. The encoded andvariable code, randomly selectedfrom over four billion possible com-binations, is only sent if, in turn, thesystem has recognised the codetransmitted by the electronic devicebuilt into the ignition key via an aer-ial surrounding the ignition switch.

If the code has not been recognisedcorrectly, the symbol Y will appearon the instrument panel display,together with the message “VEHI-CLE PROTECTION SYSTEMFAULT”.

In this case, turn the key to STOPand then back to MAR. If the engineremains immobilised, try with theother keys provided with the car. Ifyou are still unable to start theengine, carry out the emergency pro-cedure described in chapter “In anemergency”, and contact yourLancia Dealership.

IMPORTANT Each key has itsown code that must be stored in thesystem control unit. For storing newkeys, up to a maximum of eight,apply solely to Lancia Dealershiptaking with you all the keys in yourpossession, the CODE card, a per-sonal identity document and thedocuments that certify car posses-sion.

27

The codes of any keysthat are not availablewhen the new storage pro-

cedure is carried out will bedeleted from the memory to pre-vent any lost or stolen keys beingused to start the engine.

IMPORTANT If symbol Y lightsup when the car is running:

1) If the symbol lights up togetherwith the message “VEHICLE PRO-TECTION SYSTEM FAULT”, thismeans that the system is running aself-test (e.g. due to a voltage drop).The first time you stop, you can testthe system as follows: switch the en-gine off by turning the ignition key toSTOP then turn the key back toMAR: the symbol will light up and goout in about 1 second. If the symbolremains on, repeat the above proce-dure, leaving the key at STOP forlonger than 30 seconds. If the prob-lem persists, contact your LanciaDealership.

2) If the symbol stays on, thismeans that the code has not beenrecognised. In this case, turn the keyto STOP and then back to MAR. Ifthe engine remains immobilised, trywith the other keys provided withthe car. If you are still unable tostart the engine, carry out the emer-gency procedure (see chapter “In anemergency”), and contact yourLancia Dealership.

THE KEY

The car is delivered with twocopies of the key A (fig. 7) withmetal insert and power-assistedopening with built-in remote controlfor remote door opening/closing,boot/tailgate opening and switchingthe electronic alarm on/off.

fig. 7

L0A

6003

b

28

The key operates:

– ignition switch;

– steering column lock disengage-ment;

– front door lock latches;

– dead lock device;

– remote door opening/closing;

– remote bonnet lock locking/unlocking;

– remote boot lock locking/unlock-ing;

– remote bonnet opening;

– electronic alarm system;

– passenger side airbag deactiva-tion;

– rear airbag deactivation;

– window and sunroof opening/closing.

The electronic compo-nents inside the key maybe damaged if the key is

exposed to direct sunlight.

Code card

The CODE card (fig. 8) is also sup-plied with the keys and bears thefollowing:

A - The electronic code, to be usedfor emergency starting.

B - The mechanical key code to begiven to the Lancia Dealershipwhen ordering duplicate keys.

C and D - The spaces for the elec-tronic alarm remote control stickers.

By the CONNECT menu, the sys-tem can be set in such a way thatwhen the door opening button ispressed, only the driver’s door or allthe doors are unlocked. To getacquainted with the operation logicof the key with remote control andall the settings that can be modified,refer to the following paragraph“Electronic alarm”.

IMPORTANT If the relevant func-tion has been actuated by the CON-NECT menu, the boot lock willautomatically be released when cen-tral door opening is actuated.

fig. 8

L0A

6004

b

29

The code numbers written on theCODE card must be kept in a safeplace (not in the car).

You should always have the elec-tronic code number written on theCODE card with you at all times incase you need to perform an emer-gency start-up.

All the keys and theCODE card must behanded over to the new

owner when selling the car.

The key (fig. 9) has:

– metal insert A that can beenclosed in the key grip;

– button B to open the metal insert;

– button C for remote door unlock-ing and electronic alarm deactiva-tion at the same time;

– button D for remote door andboot locking and electronic alarmactivation at the same time;

– button E for remote bonnet open-ing;

– led F (where required) indicatingcode sending to the electronic alarmsystem receiver.

Prolonged pressure (more than 2seconds) of button C will actuate theopening of all the door windows andthe sunroof, to aerate the passengercompartment: opening is interrupt-ed when the button is released.

Similarly, door windows and sun-roof can be closed when closing thedoors by pressing down (for morethan 2 seconds) the remote lockingbutton D until they are completelyclosed.

Door windows and sunroof closingis interrupted when button D isreleased.

Pressing again the button D within1 second will activate the dead lockdevice (see paragraph “Doors”).

fig. 9L0

A00

24b

30

After activating the deadlock device it will beimpossible to get out of

the passenger compartment: forthis reason this device must beactivated only after making surethat the passenger compartmentis empty.

The metal insert A (fig. 10) of thekey operates:

– ignition switch;

– steering column lock disengage-ment;

– the front door locks;

– the boot lock;

– the passenger side airbag deacti-vation switch;

– the rear airbag deactivationswitch.

To make the metal insert come outof the key handle, press button B.

Take the greatest carewhen pressing button B(fig. 10), to avoid that the

metal insert A can cause injury ordamage when coming out. ButtonB must be pressed only when thekey is far from your body, in par-ticular your eyes, and fromobjects subject to deterioration(e.g. clothes). Do not leave the keyunattended to prevent anyone,especially children, from han-dling it and pressing button Bunintentionally.

To put the metal insert into the keygrip, keep button B depressed androtate the insert in the directionshown by the arrow until hearing thelocking click. Then release button B.

fig. 10L0

A00

25b

31

Remote control

The remote control is built into thekey and has three buttons C, D and E(fig. 9) and a led F (where required).The buttons respectively operate thecentral opening control, the centrallocking control and the boot lock;the led flashes while the transmitteris sending the code to the receiver.This code (rolling code) changes ateach transmission.

To actuate the remote central dooropening, press button C (fig. 9): thedoors will unlock and the indicatorswill flash twice. To actuate centraldoor locking, press button D: thedoors will lock and the indicatorswill flash once.

By pressing button C, also thealarm system will be switched off; bypressing button D, the alarm systemwill be switched on and the key ledF (where required) will flash whilethe transmitter sends the code to thereceiver: this code (rolling code)varies at each transmission.

IMPORTANT When the remotecontrol battery is run down, thedashboard display will show thesymbolY accompanied by the mes-sage “DISCHARGED REMOTECONTROL BATTERY”. In thiscase, it is advisable to replace thebattery as soon as possible, by fol-lowing the instructions given below.

IMPORTANT The remote controloperation depends on different fac-tors, such as possible interferencewith electromagnetic waves emittedby external sources, the batterycharge and the presence of metalobjects near the key and the car. It ishowever possible to perform anyprocedure using the metal insert ofthe key.

32

REMOTE CONTROL FUNCTIONS

The remote control allows to control the functions that can be modified directly by the user, through the CONNECT set-ting menu, or by the Lancia Dealership. The following table lists the system options and the settings provided when thecar is delivered to the customer.

Requested function

Central door opening(double short blink of direction indicators)

Action performed on theremote control

Single short pressure of button C (fig. 9)

Subsequent double shortpressure (within 1 second) of button C

Prolonged pressure of button C (more than 2seconds)

Standard settings

– Electronic alarm switchingoff– Door and tailgate unlocking– Door deadlock deviceswitching off (if on)– Ceiling light switching infor about 30 seconds or untilthe key is turned to MAR

– Door unlocking

– Opening of the windowsand sunroof (to completeopening or until the button is released)

Functions that can be modified

– Driver’s door unlocking

– Tailgate always locked

33

Requested function

Central door locking (single prolonged blink of direction indicators)

Tailgate unlocking and tailgatelifting (double blink ofdirection indicators)

Action performed on theremote control

Single short pressure of button D (fig. 9)

Subsequent double shortpressure (within 1 second) of button D

Prolonged pressure of buttonD (more than 2 seconds)

Single short pressure of button E (fig. 9)

Prolonged pressure of buttonE (more than 1 second)

Standard settings

– Electronic alarm switching on– Door and boot locking– Ceiling lights switching off

– Door deadlock deviceswitching on

– Closing of windows and sunroof (to complete closingor until the button is released)– Ceiling lights switching off

– Boot alarm switching off– Tailgate lockunlocking

– Boot alarm switching off– Tailgate unlocking and tailgate raising


34

Requested function

Central door opening

Central door locking

Action performed with themetal insert of the key

Single, clockwise rotation ofthe key in the lock latch ofone of the doors

Single, anticlockwise rotationof the key in the lock latch of one of the doors

Standard settings

– Door and tailgate unlocking– Door deadlock deviceswitching off (if on)– Ceiling lights switching onfor about 30 seconds, or until the key is turned to MAR

– Doors and tailgate locking– Ceiling lights switching off


– Driver’s door unlocking

– Tailgate always locked

FUNCTIONS THAT CAN BE ACTUATED WITH THE METAL INSERT OF THE KEY

The metal insert of the key allows to control the functions that can be modified directly by the user, by means of theCONNECT setting menu, or by the Lancia Dealership. The following table lists the system options and the settings pro-vided when the car is delivered to the customer.

35

ACTUATION LOGIC OF THE BOOT LOCK BY MEANS OF THE REMOTE CONTROL

Central door locking system condition

Operation to open the boot

Operation to close the boot

Bound to central door locking

Off

Press the boot button

The lock remainsunlocked when clos-ing the boot

On

Press the remote control button E (fig. 9)then press the bootbutton or keep theremote control buttondepressed(more than 1 second)

The lock remainsunlocked when closing the boot. For locking the lock,press the remotecontrol button D(fig. 9)

Not bound to the central door locking

Off

Press the remote control button E (fig. 9),then press the bootbutton or keep theremote control buttondepressed(more than 1 second)

The lock remainsunlocked when theboot is closed. The lock is automati-cally locked when thecar speed exceeds 20km/h approximately

On

Press the remote control button E (fig. 9),then press the boot button or keep the remote control button depressed (more than 1 second)

The lock remainsunlocked when closingthe boot. For locking the lock,press the remote control button D (fig. 9

36

ACTUATION LOGIC OF THE BOOT LOCK BY MEANS OF THE METAL INSERT OF THE KEY


Operation to open the boot

Operation to close the boot

Bound to the central door locking

Off

Press the tailgate button

The lock remainsunlocked when theboot is closed

On

Turn the key clock-wise in the lock latch

The lock remainsunlocked when closing the boot. For locking the lock,press the remote con-trol button D (fig. 9)

Not bound to the central door locking

Off


The lock remainsunlocked when closing the boot. For locking the lock,press the remote con-trol button D (fig. 9).In any case, the lockwill automatically be locked when thecar speed exceeds 20 km/happroximately

On


The lock remainsunlocked when closingthe boot. For locking the lock,press the remote con-trol button D (fig. 9)

37

OPENING THE TAILGATE

The tailgate can be opened fromthe outside by pressing the remotecontrol button E (fig. 9), even whenthe electronic alarm is on.

One single short pressure of thebutton will switch the boot alarmsystem off and release the lock: thetailgate can therefore be openedfrom the outside by pressing theboot button. A prolonged pressure(more than 1 second) of the buttonwill switch the boot alarm system offand open the tailgate, which willpartially lift.

The opening of the tailgate isaccompanied by two direction indi-cator flashes.

When tailgate opening is actuated,the alarm system disconnects theboot sensor and the direction indica-tors flash twice (except for the ver-sions of certain markets).

When the tailgate is closed again,press button D (fig. 9) to restorelocking and control functions; thedirection indicators will flash twice(except for the versions of certainmarkets).

If the tailgate is not open within 30seconds after actuating the bootunlock control, the tailgate lock willbe re-locked and the alarm systemwill be reactivated.

AUTOMATICALLY ACTUATEDFUNCTIONS

The system automatically controlsthe following functions (settings thatcannot be modified):

– boot locking if, within 30 secondsafter boot unlocking, it will not beopened;

– possible unlocking of all the doorlocks, in case of impact with actua-tion of the inertia switch;

– lock release and tailgate opening(actuated by the button inside thecar);

– door opening/closing by the but-tons inside the car;

– disconnection of all services whenthe key is turned to STOP, exclud-ing sound system, window regula-tors, sunroof and internal lightinguntil doors are opened;

– progressive switching on/off ofinternal lights;

– light indication of boot open/closed.

38

KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

If the remote control battery is rundown, the symbol Y will appear onthe instrument display, togetherwith the message “DISCHARGEDREMOTE CONTROL BATTERY”.In this case, the battery mustreplaced with a new one of the sametype that can be purchased at com-mon stores.

Used batteries pollutethe environment. Disposeof them in the special

containers as specified by currentlegislation. Keep batteries awayfrom open flames and high tem-peratures. Keep away from chil-dren.

To replace the battery:

– press button B (fig. 11) andmove the metal insert A to openposition;

– remove the small cover C (fig. 12)by levering at point D.

– replace battery E (fig. 13) byplacing it with the pole (+) facingupwards;

– refit the small cover by pressingit.

fig. 11

L0A

0025

b

fig. 12L0

A60

05b

fig. 13

L0A

6006

b

39

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The receiver will acknowledge upto eight keys with remote control. Ifyou ever need a new key with remotecontrol, go directly to a LanciaDealership, taking with you theCODE card, personal identificationand the car ownership papers.

ELECTRONICALARM

The system consists of:

– radio-frequency transmitter(built into the ignition key);

– radio-frequency receiver;

– electronic control unit with built-in siren (the siren can be deactivat-ed);

– volumetric sensors (which can bedeactivated);

– anti-lifting sensor (which can bedeactivated).

The electronic alarm is controlledby the receiver and is switchedon/off by means of the remote con-trol built into the key, which sendsthe secret and variable code.

The electronic alarm monitors:

– the illicit opening of doors, bon-net and boot (perimetral protec-tion);

– ignition switch operation;

– cutting of battery cables;

– moving bodies inside the passen-ger compartment (volumetric pro-tection)

– any abnormal raising/sloping ofthe car.

IMPORTANT The engine immo-bilising system is governed by theLancia CODE system and is auto-matically activated when the igni-tion key is removed.

fig. 14

L0A

0097

b

40

SWITCHING THE ALARM ON

With the doors and boot closed andthe key removed from the ignitionswitch, point the key with theremote control in the direction of thecar, then press and release the but-ton B (fig. 14).

With the exception of certain mar-kets, a beep will be heard, the direc-tion indicators will light up for about1 second and the doors will belocked.

The alarm activation is precededby a self-test: if a fault is found, thesystem sounds another warning beepand when the key is turned to MAR,the symbol Y will appear on theinstrument panel display, togetherwith the message “ALARMFAULT”.

IMPORTANT When operating thecentral door locking with the metalinsert of the key, the alarm is notactivated.

Surveillance

After activating the alarm, the reddeterrent leds A (fig. 15) on thefront door panels will flash to indi-cate that the surveillance function ison. The leds will stay on flashinguntil the alarm system surveillancefunction is on.

IMPORTANT The electronicalarm operation is adapted to therules in force in the various coun-tries.

Self-testand door/bonnet/boot controlfunctions

If, after switching the alarm systemon, a second beep is heard, switchthe system off by pressing button A(fig. 14), and check that the doors,bonnet and boot are correctly closed.Then switch the system on again bypressing button B.

Otherwise the system will cut outthe door bonnet and boot from thesurveillance if they are not properlyclosed.

If the doors, the bonnet and theboot are properly closed and a sec-ond beep is heard again, it meansthat the system self-test function hasfound a fault. Contact a LanciaDealership.

fig. 15L0

A00

29b

41

SWITCHING THE ALARM OFF

To switch the alarm off, press thekey button A (fig. 14).

The following actions will be car-ried out by the system (with theexception of certain markets):

– the direction indicators will flashtwice;

– two beeps will be heard;

– driver’s door or doors unlocking,depending on the setting selected onthe CONNECT menu.

IMPORTANT When operating thecentral door unlocking with themetal insert of the key, the alarm isnot deactivated.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION

Do not leave passengers or pets inthe parked car and completely closethe windows and the sunroof toensure the correct operation of thevolumetric sensors. Furthermore,make sure that the doors, bonnetand boot/tailgate are properlyclosed.

To deactivate the volumetric protection, press button A (fig. 16)on the front ceiling light: when thefunction is off, the button warninglight will flash for about 3 secondsand then goes out.

Protection cut out stays on untilactivating the central door openingagain.

IMPORTANT Volumetric protec-tion shall be deactivated after about1 minute from turning the key toSTOP. To deactivate the volumetricprotection after this period, turn thekey to MAR and then to STOPagain.

ANTI-LIFTING SENSOR

The anti-lifting sensor detects vari-ations in slant to signal lifting orpartial lifting (e.g. to remove awheel) of the car.

The sensor can detect minimalvariations in cat trim along both thelongitudinal axis and the transversalaxis. Variations in trim lower than0.5°/min. (such as, for example, aslow deflating tyre) are not take intoaccount.

To switch the anti-lifting protec-tion off, press button B (fig. 16) onthe front ceiling light: when thefunction is off, the button warninglight will flash for about 3 secondsand then goes out.

To ensure correct opera-tion of the volumetric pro-tection system, before acti-

vating the alarm, check that win-dows and sunroof (where pro-vided) are perfectly closed.

42

IMPORTANT The anti-lifting sen-sor shall be deactivated after about 1minute from turning the key toSTOP. To deactivate the anti-liftingsensor after this period, turn the keyto MAR and then to STOP again.

Sensor cut out stays on until acti-vating the central door openingagain.

WHAT TRIGGERS THE ALARMOFF

The alarm will be triggered off inthe following conditions:

– if a door, the bonnet or theboot/tailgate is opened;

– if the battery or electric cablesare disconnected or cut;

– if there is an intrusion in the pas-senger compartment, e.g. a brokenwindow (volumetric protection);

– if an attempt is made to start theengine (key at MAR);

– if an attempt has been made tolift the car.

According to the markets, thealarm can operate the siren and thedirection indicators (for about 25seconds). The intervention modalityand the number of cycles can varyaccording to the markets.

A maximum number of acoustic/visual cycles is foreseen in all cases.

After the alarm cycle, the systemreturns to its normal surveillancefunction.

INDICATIONS OF ATTEMPTSTO BREAK IN

The alarm system indicates theattempts to break in stored by thecontrol unit, through the lighting upon the instrument panel display ofsymbol Y together with the mes-sage “BREAK IN ATTEMPT”.

DEACTIVATING THE ALARM

To completely deactivate the elec-tronic alarm (for example, if the caris to be stored for a long period oftime), simply lock the car turningthe key in the lock.

FUNCTIONS THAT CAN BEDEACTIVATEDOR MODIFIED

The functions that can be directlydeactivated:

– volumetric protection, which canbe disconnected by means of buttonA (fig. 16) set on the front ceilinglight: when the function is off, thebutton warning light flashes forabout 3 seconds and then goes out;

– anti-lifting protection, which canbe disconnected by means of buttonB (fig. 16) set on the front ceilinglight: when the function is off, thebutton warning light flashes forabout 3 seconds and then goes out.

fig. 16

L0A

0028

b

43

The functions that can be modifiedthrough the CONNECT systemmenu are:

– boot lock release by actuatingcentral door opening (*);

– central door and tailgate lockingwhen the car speed exceeds 20km/h, without actuation of thedeadlock device.

(*) When this function is discon-nected to lock the boot lock whenthe boot is closed, even if the doorswere closed, the remote control orthe key must be used, as it is nor-mally the case with the doors; thus,the boot can be opened with thehandle in the event that the key isleft inside the lock.

MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION

In the respect of the legislation inforce in each country in the matterof radio-frequency devices, pleasenote that the homologation numberis printed on the component formarkets where this is required.

IMPORTANT The code markingmay also be printed on the transmit-ter and/or the receiver for ver-sions/markets where this is required.

EASY ENTRY/EXITSYSTEM

Versions provided with electricsteering wheel adjustment may alsoincorporate the Easy Entry/Exit sys-tem, which allows the driver to getinto and out of the car withimproved ease.

In the cars provided with this sys-tem, the steering wheel lifts and theseat goes back before the driver getsout of the car.

The function is actuated when thedoor is opened but only if the igni-tion key is at STOP or has beenremoved.

When the driver opens the door toget into the car, both the seat andthe steering wheel have already goneback. The seat and the steeringwheel will return to their normal dri-ving position after the driver has sat,closed the door and turned the keyto MAR.

44

RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (KEYLESSSYSTEM)(where provided)

The Keyless System is a recognitionsystem controlled by device A(fig. 17), called CID (CustomerIdentification Device), which per-forms the same functions as the keyprovided with the remote controlsupplied with the car. It does notrequire any manual action since itidentifies the person that holds thedevice as the owner of the car.

Therefore, it is enough for the dri-ver to bring the CID device with

himself so that the car can recognizehim, allowing him to get into the carand start the engine without havingto use the key.

In any case, the CID device isequipped with three buttons per-forming the same functions as theordinary radio-frequency remotecontrol that enable the driver toremotely operate on the car.Moreover, it includes the key for themechanical emergency actuation ofthe boot and door locks (in case theCID device battery or the car batteryare run down).

The buttons perform the followingfunctions (fig. 18):

– button B for remote actuation ofcentral door opening and the simul-

taneous switching off of the elec-tronic alarm

– button C for remote actuation ofcentral door locking, boot lockingand the simultaneous switching onof the electronic alarm

– button D for remote tailgateopening

– led E (where required) to indi-cate code sending to the electronicalarm system receiver.

To remove emergency key F(fig. 19), take off cover G (fig. 20)by levering at point H.

fig. 17

L0A

6007

b

fig. 18L0

A02

24b

fig. 19

L0A

6008

b

45

The emergency key actuates:– the front door locks– the boot lock– the passenger’s airbag deactiva-

tion switch – the rear side bag deactivation

switch.

The CID device check is carried outwhen the button inside the doorhandle or on the boot is pressed: ifthe Keyless System recognizes theCID device, it disconnects the alarmsystem and actuates the boot or dooropening mechanism.

Identification occurs only if theCID owner is standing about 1 metrefar from the door that has to beopened or from the boot.

IMPORTANT The CID deviceoperation depends on several fac-tors, such as the possible interfer-ence with electromagnetic wavesemitted by external sources, the bat-tery charge and the presence ofmetal objects near the CID deviceand the car. In any case, operationscan be carried out by means of theemergency key included in the CIDdevice.

To switch off the front passenger’sairbag and the rear side bags, usethe emergency key included in theCID device.

The CID owner must take the fol-lowing precautions to be able tohave all the system functions avail-able:

– For unlocking doors or boot, theCID device must be outside the carat a maximum distance of approx.one meter from the handle involved.

– To actuate the ignition switchfunctions, the CID device must beinside the car.

– If the CID device is taken awayfrom the car (e.g. it is kept inside abag or in a pocket) the doors cannotbe locked and the car started anymore.

– If central locking has been acti-vated from inside the car by pressingthe button on the driver’s doorpanel, it will only be possible to getinto the car by pressing the buttonon the CID device.

fig. 20

L0A

6009

b

46

IMPORTANT Do not remove thebattery from the CID device untilwhen its replacement is possible.

Where system is unable to identifythe CID device (e.g. the CID batteryis flat) the car can be accessed byusing the emergency key existinginside the CID itself.

When switched on, the alarm sys-tem will be actuated when the dooris opened and the siren will startsounding but will be switched off byturning the starting knob to MAR.

Car start-up will moreover be possi-ble by positioning the CID into thespecial seat A (fig. 21), located infront of the gear lever. Under theseconditions, such compartment is theonly position capable of acknowledg-ing the presence of a CID deviceinside the passenger compartment.

fig. 21L0

A01

82b

It is advised to alwayscarry about with you theCID device, avoiding to

leave it unguarded inside thepassenger compartment, becausein this case any children remain-ing unguarded inside the car orunauthorised people could startthe engine.

Do not expose the CIDdevice to electromagneticfields or high-intensity

radio frequency sources, to avoidoperation anomalies. Heavyshocks or exposure to direct sun-light could damage the electroniccomponents of the device.

IMPORTANT Do not lay the CIDdevice outside the car on the sunroof,to avoid a fake identification of theCID itself as if inside the car. It is rec-ommend to carry about with you theCID device (e.g. into a pocket).

“GARAGE” POSITION(EMERGENCY ACTUATION)

During emergency or servicingoperations, the CID device shall behoused in the dashboard centraloddment compartment A (fig. 21) infront of the gear lever.

The electronic component in theCID device is of the “passive” typeand does not require dedicatedpower supply; it can therefore oper-ate in “garage” position even if theCID device battery is run down.

47

For an emergency engine start upproceed as follows:

– Lay the CID device into the emer-gency seat A (fig. 21)

– Push on the clutch pedal (manualgearbox versions) or on the brakepedal (automatic gearbox versions)

– To turn on the instrument panel,turn knob A (fig. 22) to positionMAR.

To start engine, turn the knob A(fig. 22) to position AVV, and releaseas soon as the engine is started.

When the car is running, theengine gets going even if the CIDdevice has been removed from the“garage” position. In any case, theCID device will have to be put backto the “garage” position for subse-quent start-up.

IMPORTANT Set free from anyobject compartment A (fig. 21),before starting the emergency enginestart-up procedure.

IMPORTANT Remember to carryabout with you the CID devicebefore moving away from the car.

KNOB FOR ACTUATINGINSTRUMENT PANEL AND ENGINE START-UP

The car is fitted with a switch con-trolled by knob A (fig. 22), enablingto actuate STOP, MAR and AVVstarter motor switch functions.

IMPORTANT Knob rotation isenabled by the presence of the CIDdevice in the car and by the pressingof the clutch pedal (or the brake pedalfor cars with automatic transmission).

STOP position

This position of the switch knobcorresponds to: engine off and steer-ing column lock on. Certain electri-cal devices (e.g. CONNECT) can beoperated.

MAR position

This is the running position andcorresponds to: instrument panel onand steering column lock off. All theelectrical devices can be operated.

AVV position

This is the position for enginestart-up: release the knob as soon asthe engine has started. The enginecan be started only when the CIDdevice is inside the car.

IMPORTANT System checks forthe presence of a CID device insidethe passenger compartment, when-ever a door or the luggage compart-ment are closed, while the instru-ment panel is turned on or theengine is running. If the CID deviceis not identified, e.g. because theCID owner leaves the car, the dis-play on the instrument panel willdisplay the message: “ELECTRON-IC KEY NO LONGER PRESENT INTHE CAR – ENGINE CANNOT BERESTARTED”. The engine willkeep on running and instrumentpanel will remain on, until the suc-

fig. 22L0

A02

23b

48

Before leaving the car ina car-wash tunnel, disen-gage the parking brake by

following the instructionsdescribed in the relevant para-graph, and leave the CID deviceinside the passenger compart-ment, to avoid automatic steeringcolumn lock.

IMPORTANT User is not authorisedto move the car if the start-up knob isnot turned to the position MAR.Should it be necessary to tow the car,it is advised to turn the knob to theMAR position before moving the car.

Steering column unlocking

The steering column is automati-cally switched off, and the instru-ment panel and electrical servicesswitched on, when the systemdetects the simultaneous presence ofthe following conditions:

cessive rotation of knob A (fig. 22)to the STOP position, and it will notbe possible to restart the car until avalid CID device is identified insidethe passenger compartment.

IMPORTANT Make sure the CIDdevice is not positioned in places dif-ficult to be accessed by the identifi-cation system, such as the instru-ment panel, the car floor or the shelfbelow the rear window. Some elec-tronic devices (e. g. mobile phones,PDA, etc.) can moreover influencethe CID device identification. In thecase where, after a start-up opera-tion, the message “ELECTRONICKEY NOT IDENTIFIED” should bedisplayed, on the instrument panel,make sure make sure whether theCID is present into the passengercompartment and it is located inplaces tat can be reached by identi-fication system.

IMPORTANT If the CID device isinside the luggage compartment, it ispossible that the engine could not bestarted.

Engine stop

To switch the engine off, turn theknob from MAR to STOP: theengine will stop and the instrumentpanel will display the message“STEERING LOCKED WHENDOORS CLOSED”.

Steering column locking

The steering column lock is auto-matically switched on by actuatingdoor closing by means of the remotecontrol, if the system has detectedthe simultaneous presence of the fol-lowing conditions:

– engine off (knob rotation toSTOP with the car at a standstill)

– clutch pedal released (brake pedalreleased on versions with automatictransmission).

IMPORTANT The steering columnlock is not switched on when thedoor locks are actuated by means ofthe emergency key in the CIDdevice, or automatically when theCID device is taken away from thecar.

49

– CID device inside the car

– clutch pedal depressed (brakepedal on versions with automatictransmission).

IMPORTANT If the car battery isrun down, the steering column can-not be unlocked and the car cannotbe started. In this case, an auxiliarybattery must be connected, in orderto unlock the steering column andstart the engine (see paragraph“Jump starting”); then, contact aLancia Dealership to have the bat-tery recharged.

DOOR UNLOCKING TO ACCESS CAR

To perform door unlocking, push onbutton A (fig. 23 front doors - fig. 24 rear doors) in the inside partof handles. The Keyless System iden-tifies the CID device, deactivates theelectronic alarm system and operatesthe door/s unlocking mechanism.Leds on door panels will be lit to agreen colour to notice unlocking.

It is possible to set unlocking of dri-ver’s door only or the contemporaryunlocking of all the doors, by the set-tings on CONNECT (see the followingparagraph “System Settings”). If “dri-ver’s door unlocking” is set, it will bepossible to access the passenger com-partment only through this door; tounlock the other doors push on but-ton B (fig. 18) on CID device.

fig. 23

L0A

0334

b

IMPORTANT If car or CID devicebatteries are flat, to unlock the doorlock it is necessary to operate on therevolving plug with the emergencykey F (fig. 19).

IMPORTANT If the door lock hasbeen closed with the emergency key F(fig. 19), Keyless System functionswill temporarily disabled. These func-tions will automatically be restored atthe next unlocking by pushing buttonB (fig. 18) on the CID device or afterthe unlocking with the emergency keyF (fig. 19).

fig. 24

L0A

0333

b

50

AUTOCLOSE FUNCTION (AUTOMATIC LOCKING OF DOORS, BOOT, AND FUEL FILLER FLAP)

The Keyless System automaticallylocks the boot and door locks whenthe owner goes away with the CIDdevice at least 4 metres far from thecar. Boot and door locking is con-firmed by the flashing of directionindicators.

This function can be switched offby acting on the CONNECT settings.

The Autoclose function is not actu-ated in the following cases:

– If, when the driver moves awayfrom the car, one or several doors arenot closed correctly, automatic lock-ing will not be actuated and the cardoors and boot will remain open: theowner is warned of this by the failedblinking of direction indicators.

– If at the time of moving away,other CID devices are identified asexisting in the car passenger com-partment or in the luggage compart-ment, or if the knob is not set to theSTOP position (instrument panelturned on or engine started).

LOCKING THE DOOR ANDLEAVING THE CAR (with theidentification system disabled)

To lock doors when system func-tions are disabled, proceed as fol-lows:

– Close all the doors and the lug-gage compartment bonnet

– Push on button C (fig. 18) onCID device to engage central lockingof doors, of luggage compartmentand of electronic alarm.

Leds on door panels will lit forapprox. 3 seconds in red colour andthen they will start flashing withdeterring function.

If one or more doors are not cor-rectly closed, leds will start flashingfor 3 seconds instead of being litwith a fixed light. After flashing for3 seconds, leds will anyhow beturned out, except for that on thedriver’s door, which will start flash-ing with a deterring function.

TAILGATE OPENING

If the boot shall be opened fromoutside, with the doors locked, it isenough to get near the boot with theCID device and press the boot but-ton: the boot lock will release andthe boot will be opened while thedoors remain locked. If the alarmsystem is on, the boot protection,volumetric protection and anti-lift-ing protection will be temporarilyexcluded.

When the boot is reclosed, it willhave to be locked by pressing thedoor locking button on the CIDdevice, which will resume the alarmprotection, too.

IMPORTANT Before closing theluggage compartment bonnet, makesure you always have with yourselfthe CID device.

51

The alarm system, thesteering lock and thedeadlock device are not

actuated by the automatic lock-ing function.

IMPORTANT Purpose of Autoclosefunction is to lock doors, luggagecompartment and fuel filler flap whenowner possessing the CID device,moves away from the car. In this case(Autoclose function on), push on but-ton B (fig. 18) on CID to unlock fuelfiller flap in order to refuel.

– If there is a fault in the identifi-cation system (Keyless System).

– If the CID device battery is flat.

– If the last engine start-up wasperformed with the CID device inthe emergency position.

IMPORTANT

– If, after locking the locks, a dooris opened from inside the car, all thelocks will be unlocked.

– If central door opening has beenactivated by pressing the CID but-ton, the Autoclose function (auto-matic locking) will not be activated.To activate central locking, press therelevant button on the CID device.

– When the Autoclose function on,before leaving the car, make sureyou always have with yourself theCID device.

The Autoclose function can beinfluenced by the presence of elec-tromagnetic noises; in these caseslock the doors with the remote con-trol or use the door locks.

CENTRAL LOCKING/OPENINGOF WINDOWS AND SUNROOF

When central door locking isswitched on/off, also the centrallocking/opening of the windows andthe sunroof can be controlled, pro-vided that all the doors are properlyclosed.

To actuate central locking of thewindows and the sunroof, keep theremote control button A (fig. 25)depressed for more than 2 secondsafter closing the doors: both the win-dow regulators and the sunroof willbe actuated until they are fullyclosed or until the button is released.

fig. 25

L0A

0253

b

52

The other recognition system set-tings that can be enabled/disabledare:

– automatic locking of doors andboot.

As regards the setting of the recog-nition system customizations, referto the CONNECT supplement.

FAILURE INDICATION

The presence of anomalies in theKeyless System is indicated by thelighting of symbol Y on the instru-ment display, together with the mes-sage “VEHICLE PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAULT”.

IMPORTANT In case of fault, con-tact your Lancia Dealership.

Before and during auto-matic actuation of thewindow regulators and

sunroof, always make sure thatthe passengers and the personsstanding near the car are notexposed to the risk of injures thatmay be caused either by the mov-ing windows and sunroof or byobjects dragged or hit by thesame.

To actuate central opening of thewindows and sunroof, keep theremote control button B (fig. 25)depressed for more than 2 secondsafter opening the doors: both the win-dow regulators and the sunroof will beactuated until they are fully opened oruntil the button is released.

This function can be used to aeratethe passenger’s compartment beforegetting into the car parked in the sun.

IMPORTANT Do not lay the CIDdevice outside the car on the sunroof,to avoid a fake identification of theCID itself as if inside the car. It is rec-ommend to carry about with you theCID device (e.g. into a pocket).

SYSTEM SETTINGS

The CONNECT enables to cus-tomize certain functions of theKeyless System recognition system,through the settings that can beselected on the CONNECT display.

The “central unlock” and “driver’sdoor unlock” functions of the centrallocking can be set also for theKeyless System and operate as fol-lows:

– central unlock: all the car doorsare unlocked simultaneously andaccess is possible through every door

– driver’s door unlock: access ispossible through the driver’s doorwhereas the other doors remainlocked, thus preventing un-autho-rized persons from getting into thecar. In this case, the led on the dri-ver’s door panel lights up (greencolour) whereas the leds on the otherdoors remain off.

When “unlocking driver’s door” isset, it is anyhow possible to unlock allthe doors, to enable access to passen-gers, by pushing button B (fig. 18) onCID device or, after opening the dri-ver’s door, by pushing the centralunlock button existing on the doorpanel.

53

REQUEST FOR ADDITIONALCID DEVICES

The Keyless System receiver canrecognize up to 4 CID devices.

If you have requested additionalCID devices, remember that the pro-gramming operation must be carriedout simultaneously for all the CIDdevices.

Therefore, should a new CIDdevice be necessary for whateverreason, go to your LanciaDealership, bringing with you allthe keys and CID devices in yourpossession, the CODE card, your IDcard and the documents that certifycar possession.

MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION

In the respect of the legislation inforce in each country in the matterof radio-frequency devices, pleasenote that for markets where trans-mitter marking is requested, thehomologation number is printed onthe CID device.

The code marking may also beprinted on the CID and/ or thereceiver for versions/markets wherethis is required.

Used batteries pollutethe environment. Disposeof them in the special

containers as specified by currentlegislation. Keep batteries awayfrom open flames and high tem-peratures. Keep away from chil-dren.

fig. 26

L0A

6010

b

CID DEVICE BATTERY REPLACEMENT

If the CID device battery is almostflat, system performance worsens. Inthis case, the battery must replacedwith a new one of the same type thatcan be purchased at common stores.

54

DOORS

fig. 29

L0A

0174

b

Before opening a door,check whether this opera-tion can be performed

under safety conditions.

OPENING/CLOSING FROM THEOUTSIDE

With the doors closed, either pressbutton A or B (fig. 29) on the key gripor insert and turn the key (fig. 30) inone of the front doors.

IMPORTANT Although the pres-ence of electromagnetic waves is notharmful to the CID device, it can nev-ertheless influence battery life cycle.Avoid therefore to leave the CID for along time near electronic devices (e.g.PC monitors, TV sets, etc.).

IMPORTANT Electronic devices(e.g. mobile phones, PDA, etc.) caninfluence the correct identificationof the CID device by the KeylessSystem. It is advised to keep the CIDdevice apart from such devices, e.g.into different pockets.

To replace the battery:

– remove the small cover A (fig. 26)by levering at point B

– take out the emergency key C(fig. 27)

– replace the battery D (fig. 28)inserting it with the pole (+) facingupwards

– refit the emergency key

– refit the small cover by pressing it.

IMPORTANT It is advised to avoidtouching the electric contacts exist-ing inside the CID and to preventtheir contact with liquids or dust.

fig. 27

L0A

6011

b

fig. 28L0

A60

12b

55

To unlock, turn the key clockwise1; to lock, turn the key counter-clockwise 2.

When the doors are released bymeans of the remote control, thealarm system and the deadlockdevice (described below) are alsoswitched off.

IMPORTANT The electronicalarm will not be switched off if thedoor is unlocked by the key in thelock.

Inside each handle there is a buttonA (fig. 31 front doors - fig. 32 reardoors) which actuates, when thehandle is caught, the servo controlused to open the door.

The car is fitted with power locksthat control the mechanical parts atdoor opening.

fig. 30

L0A

0176

b

fig. 32L0

A01

73b

fig. 31

L0A

0177

b

In an emergency (flat battery orelectric system failure), doors can beopened, with the locks released, bypressing button B (fig. 31 frontdoors - fig. 32 rear doors).

All door panels incorporate ared/green led A (fig. 33 front doors -fig. 34 rear doors) , indicating thelocking/unlocking condition. Theleds come on with red light for about3 seconds after door locking andwith green light after unlocking.

IMPORTANT Door leds stay onfor about 3 seconds only; therefore,leds are off under normal conditions.

fig. 33

L0A

6013

b

56

Deadlock device

The deadlock device enables to dis-connect mechanically the internaldoor handles; in this case, doors can-not be opened from the inside byacting on the handles after breakingthe glass (improving protectionagainst theft).

The device can be switched on bypressing the remote control button B(fig. 29) again within 1 second afterclosing the doors: active functionwill be indicated by a beep and 2further blinks of the direction indi-cators.

The device activates only if all thedoors are properly closed.

When the deadlock device isswitched on, the door panel leds willflash twice with red light.

After activating the deadlock device it will beimpossible to get out of

the passenger compartment: forthis reason this device must beactivated only after making surethat the passenger compartmentis empty.

The front door leds are also used asdeterrent leds for the alarm system;as a consequence, they will flashwhen the alarm system is on or thedoors are locked.

The CONNECT enables to set thecentral locking of all the doors oronly the driver’s door.

In the former case, all the car doorsare unlocked simultaneously andaccess is possible through any door.In the second case, access is possibleonly through the driver’s door,whereas the other doors are locked,thus preventing un-authorized per-sons from getting into the car.

In this case, the driver’s door ledcomes on with green light, whereasthe leds on the other doors willremain off.

When only the driver’s door isunlocked, after opening the driver’sdoor, also the other doors can beunlocked by pressing the centralunlocking button B (fig. 35) so as toenable passengers getting into thecar.

IMPORTANT Buttons B and C(fig. 35) are disabled when the doorsare locked from the outside.

If, when the doors are closed fromthe outside, one or more doorsand/or the boot are not closed cor-rectly, the direction indicators willflash rapidly for a few seconds.

fig. 34

L0A

6014

b

fig. 35L0

A00

51b

57

OPENING/CLOSING FROM THE INSIDE

To open the door even when thelock is locked, pull handle A (fig. 35front doors - fig. 36 rear doors) set inthe upper part of the panel.

Next to each door handle are twobuttons that actuate locklocking/unlocking:

– B button for unlocking;

– C button for locking.

The red/green leds A (fig. 33 frontdoors – fig. 34 rear doors) indicatethe locking/unlocking condition.The leds come on with red light forabout 3 seconds after door lockingand with green light after unlocking.

By pulling the internal handle ofthe driver’s door, all the doors oronly the driver’s door will be simul-taneously unlocked, depending onthe setting selected on the CON-NECT. By pulling the internal han-dle of any other door, all the doorsare simultaneously unlocked.

fig. 36

L0A

0052

b

With the dead lockdevice on, pressing theexternal handle button of

one of the doors while unlockingthe doors by the remote controlcould cause the disconnection ofthe internal handle of theinvolved door thus makingimpossible to open that doorfrom the inside. To restore regu-lar operation, just press theremote control central doorunlocking button or button B (fig.36) on the door panel.

A led is located near each doorhandle to make it easy to find thehandle in the dark. The leds light upfor about 2 minutes after turning theignition key to STOP or until a dooris opened.

Door open indication

The driver is informed that one orseveral doors are not closed correct-ly by the lighting of the correspond-ing symbols on the instrument dis-play, together with the messages“DOOR OPEN” or “DOORSOPEN”.

58

Disabling rear doorlocking/unlocking controls

To disable rear door locking/un-locking controls, press the driver'sdoor button A (fig. 37) for more thanone second. When controls are off, thebutton warning light will come on.

To restore controls, press button Aagain. When controls are enabled, thebutton warning light is off.

CHILD LOCK

To prevent opening the rear doorsfrom the inside.

Engage by inserting the tip of the ig-nition key in A (fig. 38) to turn thelock.

Position 1 - engaged.

Position 2 - disengaged.

The device will be engaged even ifthe doors are unlocked by means ofthe centralised system.

IMPORTANT After engaging thelock, check by trying to open a reardoor with the internal handle.

fig. 37

L0A

0100

b

Always use the lock whentransporting children. Thiswill prevent them opening

a door by themselves when travel-ling.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKINGWHEN SPEED EXCEEDS 20 KM/H

The CONNECT enables to setautomatic locking of doors, boot andfuel cap when the car speed exceeds20 km/h.

To actuate these settings, refer tothe CONNECT supplement provid-ed with the car.

fig. 38L0

A04

21b

59

AUTOCLOSE FUNCTION (AUTOMATIC LOCKING WITH KEYLESS SYSTEMRECOGNITION SYSTEM)

On versions equipped with KeylessSystem, the “Autoclose” functioncan be actuated/deactivated throughthe CONNECT settings. This func-tion makes it possible to automati-cally lock the boot and doors whenthe CID device is taken away fromthe car.

When leaving the car, if one ormore doors are not closed correctly,the car will remain open and a fur-ther beep will sound to indicate thatthe locks have not been locked.

The “Autoclose” functions actuatesneither the alarm system nor thedoor deadlock device (refer to thecontents of the relevant paragraph).In any case, these functions can beactuated by means of the remotecontrol.

LOCK RELEASE IN CASE OFACCIDENT

In case of collision with actuationof the inertia switch, the door locksare automatically released to allowsrescuers to get access to the passen-ger compartment.

In any case, door open-ing from the outsidedepends on the door con-

ditions after the collision:deformed doors cannot very oftenbe opened even if the lock isreleased. In such a case, try toopen the other doors.

INITIALISING THE DOORLOCKING CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the battery is electricallyconnected again or it is reloadedafter being completely flat or afterreplacing one of the protection fuses,to restore the correct operation ofthe door locking, of air conditioningand of ESP system, it is necessary toperform the initialisation operationscontained in the paragraph “If bat-tery is to be disconnected” in thechapter “In an emergency”.

The external mechanicalconnections are activeonly when the doors are

unlocked.In the event that the driver has

actuated central locking from theinside and, after a collision, theinertia switch has not actuatedthe automatic door unlockingfunction due to the loss of ordamage to the battery, access tothe passenger compartment willnot be possible from the outside.

60

MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE SEATS (Moving the seats backwards orforwards) (fig. 39)

Lift lever A and push the seat for-wards or backwards: you are in the cor-rect position for driving when yourhands are resting on the steering wheelrim and your arms are slightly bent.

FRONT SEATSOnly adjust the driver’s

seat when the car is sta-tionary.

Once you have leverreleased the lever, checkthat the seat is firmly

locked in the runners by trying tomove it back and forth. Failure tolock the seat in place could resultin the seat moving suddenly anddangerously.

ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLESEATS

Electric adjustment of seats is pos-sible under one of the following con-ditions:

– ignition switch to MAR– for approx. 1 minute after

removing the ignition key or turningit to STOP

– for approx. 3 minutes with keyremoved or turned to STOP andwith door open.

The seat adjustment controls are:fig. 40 - Manually adjustable seats -

back and forth adjustmentA - Height adjustmentB - Back rest angleC - Lumbar adjustment.

fig. 39

L0A

0248

b

fig. 41

L0A

0153

b

fig. 40L0

A02

49b

Upholstery of your carhas been designed to with-stand wear deriving from

common use of the car. You arehowever recommended to avoidstrong and/or continuous scratch-ing with clothing accessories suchas metallic buckles, studs, Velcrofastenings and the like, since theseitems cause circumscribed stressof the cover fabric that could leadto yarn breaking, and damage thecover as a consequence.

61

fig. 41 - Electrically adjustableseats, position memorization andheating

A - Height and back and forthadjustment, reclining

B - Back rest angle and headrestraint position

C - Lumbar adjustment

D - Seat position memorizationbuttons

E - Heating.

Seat position adjustment -control A (fig. 40)

1 - Seat raising

2 - Seat lowering.

Seat position adjustment -control A (fig. 42)

1 - Front raising

2 - Rear raising

3 - Height adjustment

4 - Backwards and forwardsadjustment.

Seat back position adjustment -control B (fig. 40)

3 - Seat back raising4 - Seat back lowering.

Seat back position adjustment -control B (fig. 43)

5 - Seat back raising6 - Seat back lowering.

fig. 42

L0A

0149

b

fig. 43L0

A01

50b

fig. 44

L0A

0151

b

Head restraint position adjust-ment - control B (fig. 43)

7 - Head restraint raising 8 - Head restraint lowering.

Lumbar adjustment

This device makes it possible tovary the back support and improvecomfort. Press the front part of thebutton to increase the support andthe rear part of the button todecrease it.

Certain seats are also fitted withback height adjustment: press thefront part of the button to increasethe support and the rear part of thebutton to decrease it.

62

Control C (fig. 40)

5 - Lumbar support increase

6 - Lumbar support decrease

Control C (fig. 44)

9 - Lumbar support increase

10 - Lumbar support decrease

11 - Vertical support increase

12 - Vertical support decrease.

HEATING (fig. 45)

To switch seat heating on, rotatecontrol E to one of positions “1”,“2” or “3” corresponding to the dif-ferent heating intensity levels. Toswitch seat heating off, rotate con-trol E to position “0”.

fig. 45

L0A

0175

b

STORING THE DRIVER’S SEATPOSITIONS (fig. 46)

The system allows to store andrecall three different driver’s seatpositions and external rear view mir-ror positions.

Seat position memorization alsoincludes the head restraint adjust-ment in height, the position of theexternal rear view mirrors and of thesteering wheel (only versions withelectric adjustment).

The seat, external rear view mirrorand steering wheel positions canonly be stored when the ignition keyis at MAR.

Adjust the position of the seat,head restraint, external rear viewmirrors and steering wheel by meansof the relevant controls, then pressfor about 3 seconds any of buttons“1”, “2” or “3” each correspondingto one stored position, until a confir-mation beep is heard.

When memorising the seat posi-tions, also the head restraint, electricrear view mirror and steering wheelpositions are memorised.

The previously stored position willautomatically be deleted when a newposition is stored under the samebutton.

IMPORTANT Seat position mem-orization does not include lumbaradjustment and heating actuation.

Recalling stored positions

With the key in position MAR, anystored position can be recalled bybriefly pressing the respective but-ton “1”, “2” or “3”. The seat willmove automatically and stop in thestored position.

fig. 46L0

A01

52b

63

Stored position are recalled only ifthe required position is differentfrom the current one and is not pos-sible when the car speed exceeds 10km/h.

Seats can be moved only when theignition key is at MAR and, forabout 1 minute, also after removingthe key or turning it to STOP: dur-ing this time, the external rear viewmirrors will not move, but when thecar is started again, they will beautomatically realigned togetherwith the seat position (see paragraph“Automatic realignment of externalrear view mirrors”).

If stored seat position recalling isstill in course after this time haselapsed, recalling will be concludedin any case.

If the engine is started during therecalling stage, seat moving will bestopped; once this stage is over theseat will return automatically to thestored position.

IMPORTANT Pressing any ofmemorisation or adjustment buttonsduring the recalling stage, causes theimmediate stop of the seat (antipan-ic mode).

Storing the “parking” position ofthe external rear view mirror onpassenger side

You can achieve better visibilityduring manoeuvres in reverse gear(for instance, when parking the car)by adjusting the external passengerrear view mirror to a different posi-tion from the one normally used.This position can be stored by thedriver.

To store the position proceed asfollows:

– with the car stopped and the igni-tion key at MAR, engage the reversegear;

– adjust the position of the externalpassenger rear view mirror by meansof the respective controls so as toobtain the optimum position for theparking manoeuvre;

– press down for at least 3 secondsany of buttons “1”, “2” or “3” (fig.46) used to store/recall the seat posi-tion;

– together with the “parking” posi-tion of the external passenger siderear view mirror, also the seat posi-tion, the driver rear view mirrorposition and the driving position ofthe external passenger side rear viewmirror are stored.

A sound signal warns the driverthat the mirror position has beenstored.

64

fig. 47L0

A03

10b

Recalling the “parking” positionof the external rear view mirroron passenger side

To automatically recall the “park-ing” position of the external passen-ger rear view mirror, proceed as fol-lows:

– with the car stopped and the igni-tion key at MAR, engage the reversegear; the mirror will be automatical-ly brought back to the previouslystored position .

If no “parking” position has beenstored, when engaging reverse thepassenger mirror slightly lowersthan normally to a preset position tofacilitate the driver during parking.

The rear view mirror will automat-ically return to its initial positionafter about 10 seconds from reversegear disengagement, or immediatelyafter exceeding a speed of 10 km/hwith forward gear.

IMPORTANT The “parking” posi-tion memorisation and recall canonly be performed with ignition keyat MAR.

Automatic realignmentof external rear view mirrors

Every time the ignition key isturned to MAR, the external rearview mirrors automatically return tothe latest position reached and/orrecalled before removing the key.

This enables rear view mirroralignment if, when the car is parked,one of the rear view mirror has beenmanually and/or accidentallymoved.

COMFORT SEATS (fig. 47)

Button A on front Comfort Seatsenables to actuate the respective con-trols separately. When pressing thebutton of each of the two seats, therespective CONNECT menu is actu-ated; this menu makes it possible,through its various options, to definethe heating levels and actuate venti-lation, massage and the adaptivefunction for each of the two seats.

The Comfort controls can also beactuated by pressing the “Setup” keyof the CONNECT and then selectingthe “Seat Comfort” function.


IMPORTANT Never turn the pas-senger massage function on whenthe seat is not occupied since theoccupant sensor could activate (inthe event of an accident) the rele-vant air bag.

65

Remember that the headrestraints should beadjusted to support the

back of your head and not yourneck. Only if they are in this posi-tion will they be able to provideeffective protection in the event ofa rear-end shunt. Never driveyour car without fitting the head-rest: this is dangerous and, more-over, is prohibited by the law.

ARMREST (fig. 49)

The armrest A can be adjusted upor down to three different positions.To lift the armrest, pull it fromhandgrip B. To lower the armrest,keep knob C depressed.

The armrest incorporates a cli-mate-controlled bottle/can holder(refer to the relevant paragraph inthis chapter). To gain access to thebottle/can holder, lift armrest A bypulling it from handgrip B. To closethe bottle/can holder, lower thearmrest until it is locked; to lower itfurther, press knob C.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (fig. 48)

Where provided, front headrestraints can be adjusted electrical-ly, so as to adapt to the driver’sheight.

To lift the head restraint, movecontrol B (fig. 43) to 7; to lower thehead restraint, move the aforesaidcontrol to 8.

To remove the head restraints,move them upwards, to refit them,fit the rods back into the housingson the seat top.

fig. 48

L0A

0148

b

fig. 49

L0A

0169

b

66

REAR SEATS

HEAD RESTRAINTS

The 3 rear head restraints (fig. 50-51) can be adjusted for height. Toadjust, move the head restraintupwards or downwards according tothe most suitable position.

Rear head restraints cannot beremoved.

Remember that the headrestraints should beadjusted to support the

back of your head and not yourneck. Only if they are in this posi-tion will they be able to provideeffective protection in the event ofa rear-end shunt.

Certain versions (where provided)have a button A (fig. 52) on the cen-tral console for lowering, with igni-tion key at MAR, the rear side headrestraints.

fig. 50

L0A

0166

b

fig. 51L0

A01

65b

fig. 52

L0A

0168

b

67

ARMREST

Lower the armrest to the positionshown for use by pulling the lever A(fig. 53).

To close, lift the armrest into itshousing.

An oddment compartment is con-cealed inside the armrest andaccording to versions it can containthe following:

– buttons for heating control, mas-sage, lumbar adjustment and rearside seat adaptive function

– button for moving the front pas-senger seat

– button for opening/closing theelectric sunshade

– current socket

– remote control for CONNECTHI-FI and TV functions.

IMPORTANT Read through theinstruction given in paragraph“Interior equipment” in this chapterfor current socket use.

To open the oddment compart-ment, lift the armrest cover usinggrip A (fig. 54). To close the odd-ment compartment lower the cover.

HEATING (fig. 55)

To switch side seat heating on, turnknob A (left-hand seat) or B (right-hand seat) to “1”, “2” or “3” thatcorrespond to the different warminglevels. To switch seat heating off,turn the knob to “0”.

fig. 53

L0A

0076

b

fig. 54L0

A00

74b

fig. 55

L0A

0102

b

68

COMFORT SEATS

Side Comfort seats are fitted withindependent control buttons forheating, lumbar adjustment, mas-sage and adjusting function; thesecontrols are located inside the arm-rest.

The armrest compartment housesalso the button for moving the frontpassenger seat and the button con-trolling the electric sunshade.

Controls are operative in one of thefollowing conditions:

– ignition switch to MAR

– for approx. 1 minute afterremoving the ignition key or turningit to STOP

– for approx. 3 minutes with keyremoved or turned to STOP andwith door open.

Armrest compartment control but-ton layout is as follows (fig. 56):

A – Buttons for lumbar adjustment,massage and right-hand seat adap-tive function

B – Button for right-hand seatheating

C – Buttons for lumbar adjustment,massage and left-hand seat adaptivefunction

D – Button for left-hand seat heat-ing

E – Button for moving front pas-senger’s seat

F – Electric sunshade control but-ton.

IMPORTANT To allow systemautomatic configuration, press thebuttons for about 2 seconds to acti-vate the required function.

Right-hand seat adjustment (fig. 57)

1 – Lumbar support increase

2 – Lumbar support decrease

3 – Massage activation

4 – Massage deactivation

5 – Adaptive function on

6 – Adaptive function off

This device makes it possible tovary back support and improvecomfort. Press button 1 to increasethe support and button 2 to decreaseit.

The massage function reduces thestress specially during long journeys.Press button 3 to start the massageand button 4 to stop it.

fig. 56

L0A

0312

b

fig. 57L0

A03

11b

69

The adaptive function makes itpossible to adapt the seat back to thepassenger thus improving comfortand back support. Press button 5 toactivate this function and button 6to deactivate it.

Right-hand seat heating – ButtonB (fig. 56)

To switch seat heating on, turnknob to “1”, “2” or “3” that corre-spond to the different warming lev-els. To switch seat heating off, turnthe knob to “0”.

Left-hand seat adjustment(fig. 57)

7 – Lumbar support increase

8 – Lumbar support decrease

9 – Massage activation

10 – Massage deactivation

11 – Adaptive function on

12 – Adaptive function off

This device makes it possible tovary back support and improvecomfort. Press button 7 to increasethe support and button 8 to decreaseit.

The massage function reduces thestress specially during long journeys.Press button 9 to start the massageand button 10 to stop it.

The adaptive function makes itpossible to adapt the seat back to thepassenger thus improving comfortand back support. Press button 11to activate this function and button12 to deactivate it.

Left-hand seat heating Button D (fig. 56)

To switch seat heating on, turnknob to “1”, “2” or “3” that corre-spond to the different warming lev-els. To switch seat heating off, turnthe knob to “0”.

Moving the front passenger’s seatbackwards or forwards – Button E(fig. 56)

Press the front part of the button tomove the front passenger’s seat for-ward and increase the space availablefor the rear passenger. Press the rearpart of the button to move the seatbackwards.

Electric sunshade - Button F (fig. 56)

Press the front part of the button toopen the sunshade and the rear partto close it (see paragraph “Electricsunshade” in this chapter).

It is absolutely forbiddento carry out whatever af-ter-market operation in-

volving steering system or steeringcolumn modifications (e.g.: instal-lation of anti-theft Device) thatcould badly affect performanceand safety, cause the lapse of war-ranty and also result in non-com-pliance of the car with homologa-tion requirements.

70

STEERING WHEEL Steering wheel position is storedtogether with external rearview mir-ror position, when storing the dri-ver’s seat position.

MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (fig. 59)

The steering wheel height and axialposition can be adjusted:

On certain versions the steeringwheel height and axial position can beadjusted; proceed as follows:

1) Push lever B to 1.

2) Move the steering wheel to the re-quired position by pulling, pushing,lifting or lowering it.

3) Pull lever B to 2 to lock the steer-ing wheel in place.

Only make adjustmentswhen the car is station-ary.

ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENT (fig. 58)

The steering wheel height and axialposition can be adjusted electroni-cally when the ignition key is atMAR.

To make adjustments, move leverA in four directions.

fig. 58

L0A

6015

b

fig. 59L0

A60

16b

71

Automatically adjustable (fig. 61)

The mirror is automatically set today and night position, irrespective-ly of exterior lights.

The mirror sets always in day posi-tion when engage the reverse gear.

EXTERNAL REARVIEW MIRRORS

External rearview mirrors have flatsurface and can be heated andadjusted automatically when theignition key is at MAR.

Turn switch A (fig. 62) to position1 (left-hand mirror) or to position 2(right-hand mirror) to select themirror to be adjusted.

fig. 61L0

A02

47b

fig. 62

L0A

0085

b

REARVIEW MIRRORS

INTERNAL REARVIEW MIRROR

Manually adjustable (fig. 60)

The mirror can be adjusted in fourdirections by means of lever A:

1) normal position

2) anti-dazzle position.

The mirror is also fitted with asafety device that releases the mirrorin the event of an impact.

fig. 60

L0A

0269

b

72

The mirrors are automaticallydemisted/defrosted when the heatedrear window is operated.

IMPORTANT Rearview mirrorsurface is flat to make objects seemat their actual distance.

If the mirrors make itdifficult to get throughnarrow gaps and in auto-

matic car washes, fold them fromposition 1 to position 2 (fig. 64).

Automatic rearview mirror realignment

Rearview mirror position is stored,together with the steering wheelposition, when storing the driver’sseat position. Each time the ignitionkey is turned to MAR, rearview mir-rors return automatically to the lastposition reached and/or recalled atthe previous ignition key removal.This enables rearview mirror align-ment if, when the car is parked, oneof the rearview mirror has beenmanually and/or accidentallymoved.

Storing the “parking” position ofthe right-hand rearview mirror

When storing the driver’s seat posi-tions, it is possible to store also the“parking” position of the right-handrearview mirror. Stored position isrecalled automatically when engag-ing the reverse gear. For furtherinformation about rearview mirror“parking” position storing andrecalling, see paragraph “Frontseats” in this chapter.

fig. 64L0

A00

86b

Press switch A (fig. 62) to adjust the mirror in the four directions (fig. 63). After adjusting, turn switchA back to position 0 to prevent mov-ing the mirrors accidentally.

The mirrors can be folded electri-cally to reduce side clearance. Turnswitch A (fig. 62) to position 3 tofold the mirrors electrically. Turnthe switch A to position 0 to returnthe mirrors to their normal position.

fig. 63

L0A

0242

b

73

Improper use of the elec-trical window winders canbe dangerous. Before and

during their operation ensurethat any passengers in the car arenot at risk from the moving glasseither by personal objects gettingcaught in the mechanism or bybeing injured by it directly.Always remove the ignition keywhen you get out of the car toprevent the electrical windowwinders being operated acciden-tally and constituting a danger tothe people left in the car.

IMPORTANT In the event that theanti-trap function is activated 5times in only 1 minute, the systemwill automatically enter the “recov-ery” mode (self-protection). Thiscondition is pointed out by the factthat, in the closing phase, the win-dow goes up in jerks.

It is therefore necessary in this caseto carry out the system restore pro-cedure by operating window open-ing control or turning the ignitionkey to STOP and then to MAR.

Regular operation is restored if nomalfunction is present: otherwisecontact a Lancia Dealership.

In the event that the system detectsa malfunction, the failure messageand symbol ª! will appear on theinstrument panel display (see“Window anti-trap safety system” atparagraph “Warning lights”).

ELECTRICWINDOWS

ANTI-TRAP SAFETY SYSTEM

Front and rear electric windows areprovided with anti-trap safetydevice. When the system control unitdetects an obstacle in the windowclosing travel, it makes the windowtravel stop and reverse immediately.

This system complies with regula-tion 2000/4/EC coming soon inforce, which is destined to protectpassengers leaning out of the win-dows. Therefore, in case of unlawfulintrusions from the outside, the anti-trap safety device could not activate.

74

CONTROLS

Electric windows work with igni-tion key at MAR.

IMPORTANT With ignition key atSTOP or after removing it, the elec-tric windows can be still operated forabout 2 minutes. They will deacti-vate immediately when opening oneof the doors.

Driver’s side

On the driver’s door panel maskthere are 5 buttons (fig. 65) for con-trolling every window.

Front windows

Press buttons A or B to open/closethe required window (driver or pas-senger side). Pressing briefly thebutton the window “jerks”, whereasa prolonged pressing makes the win-dow opening or closing in “automat-ic and continuous” mode. Whenpressing again the button the win-dow stops in the required position.

A – Front left window opening/ clos-ing, “continuous automatic” opera-tion during window opening/ closing

B – Front right window opening/closing, “continuous automatic” oper-ation during window opening/ clos-ing.

Rear windows

Press buttons C or D to open/closethe required window (left or rightside). Pressing briefly the button thewindow “jerks”, whereas a prolongedpressing makes the window openingin “automatic and continuous” mode.When pressing again the button thewindow stops in the required posi-tion.

C – Rear left window opening/clos-ing, “continuous automatic” opera-tion just during window opening

D – Rear right window opening/closing, “continuous automatic” oper-ation just during window opening

E – Rear window controls enabling/disabling button; controls are disabledwhen the button led is on.

Passenger’s side

On the passenger’s door panelmask there is button A (fig. 66), foropening/closing the passenger’s win-dow.

fig. 65

L0A

0050

b

fig. 66

L0A

0065

b

75

Pressing briefly the button the win-dow “jerks”, whereas a prolongedpressing makes the window openingor closing in “automatic and continu-ous” mode. When pressing again thebutton the window stops in therequired position.

Rear controls

On the rear doors panel mask thereis button A (fig. 67), for opening/closing the corresponding window.

Pressing briefly the button the win-dow “jerks”, whereas a prolongedpressing makes the window openingor closing in “automatic and contin-uous” mode. When pressing againthe button the window stops in therequired position.

MANUAL AND AUTOMATICOPERATION

Front and rear window winderscan be operated both automatically(opening and closing) and manually.

Long or short pulse determines thetype of operation.

Pull up or press the control buttonto activate automatic closing oropening: the window will stop whenit reaches the end of its travel (orwhen the button is pressed again).

A short pulse results in a short win-dow movement that stops whenreleasing the button.

CENTRALISED WINDOW ANDSUNROOF OPENING/CLOSINGSYSTEM

Centralised window and sunroofopening/closing is activated in thefollowing conditions:

– ignition key removed;

– doors perfectly closed.

To activate centralised window andsunroof closing, keep the remotecontrol button B (fig. 68) pressedfor over 2 seconds after closing thedoors: window and sunroof willmove until complete closing or untilreleasing the button.

fig. 67

L0A

0066

b

fig. 68

L0A

0174

b

76

SEAT BELTS

HOW TO USE THE SEAT BELTS

The belt should be worn keepingthe chest straight and rested againstthe seat back.

Instrument panel warning light <will come on if the ignition key isturned to MAR and the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

To fasten the seat belt, take thefastening tongue A (fig. 69) andpush it into buckle B, until you hearit click.

Pull the seat belt gently. If it jams,let it rewind a little and pull it outagain without jerking.

To release the seat belts, press but-ton C. Guide the seat belt with yourhand while is rewinding to prevent itfrom twisting.

Through the reel, the belt auto-matically adapts to the body of thepassenger wearing it, allowing free-dom of movement.

Never press button C(fig. 69) while travelling.

fig. 69L0

A00

88b

fig. 70

L0A

003b

To activate centralised window andsunroof opening, keep button A (fig.68) pressed for over 2 seconds afteropening the doors: window and sun-roof will move until complete open-ing or until releasing the button.

This function can be used to aeratethe passenger’s compartment beforegetting into the car parked in thesun.

77

When the car is parked on a steepslope the reel mechanism may block;this is normal. The reel mechanismprevents the webbing coming outwhen it is jerked or if the car brakessharply, in a collision or when cor-nering at high speed.

The rear seat is fitted with inertialseat belts with three anchor pointsand reel for the side and centreseats.

Rear seat belts shall be worn asshown in fig. 70.

To prevent incorrect fastening, thetongues of the side seats and thebuckle of the centre lap belt areincompatible.

fig. 71

L0A

0096

b

When the rear seats are not occu-pied, use the spaces provided in thecushion to stow the belt buckles (fig.71).

Remember that in theevent of a violent colli-sion, back seat passen-

gers not wearing seat belts alsorepresent a serious danger for thefront seat passengers.

ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT OFTHE FRONT SEAT BELTS

Only adjust seat beltheight when the car is sta-tionary.

Always adjust the height of the seatbelt to fit the person wearing it. Thisprecaution could greatly reduce therisk of injury in case of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtainedwhen the belt passes half waybetween the end of the shoulder andthe neck.

To adjust, lower or raise the grip A(fig. 72). To lower the device keepbutton B pressed.

78

The pretensioner does not requireany maintenance or greasing.Anything that modifies its originalconditions invalidates its efficiency.If due to unusual natural events(floods, sea storm, etc.) the devicehas been affected by water and mud,it must necessarily be replaced.

The pretensioner canonly be used once. After acollision that has trig-

gered it, have it replaced at aLancia Dealership Pretensionervalidity is written on the platelocated on the front left door postnear door hinges. The preten-sioners should be replaced at aLancia Dealership as this dateapproaches.

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the device isanchored in one of the

positions provided. To do this,with the grip released, exert afurther pressure to allow theanchor device to catch if releasedid not take place at one of thepreset positions.

PRETENSIONERS

Your car is fitted with pretension-ers on the front and rear side seats toimprove protection.

These devices “feel”, through asensor, that a violent crash is inprogress and rewind the seat belts afew centimetres. In this way theyensure that the seat belt adheres per-fectly to the wearer before therestraining action begins.

The seat belt locks to indicate thatthe device has intervened; the seatbelt cannot be drawn back up evenwhen guiding it manually.

IMPORTANT To obtain the high-est degree of protection from theaction of the pretensioning device,wear the seat belt keeping it firmlyclose to the chest and pelvis.

Front seat pretensioners activateonly if front seat belts are properlyfitted into buckles.

A small amount of smoke may beproduced. This smoke is in no waytoxic and presents no fire hazard.

fig. 72

L0A

0089

b

LOAD LIMITING DEVICES

In order to increase passive safety,the front and rear seat belt reelshave a built-in load limiting devicewhich collapse in a controlled fash-ion so to dose the force on the pas-senger’s shoulder and chest duringthe retaining operation.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORTHE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS

The driver must comply with (andhave the vehicle occupants follow)all the local legal regulations con-cerning the use of seat belts.

Always fasten the seat belts beforestarting.

The belt should not betwisted, make sure that itis taut and adheres to the

passenger’s body. The upper partshould pass over the shoulderand cross the chest diagonally.The lower part should adhere tothe pelvis and to the abdomen ofthe passenger (fig. 73). Do not useany objects (pegs, stoppers, etc.)to keep the belts away from thebody.

For maximum safety,keep the back of your seatupright, lean back into it

and make sure the seat belt fitsclosely across your chest andhips.

Make sure that the seat belts ofthe front and rear passengers arefastened at all times! Youincrease the risk of serious injuryor death in a collision if you trav-el with the belts unfastened.

fig. 73

L0A

0004

b

Operations which leadto knocks, vibrations orlocalised heating (over

100°C for a maximum of 6 hours)in the area around the preten-sioners may cause damage ortrigger them. These devices arenot affected by vibrations causedby irregularities of the road sur-face or low obstacles such askerbs, etc. Contact a LanciaDealership for any assistance.

79

80

Under no circumstancesshould the components ofthe seat belts and preten-

sioner be tampered with orremoved. Any operation shouldbe carried out by qualified andauthorised personnel. Alwayscontact a Lancia Dealership.

If the belt has been subjected toheavy stress, for example after anaccident, it should be changedcompletely together with theanchors, anchor fastening screwsand the pretensioners. In fact,even if the belt has no visibledefects, it could have lost itsresilience.

Never travel with a childsitting on the passenger’slap with a single belt to

protect them both (fig. 74). Do notfasten other objects to the body.

Seat belts are also to be worn byexpectant mothers: the risk of injuryin the case of accident is greatlyreduced for them and the unbornchild if they are wearing a seat belt.

Of course they must position thelower part of the belt very low downso that it passes under the abdomen(fig. 75).

HOW TO KEEP THE SEATBELTS IN PROPER WORKINGORDER AT ALL TIMES

1) Always use the belt with thetape taut and never twisted; makesure that it is free to run withoutimpediments.

2) After a serious accident, replacethe belt being worn at that time,even if it does not appear damaged.Always replace the seat belts if pre-tensioners have been activated.

3) To clean the belts, wash by handwith neutral soap, rinse and leave todry in the shade. Never use strongdetergents, bleach or dyes or otherchemical substance that mightweaken the fibres.

4) Prevent the reels from gettingwet: their correct operation is onlyguaranteed if water does not getinside.

5) Replace the seat belt whenshowing significant wear or cutsigns.

fig. 75L0

A00

05B

fig. 74

L0A

0006

b

81

CARRYING CHILDRENSAFELY

SERIOUS DANGERShould it be ab-solutely necessary

to carry a baby on the front pas-senger seat with a child's seat withthe cradle facing backwards, de-activate the passenger's air bagsusing the key switch and thencheck warning light F on the clus-ter to make sure that deactivationhas actually took place (see para-graph “ Manual deactivation ofpassenger's air bag .

For optimal protection in the eventof a crash, all passengers must beseated and wearing adequaterestraint systems.

This is especially relevant for chil-dren.

According to 2003/20/EC Directive,this prescription is compulsory for allEuropean Community countries.

A child’s head is larger and heavierthan an adult’s head with respect totheir body weight. Moreover, achild’s muscular and bone structureis not fully developed. For these rea-sons, children require specificrestraint systems, different fromthose required by adult passengers.

fig. 76

L0A

0007

b

With passenger’s air bagactive, never place child’sseats with the cradle facing

backwards since the air bag activa-tion could cause to the child seriousinjuries, even mortal, regardless ofthe seriousness of the crash that trig-gered it. You are advised to carrychildren always with properrestraint systems on the rear seats,as this is the most protected positionin the case of a crash.

A IRBAG

82

The results of research on the bestchild restraint systems are containedin the European Standard ECE-R44. This Standard enforces the useof restraint systems classified in fivegroups:

Group 0 - weight 0-10 kg

Group 0+ - weight 0-13 kg

Group 1 weight 9-18 kg



The groups partially overlap. Thisis because there are systems whichcover more than one weight group(fig. 76).

All restraint systems must showhomologation data and controlmarkings on a tag which is solidlyfastened to the system and cannot beremoved.

Children weighing more than 1.5m are, with reference to restrain sys-tems, considered adults and canwear normal seat belts.

We recommend using LineaccessoriLancia child restraint systems foreach weight group. These systemswere specifically designed and testedfor Lancia cars.

GROUP 0 and 0+

Babies up to 13 kg are to be seatedin a cot type seat supporting thechild’s head facing backwards. Thisensures there is no stress on thechild’s neck in sudden decelerations.

The cot is secured with the seatbelts. Furthermore, the child mustbe strapped to the cot (fig. 77).

The figure is only anexample. Follow theinstructions for fastening

the specific child restraint systemyou are using.

fig. 77

L0A

0011

b

83

GROUP 1

Children from 9 to 18 kg are to beseated facing forward in child seatswith front cushion. The car seat beltsecures both seat and child (fig. 78).

There are child restraintfor groups 0 and 1 whichare fastened with the car

seat belts by means of an attach-ment on the seat back. The childis then secured to the seat withspecific straps. Due to theirweight, child seats can be dan-gerous if they are fitted incorrect-ly (e.g. with a cushion placedtherebetween). Always followcarefully the specific installationinstructions for the childrestraint system you are using.

GROUP 2

Children from 15 to 25 kg can besecured directly with the car seatbelts. The seat has the purpose ofpositioning the child correctly withrespect to the seat belt so that thediagonal section crosses the child’schest (never the child’s throat) andthe horizontal section fits snugly onthe child’s hips (and not the child’sabdomen) (fig. 79).





fig. 78

L0A

0010

b

fig. 79

L0A

0009

b

84

GROUP 3

Children from 22 to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longerrequires a support to space thechild’s back from the seat back.

Fig. 80 shows proper child seatpositioning on the rear seat.

Children taller than 1.5 m canwear seat belts like adults.

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

THESIS complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3/CE regulating child’sseat assembling on the different car seats according to the following tables:

Group

Group 0, 0+

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Key:

U = Suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according toEuropean Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”

B = Built-in restraint system approved for this range of weight (integral child’s seatopt.)

L = Suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Lancia forthe specified group

fig. 80

L0A

0008

b

SEAT

Frontpassenger

U

U

U

U

Siderear

passengers

L-U

L-U

L-U

L-U

Centralrear

passenger

U

U

U

U

Range ofweight

0 -13 kg

9 -18 kg

15 -25 kg

22 -36 kg

85

Below is a summary of the rulesof safety to be followed for carry-ing children:

1) Child restraint system should befitted on the rear seat as this is themost protected area in the car in theevent of a crash.

4) Always check the seat belt iswell fastened by pulling the web-bing.

5) Only one child is to be strappedto each retaining system.

6) Always check the seat belts donot fit around the child’s throat.

7) While travelling do not let thechild sit incorrectly or release thebelts.

8) Passengers should never carrychildren on their laps. No-one, how-ever strong they are, can hold a childin the event of a crash.

9) In case of an accident, replacethe seat with a new one.

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTINGTHE “ISOFIX TYPE” CHILDRESTRAINT SYSTEM

THESIS is preset for mounting theIsofix type child restraint system, anew European standardised systemfor transporting children. Isofix typechild restraint system is an addition-al option that does not prevent fromusing traditional child restraint sys-tems. Isofix type child's seat coversthree weight groups: 0, 0+ and 1.

Due to its different anchoring sys-tem, the Isofix type child's seat shallbe anchored using the proper metalbrackets set between rear seat backand cushion, shown in figures 81and 82.

It is possible to mount both the tra-ditional child restraint system andthe Isofix type one. Max. two Isofixtype child's seats can be mounted onthe rear seat using the proper cou-plings.

On the front passenger seat it ispossible to mount only traditionalchild's seats.

Children must never beseated in the front pas-senger seat in cars with

passenger’s front airbag.

2) In case of passenger airbagdeactivation check that instrumentpanel warning light F is on tomake sure that deactivation hasactually taken place .

3) Follow the instructions for fas-tening the specific child restraintsystem you are using which must beprovided by the manufacturer. Keepthe child restraint system installa-tion instructions with the car papersand with this handbook. Never use achild restraint system without theinstallation instructions.

86

Only use Isofix type child restraintsystems specifically designed, testedand approved for this car.

Mount the childrestraint system only withthe car stationary. The

Isofix child restraint system isproperly anchored to the mount-ing brackets when clicks areheard. In any case, keep to theinstallation instructions thatmust be provided by the childrestraint system’s Manufacturer.

Mounting the ISOFIX TYPEchild restraint system

Groups 0 and 0+

For children included in thisweight group (up to 13 kg) therestraint system faces back and thechild is held by the restraint systembelts D (fig. 83).

fig. 81

L0A

0271

b

fig. 82L0

A02

70b

fig. 83

L0A

0254

b

87

fig. 84

L0A

0420

b

fig. 85

L0A

0255

b

For proper mounting, proceed asfollows:

– remove the upper tether on theback of the child's restraint system;

– check whether the release lever B(fig. 83) is at rest position (inward);

– identify the brackets A (fig. 83)and mount the child restraint systemwith the retainers C (fig. 83) alignedto the brackets;

– push the child restraint systemuntil hearing the locking clicks;

– check for proper locking by mov-ing the child's seat with force: thebuilt-in safety mechanism actuallyinhibit improper coupling with justone coupling locked;

– fit the supporting foot into sup-port B (fig. 84), secured on thechild's seat back; to do this, pullknob A (fig. 84) outwards, fit thefoot into the support, release knob Aand push the foot upwards until thelocking pin clicks;

– fully loosen knob C (fig. 84) andextend both support legs until theyrest on the car floor; tighten knob Cin one of the preset holes.

Group 1

When the child grows up andreaches the next weight group(group 1, 9 to 18 kg), the childrestraint system should be rein-stalled facing forward; keep to theinstructions provided by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

88

FRONT AND SIDEAIRBAGS

The car is equipped with front(Multistage) airbags for the driver(fig. 86) and passenger B (fig. 87),front side bags C (fig. 88), windowbags D (fig. 89) and (where provid-ed) rear side bags E (fig. 90).

“SMART BAG” SYSTEM(FRONT MULTISTAGE AIRBAGS)

Description and operation

The front air bag (driver and pas-senger) is a safety device whichcomes into action in the event of afront/angled impact.

fig. 86L0

A60

17b

For proper mounting, proceed asfollows:

– remove the upper tether on theback of the child's restraint system;

– remove the black plate on thechild's seat back and loosen thethree knob screws completely;

– check whether the release lever B(fig. 85) is at rest position (inward);

– identify the brackets A (fig. 85)and mount the child restraint systemwith the retainers C (fig. 85) alignedto the brackets;

– push the child restraint systemuntil hearing the locking clicks;

– check for proper locking by mov-ing the child's seat with force: thebuilt-in safety mechanism actuallyinhibit improper coupling with justone coupling locked.

With this configuration, the child issecured also by the car seat belts(fig. 85).

To apply car seat belts to child'sseat, refer to the child's seat hand-book.

It consists of an instantly inflatablebag housed in a special compart-ment located:

– in the centre of the steering wheelon the driver’s side A (fig. 86);

– in the dashboard on the passen-ger’s side (larger bag) B (fig. 87).

fig. 87

L0A

0068

b

fig. 88

L0A

0069

b

89

The front airbag (driver and pas-senger) has been designed to protectthe occupants in the event of head-on/angled collision of medium-highseverity, by placing a soft bagbetween the passenger and the steer-ing wheel or the dashboard.

In case of head-on collision, anelectronic control unit processes thesignals from deceleration sensorand, when required, triggers theinflation of the cushion according tothe severity of the collision.

fig. 89

L0A

0070

b

The cushion immediately inflates,placing itself as a soft protective bar-rier between the body of the frontpassengers and the structure thatcould cause injuries. Immediatelyafter, the cushion deflates.

The front air bag (driver and pas-senger) is not a replacement for theuse of seat belts but rather a com-plement. We recommend that seatbelts are worn at all times as pre-scribed by legislation in Europe andmost other countries world-wide. Apassenger not wearing the seat beltmay crash into the bag before it isfully inflated. In this case the protec-tion is considerably decreased.

fig. 90L0

A00

71b

Front air bags are designed to pro-tect car’s passengers in front/angledcrashes and therefore non-activationin other types of collisions (side col-lisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs,etc…) is not a system malfunction.

For impacts against verydeformable or mobile objects (trafficsign poles, heaps of gravel or snow,etc…), rear impacts (e.g. car crash-ing into the back), side impacts,wedging under other vehicles or bar-riers (e.g. under a truck or guardrail), the airbag does not offer addi-tional protection with respect to theseat belts and may even be undesir-able.

The fact that the airbag is not trig-gered in these situations, this doesnot signify a malfunction.

90

SEVERE DANGER:The car isequipped with

front passenger’s airbag, do notplace the child restraint seat onthe front seat. The inflation of theairbag could cause even fatalinjury. If required, always deacti-vate the passenger’s front airbagwhen a child seat is placed on thefront seat. The passenger’s seatshall be set as backwards as pos-sible to prevent accidental con-tacts between the child restraintsystem and the dashboard.Although it may not be pre-scribed by law, we recommendreactivating the airbag as soon asit is no longer necessary to carrychildren to provide better protec-tion to adult passengers.

A IRBAGPASSENGER’S FRONT AIRBAG

The passenger’s airbag wasdesigned and calibrated to protect aperson wearing seat belts.

When fully inflated the bag will fillmost of the space between the dash-board and the passenger.

MANUALLY DEACTIVATINGTHE PASSENGER’S FRONTAIRBAG

The passenger’s front airbag can bedeactivated if it is absolutely neces-sary to carry a child in the front pas-senger seat.

Deactivation/reactivation takesplace with ignition key at STOP andoperating it in the special key switchA (fig. 91) on the dashboard on thepassenger side.

You can reach the switch only ifthe door is opened.

fig. 91

L0A

0072

b

91

Only turn the switchwhen the engine is notrunning and the ignition

key is removed.

The key switch has two possiblepositions:

1) Passenger’s front airbag active(position ON P): instrument panelwarning light F off. Do not carrychildren on the front seat.

2) Passenger’s front airbag deacti-vated (position OFF F): instru-ment panel warning light F on. Achild may be carried on the frontseat, protected with a specificrestraint system.

The F warning light on theinstrument panel will stay on untilthe passenger front airbag is reacti-vated.

The side airbag will work althoughthe front airbag is deactivated.

The key can be inserted andremoved from the switch with thedoor open in any of the two posi-tions.

IMPORTANT To receive the bestsystem protection in the event of anaccident, you have to seat in properposition (fig. 92).

fig. 92

L0A

0256

b

In the event of side collisions at lowspeed, the restraining action of theseat belts is sufficient and the airbagis not inflated. Also in this case it isof vital importance to wear the seatbelts since in case of side crash theyguarantee proper positioning of thepassenger and prevent the occupantsto be pitched out of the car in case ofviolent crashes.

The front and rear side bag is not areplacement for the use of seat beltsbut rather a complement. We rec-ommend that seat belts are worn atall times as prescribed by legislationin Europe and most other countriesworld-wide.

92

SIDE AIRBAGS (SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)

Purpose of the side airbags is toincrease passenger protection in theevent of a side impact of medium tohigh severity.

Side airbags consist of two types ofinstantly inflatable bags:

– the side bags housed in the frontseat bags C (fig. 88) and (whereprovided) in the side stuffing of therear seats E (fig. 90). This solutionensures that the bag is always in anoptimal position with respect to thepassenger, regardless of the seatposition;

– the window bags, which are “cur-tain” cushions located behind theside coverings of the roof and cov-ered by proper finishings such toallow the cushion unfolding down-wards; this solution, studied for thehead protection, allows offering thebest protection to the front and rearpassengers in the event of side crash,thanks to the wide cushion inflationsurface.

In In the event of a side collisionthe electronic control unit processesthe signals coming from a decelera-tion sensor and, if required, fire thebags.

The bags inflate instantly and actas a soft protective barrier betweenthe body of the passengers and thecar door. Bags deflate immediatelyafterwards.

IMPORTANT If the ¬ warninglight does not turn on when turningthe ignition key to MAR or if it stayson when travelling, (together withmessage on display) this could indi-cate a failure in safety retaining sys-tems; under this condition air bagsor pretensioners could not trigger inthe event of collision or, in a restrict-ed number of cases, they could trig-ger accidentally. Stop the car andcontact Lancia Dealership to havethe system checked immediately.

The air bag system has a validityof 14 years as concerns the py-rotechnic charge and 10 years asconcerns the coil contact (see theplate on the front let door). As thesedates approach, contact LanciaDealership to have them replaced.

IMPORTANT After an accidentwhich triggered the airbags, go to aLancia Dealership to have theentire safety system, the electroniccontrol unit, the seat belts and thepretensioners replaced and to havethe electrical system checked.

Never lean head, armsand elbows out of thewindow.

Operation of the front bags is notdisabled by the passenger’s frontairbag and rear side bag deactiva-tion switch.

IMPORTANT In the event of sidecrash, you can obtain the best pro-tection by the system keeping a cor-rect position on the seat, allowingthus a correct window bag unfold-ing.

IMPORTANT The front airbagsand/or front and rear side bags canbe triggered if the car is involved inhard impacts or collisions in the areaof the underbody, such as for exam-ple violent impacts against steps,kerbs or projecting objects fixed tothe ground or if the car falls intolarge pot-holes or dips in the roadsurface.

IMPORTANT When the airbag isfired it emits a small amount ofpowder and smoke. This is notharmful and does not indicate thebeginning of a fire. Furthermore thesurface of the inflated bag and thepassenger compartment may be cov-ered with powder residues. Thispowder may irritate skin and eyes.In the event of exposure, wash withmild soap and water.

93

Never rest head, armsand elbows on the door,on the windows and in the

window bag area to prevent pos-sible injuries during the inflationphase.

94

fig. 93L0

A02

72b

Any diagnostic, repair or replace-ment operations concerning theairbag system must exclusively becarried out at a Lancia Dealership.

If you are having the car scrapped,have the airbag system deactivatedat a Lancia Dealership first.

If the car changes hands, the newowner must be made aware of theindications given above and be giventhis Owner Handbook.

IMPORTANT Pretensioners, frontairbags and side bags are activatedby the electronic control unitaccording to the type of impact.Consequently, missed activation ofone or more system componentsdoes not indicate a fault in the sys-tem.

MANUALLY DEACTIVATINGTHE REAR SIDE BAGS(where provided)

Side bags, protecting the chest ofthe rear passengers, can be deacti-vated as follows.

Use the ignition key to operate thekey switch A (fig. 93) located on theright side of the boot. This switchcan be reached only with tailgateopen.

The key switch has two positions:

1) Passenger’s front airbag active(position ON Õ): instrument panelwarning light À off. Do not carrychildren on the front seat.

2) Passenger’s front airbag deacti-vated (position OFFÀ): instrumentpanel warning light À on. A childmay be carried on the front seat,protected with a specific restraintsystem.

IMPORTANT The car is deliveredwith rear side bags deactivated(position OFF À) and instrumentpanel warning light À on.Operate the switch only

when the engine isstopped and the ignition

key is removed.

SEVERE DANGER:In presence ofsmall size occu-

pants (children, etc.) on the rearseats, it is necessary to deactivatethe rear side bags through theapposite deactivation switchlocated in the boot.

A IRBAG

95

GENERAL NOTES

Do not apply stickers orother objects to the steer-ing wheel, to the passen-

ger's airbag cover or to the roofside cover. Do not place objects(like mobile phones) on the dash-board on passenger side sincethey could interfere with properpassenger's airbag deploymentand cause severe injuries.

If the ¬ warning lightdoes not turn on whenturning the ignition key to

MAR or if it stays on when travel-ling (together with message on dis-play), this could indicate a failurein safety retaining systems; underthis condition air bags or preten-sioners could not trigger in theevent of collision or, in a restrictednumber of cases, they could trig-ger accidentally. Stop the car andcontact Lancia Dealership to havethe system checked immediately.

Do not cover the backrest of front and rear seatswith trims or covers there

are not set for the use of side bags.

Do not travel withobjects on your lap or infront of you nor with a

pipe, pencil or similar betweenyour lips. You could seriouslyhurt yourself if the airbag inflatesin a collision.

Always drive with bothhands on the rim of thesteering wheel so that the

airbag is free to inflate during ahead-on collision and protect youfrom serious injury. Do not drivewith your body bending towardsthe steering wheel, but sit in anupright position with your backresting against the seat.

If an attempt has beenmade to steal the car, or ifit has actually been stolen

or has been vandalised in anywayor subjected to flooding, have theairbag system checked over at aLancia Dealership.

It is important toremember that the airbagcan be fired even when

the car is stationary if it is hit byanother vehicle travelling at suit-able speed. As a consequence,never sit children in the frontseat, even if the car is not moving.On the contrary, the airbags willnot be fired if the car is crashedinto when the key is not insertedor turned. Consequently, in thiscase, the fact that the system isnot fired does not indicate a fault.

96

Do not hook rigidobjects to the coat hooksand to the support han-

dles.

The airbag does notreplace seat belts butrather increases their

effectiveness. Furthermore, theairbag is not fired in the event oflow speed front collisions, rear-end shunts and roll-overs. Inthese cases, the passengers areonly protected by the seat beltswhich for this reason mustalways be fastened.

When the ignition key isturned to MAR (passengerfront airbag and rear side

bag deactivation switch at ON),warning lights F and À willcome on flashing for a few sec-onds to remind the driver thatpassenger front airbag and rearside bags will be fired in theevent of a crash. Warning lightsshould go out immediately after-wards.

The airbag is set to befired in the event of colli-sions which are greater

than the pretensioner settings.Consequently, for collisions inthe bracket between the twothresholds, it is normal for onlythe pretensioners to be fired.

Do not wash the seatback rest with pres-surised water or steam

(by hand or at automatic seatwashing stations).

97

LIGHT SWITCHAND STEERINGCOLUMN STALKS

The devices and services controlledby light switch and steering columnstalks can only be activated with theignition key at MAR, excluding theparking lights that are switched ononly with key at STOP or removed.

Outside lights can be switched onmanually or automatically accord-ing to daylight intensity.

LIGHT SWITCH (fig. 94)

It has 5 positions:

0 - outside lights off

6 - side/taillights

2 - dipped beam headlights

F - parking lights

AUTO - automatic outside lightswitching on/off according to setsensitivity level.

Outside lights off

Outside lights are off when ring Ais turned to 0.

Side/taillights and number platelights

To switch these lights on, turn ringA to 6.

When these lights are on, instru-ment panel warning light 3 lightsup.

When the outside lights are turnedon, the instrument panel and thevarious controls and displays locatedon the dashboard and central con-sole light up.

Dipped beam headlights

These lights come on when youturn ring A to 2.

Parking lights

With ignition key at STOP orremoved, turn ring A to F to switchthe parking lights on (side/tail-lights), the relevant instrumentpanel warning light will come on.

When parking lights are on, movethe left stalk downwards to switchon only the left side lights and moveit upwards to switch on only theright side lights. In this case thenumber plate lights and the instru-ment panel warning light will notcome on.

When parking lights are on, abuzzer will sound when opening thedriver’s door. Buzzer sound will stopwhen closing the door or switchingthe lights off.

fig. 94

L0A

0199

b

98

Automatic switching on/off

When ring A is turned to AUTOand the ignition key is at MAR,side/taillights, number plate lightsand dipped beam headlights willturn on/off automatically accordingto daylight intensity.

The twilight sensor sensitivity ofthe automatic light on/off systemcan be set, also when travelling,through the 3-position ring B:

1 - low sensitivity

2 - medium sensitivity

3 - high sensitivity.

IMPORTANT Main beam head-lights can only be switched on man-ually by moving the left stalk for-wards.

If main beam headlightsare on (left stalk for-wards), they will turn on

automatically each time the twi-light sensor makes the outsidelights switch on automatically. Itis therefore recommended to turnoff the main beam headlights (ifon), moving backwards the leftstalk, each time the sensorswitches off the outside lights.

Twilight sensor is notable to detect the fogpresence, it is therefore

necessary to switch on the lightsmanually, including the front andrear fog lights.

The driver is responsiblefor the use of the lightsaccording to the light

intensity and traffic regulationsof the country where the car isbeing driven. Automatic switch-ing on/off must be consideredjust as an help for the driversince he/she must always switchon/off the lights manually as nec-essary.

With automatic switching on acti-vated and switching off controlgiven by the sensor, main beamheadlights go off followed afterabout 10 seconds, by the side/tail-lights.

IMPORTANT When switching onthe headlights automatically, it ispossible to switch on the front andrear fog lights. When headlights areautomatically switched off, the frontand rear fog lights (if previouslyactivated) will be switched off aswell. At the following automaticswitching-on, only the front foglights will switch on, whereas therear fog lights, if required, will haveto be switched on manually.

99

Twilight sensor

It is composed by an infrared ledsensor installed on the windscreen inorder to detect the changes of theexternal light intensity of the car , asa function of the light sensitivity set;greater is the sensitivity, smaller isthe amount of external light neces-sary to control the switching-on ofthe exterior headlights.

It consists of two sensors: a globalsensor for evaluating environmentlight intensity and a directional onefor evaluating light intensity in run-ning direction in order to recognizetunnels, dark road sections, etc.

When ring A is turned to AUTO(automatic light switching on), andthe twilight sensor is malfunction-ing, side/taillights and dipped beamheadlights are switched on regard-less of the light intensity and the dis-play on the instrument panel showsthe message “TWILIGHT SENSORFAULT – GO TO DEALER”.Failure indication will stay on aslong as ring A is turned to AUTO. Inthis case it is recommended to deac-tivate the automatic function andswitch on the lights manually; con-tact a Lancia Dealership as soon aspossible.

Delayed light switching off(“Follow me home” device)

This device allows the illuminationof the space in front of the car for alength of time of 30 seconds (or amultiple of 30) and is activated withthe ignition key at STOP orremoved.

This device is activated by pullingtowards the steering wheel and thenreleasing the left-hand stalk within 2minutes from when the engine isturned off. At each operation of thestalk, the staying on of the lights isextended by 30 seconds, up to amaximum of 210 seconds that corre-spond to 7 stalk operations, then thelights are switched off automatical-ly.

Total set time (in seconds) isshown on the instrument panel dis-play for about 20 seconds.

100

After activating the device, the settime can be extended also within 2minutes from when the engine isturned off by pulling the stalk.

Keeping the stalk pulled for over 2seconds will deactivate this functionwith immediate light turning off as aconsequence.

To flash the lights (fig. 95)

Pull the stalk towards the steeringwheel (position B). Instrument panelwarning light 1 will come on.

LEFT-HAND STALK

The left-hand stalk controls theexternal lights and the directionindicators.

Main beam headlights (fig. 95)

These lights come on pushing theleft-hand stalk forwards (positionA), with dipped beam headlightsswitched on both manually (ring to2) and automatically (ring toAUTO).

When these lights are on, theinstrument panel warning light 1is on.

To switch the main beam head-lights off, pull the stalk backtowards the steering wheel.

If main beam headlightsare on (left stalk for-wards), they will turn on

automatically each time the twi-light sensor makes the outsidelights switch on automatically. Itis therefore recommended to turnoff the main beam headlights (ifon), moving backwards the leftstalk, each time the sensorswitches off the outside lights.

fig. 95L0

A02

06b

fig. 96

L0A

0207

b

101

IMPORTANT This operation willflash the main beam headlights.Follow the Highway Code to preventbeing fined.

Direction indicators (fig. 96)

Move the stalk as follows:

up (position A) - to switch on theright-hand indicators

down (position B) - to switch onthe left-hand indicators.

When direction indicators are on,instrument panel warning light Ÿ orΔ will flash.

The direction indicators returnautomatically to neutral positionwhen the car straightens up.

IMPORTANT If you want the indi-cator to flash briefly to show thatyou are about to change lane, movethe stalk up or down without click-ing into position. When you let it goit will return to its original position.

RIGHT-HAND STALK

The right-hand stalk controls allthe washer/wiper controls.

Windscreen wiper (fig. 97)

This device can only work whenthe ignition key is at MAR. The stalkcan be moved to 5 different posi-tions:

0 - Windscreen wiper off.

1 - automatic operation. Turn ringA to this position to set the rain sen-sor sensitivity.

2 - Continuous slow.

3 - Continuous fast.

4 - Fast temporary (unstable posi-tion): when releasing the stalk itreturns to 0 stopping the windscreenwiper.

Windscreen washer (fig. 98)

Pulling the stalk towards the steer-ing wheel (unstable position) oper-ates the windscreen washer.

Keeping the stalk pulled, with justone movement it is possible to oper-ate the washer jet and the wiper atthe same time; indeed, the lattercomes into action automatically ifthe stalk is pulled for more than halfa second.

fig. 97L0

A02

03b

fig. 98

L0A

0204

b

102

The wiper stops working a fewstrokes after releasing the stalk; afurther “cleaning stroke”, after afew seconds completes the wipingoperation.

Windscreen washer nozzles are fit-ted with demisting resistors that cutin automatically (for about 3 min-utes) when pressing the fast windowdemisting/defrosting button.

Headlight washer (fig. 99)

Pulling the stalk towards the steer-ing wheel will also operate the head-light washers providing that thedipped beam headlights are on.

IMPORTANT Under certain con-ditions, when headlight washers areon, the climate control system acti-vates automatically the inside airrecirculation to prevent washer fluidsmell inlet into the passenger’s com-partment.

Rain sensor

The rain sensor is an infrared ledsensor installed on the windscreenand combined with the windscreenwiper which automatically suits theflick frequency during operation tothe intensity of rain.

All the functions controlled withthe right-hand stalk (i.e. on/off,continuous slow and fast wipe, tem-porary fast wipe, windscreen washerand headlight washer) are unvaried.

fig. 99

L0A

0122

b

The rain sensor is automaticallyswitched on when the stalk is takento position 1 (fig. 97) and has thepurpose of adjusting the range ofoperation from stationary (no flick)when the windscreen is dry to sec-ond continuous speed (continuousfast wipe) when the rain is heavy.

When taking the stalk to 1 to acti-vate the rain sensor, the windscreenwiper indicates the sensor activationby a flick.

IMPORTANT To guarantee prop-er rain sensor operation, keep theglass clean in the sensor area.

103

Operating the windscreen washerwith the rain sensor activated (stalkat position 1) the normal washingcycle is performed at the end ofwhich the rain sensor resumes itsnormal automatic function.

The rain sensor is switched offwhen the key is turned to STOP. Itwill not come on again at the follow-ing engine start-up (key at MAR)even if the stalk is at position 1. Thiswill avoid accidental activation whenstarting the engine that could resultin dangerous situations (e.g. manualwindscreen washing, wiper bladessticking due to ice and risk of dam-aging the windscreen wiper motor).In this case to activate the rain sen-sor, just take the stalk to position 0or 2 and then to 1 again, or changesensitivity (increase or decrease)through knurled ring A.

When the rain sensor is again acti-vated in this way, at least one wind-screen wiper stroke occurs, even ifthe windscreen is dry, to signal theoccurred re-activation.

The rain sensor is located behindthe driving mirror in contact withthe windscreen and inside the areacleaned by the wiper and it controlsan electronic control unit which inturns controls the wiper motor.

At starting, the rain sensor auto-matically provides to stabilize atabout 40°C temperature to elimi-nate, from the control surface, thepossible condensate and to preventthe ice formation.

Turning the knurled ring A (fig.100) it is possible to increase thesensitivity of the rain sensor, obtain-ing a quicker change from stationary(no flick) when the windscreen isdry, to second continuous speed(continuous fast wipe):

■ = low sensitivity

■■ = medium sensitivity

■■■ = high sensitivity■■■■ = max. sensitivity.

Rain sensor sensitivity levelincrease (with sensor on) is indicat-ed by windscreen wiper flick.

fig. 100

L0A

0205

b

104

Rain sensor failure

In case of sensor malfunctioning,intermittent wiping is activated withthe sensitivity level set manually,regardless of the rain.

In this case it is recommended todeactivate the rain sensor and acti-vate continuous wiping (1st or2nd speed); contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

The rain sensor must bedeactivated (or key atSTOP) when cleaning the

windscreen (e.g. at service sta-tions). The rain sensor must bedeactivated also when washingthe car manually or at automaticwashing stations.

The sensor rain is able to recognizeand automatically adjust itself inthe presence of the following partic-ular conditions, which need a differ-ent intervention sensitivity:

– impurities on the control surface(salt, dirt, etc.)

– straks of water caused by wornwiper blades

– difference between day andnight(the human eye is more dis-turbed at night by the wet surface ofthe glass).

In the event of ice on thewindscreen, make sure tohave disconnected the

device to prevent wiper motordamages.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

PETROL VERSIONS (fig. 101)

A - Engine coolant temperaturegauge with overheating warninglight

B - Speedometer

C - Multifunction display for sym-bols/messages/failure indicationsand CONNECT info repetition

D - Engine rev. counter

E - Fuel gauge and reserve warninglight

F - Flash consumption gaugeG - Warning lightsH - Kilometre counter (and trip

meter) and automatic gearbox I - Trip meter reset button/failure

messages deleting button

fig. 101 L0A0230b

105

106

JTD VERSIONS (fig. 102)

fig. 102 L0A0231b

A - Engine coolant temperaturegauge with overheating warninglight

B - Speedometer

C - Multifunction display for sym-bols/messages/failure indicationsand CONNECT info repetition

D - Engine rev. counter

E - Fuel gauge and reserve warninglight

F - Flash consumption gaugeG - Warning lightsH - Kilometre counter (and trip

meter) and automatic gearbox I - Trip meter reset button/failure

messages deleting button

107

INSTRUMENTS

SPEEDOMETER (fig. 103)

The speedometer shows the carspeed expressed in kilometres perhour (km/h) and starts signallingthe speed when the car speedexceeds approx. 4 km/h (see theindications given in paragraph “Atthe filling station").

REV COUNTER (fig. 104)

If the needle is in the hazard sector(the section with red lines) it showsthat the engine is over-revving. Donot travel with the needle in this sec-tor.

When the engine is idling, the revcounter may show a gradual or sud-den increase in engine speed,according to the case. This is normaland indicates the operation of theclimate control compressor or fans,etc. In particular, a gradual varia-tion in engine revolution speed safe-guards battery charge.

IMPORTANT The hazard sectorscan present different widths and dif-ferent full scale values according tothe various car versions.

IMPORTANT The electronic injec-tion control system will progressive-ly cut off the flow of fuel when theengine is over-revving and theengine will consequently lose power.

fig. 103

L0A

0232

b

fig. 104L0

A02

33b

108

fig. 106

L0A

0236

b

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-TURE GAUGE WITH OVER-HEATING WARNING LIGHT(fig. 105)

This instrument indicates theengine coolant temperature. It startssignalling the temperature when thisreaches approximately 50 °C.

The needle should usually be onmiddle scale values. reduce yourdemand on the engine if the needleapproaches top scale values.

The warning light A will come ontogether with message “ENGINECOOLANT TEMPERATUREHIGH” on the instrument panel dis-play to indicate that the coolanttemperature is too hot. In this case,stop the engine immediately andcontact a Lancia Dealership.

IMPORTANT The needle mayapproach the top scale values if theengine cooling radiator external partis obstructed or dirty. In this case,inspect and remove the obstructions.Accurately clean the external part ofthe radiator as soon as possible.

FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVEWARNING LIGHT (fig. 106)

The fuel reserve warning light Awill come on together with message“REFUEL” on the instrument paneldisplay to indicate that there areapproximately 10 litres of fuel in thetank.

IMPORTANT Do not travel withthe fuel tank almost empty: the gapsin fuel delivery could damage thecatalyst.

fig. 105

L0A

0235

b

109

IMPORTANT Refuelling shallalways be performed with engine offand ignition key to STOP. If theengine is off but the key is to MAR,a wrong fuel level could temporarilybe indicated. This is due to the inter-nal system control logic and cannotbe considered as a system malfunc-tioning.

FLASH CONSUMPTION GAUGE(fig. 107)

Gauge A shows the flash consump-tion: to prevent excessively variablevalues the gauge shows the averageconsumption of the last minutes oftravel expressed in l/100 km (litresper 100 km).

This is helpful for the driver forlearning the fuel consumption inrelation to the driving style.

The gauge needle has the followingposition:

– value 0 l/100 km with car sta-tionary

– near value 2 l/100 km when thecar speed is between 4 and 20 km/hand when releasing the acceleratorpedal during driving

– actual consumption value(between 2 and 20 l/100 km) forspeeds exceeding 20 km/h.

fig. 107L0

A02

34b

110

KILOMETRE COUNTER (ANDTRIP METER) AND AUTOMATICGEARBOX

The following information is shownon the display (fig. 108):

– the total number of kilometresdriven (six digits on the first line A;

– the trip meter reading (four dig-its) on the second line B ;

– engaged or demanded gear (ver-sions with electronic automatic gear-box) on the top of the display C .

Press button A (fig. 109) for atleast two seconds to reset the tripmeter.

When pressing the button for lessthan two seconds, failure messagedeleting function is activated.

With ignition key at STOP orremoved, the display is off. Whenopening or closing a front door, thedisplay comes on displaying tripmeter info for about 20 seconds.

IMPORTANT The trip meter read-ing will be deleted if the battery isdisconnected.

fig. 108

L0A

0237

b

fig. 109L0

A00

92b

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (fig. 110)

The multifunction display showsall the useful information necessarywhen driving, more particularly:

Information on standard screen

– Clock A

– External temperature B.

fig. 110

L0A

0258

b

111

Driver’s aiding systeminformation

– Cruise Control info

– Radar Cruise Control info

The language used for indicatingfailures and messages on the multi-function display is the same as theCONNECT language (where it ispossible to set it).

Car conditions

– Scheduled servicing

– Engine oil level (JTD versionsonly)

– Instrument dimmer

– Failure message display

– Display of warning messages withcorresponding symbols (e.g.“WARNING ICE HAZARD”, “ASROFF”, etc.).

CONNECT information

Information managed by CONNECT:

– AUDIO function info

– NAVIGATOR info (symbol repe-tition)

– TELEPHONE function info

– VOICE BOX info

– SMS messages reception.

112

START-UP CHECKS

When turning the ignition key toMAR to start the engine, the systemstarts monitoring the main car sys-tems, the engine oil level (JTD ver-sions only) and indicates the nextScheduled Servicing.

Message

DIAGNOSIS IN PROGRESS

OK

Meaning of the message

Diagnosis is being performed

Diagnosis is overand all checked devices

are OK

Check stage

Warning light/symbol

y

z

Remarks

–

–

113

Engine oil level check (JTD versions only)

Indication is correct only if oil level has been checked with the car on a level surface.

If oil level is low, before topping up, check it by the proper dipstick as described in paragraph “Checking fluid levels”in the “Car maintenance” chapter.


Ç

k

Ñ

Note

If oil level is near or below the MIN reference line

top up as soon as possible

Restore proper oil level

Use the dipstick to check thatthe oil level is not exceeding

the MAX reference line

If oil level is exceed-ing the MAX refer-ence line contact a

Lancia Dealership as soonas possible

Message

ENGINE OIL LEVEL

LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL

SWITCH OFF ENGINE DO NOT PROCEED

MAXIMUM ENGINE OIL LEVEL


Engine oil level indication

Engine oil level is below the minimum

Engine oil level could exceed the maximum

114

Scheduled Servicing infoService message is displayed in km

or days according to the approach-ing service interval.

The Service Schedule programmes9 service operations to be performedevery 20,000 km or every year.

– days: 27 - 24 - 21 - 18 - 15 - 12- 9 - 6 - 3.

IMPORTANT Instrument panelstored info is not deleted if powersupply is interrupted.

Service indications will be dis-played starting from 2,000 km or 30days from this deadline and then areshown again at:

– km: 1.800 - 1.600 - 1.400 -1.200 - 1.000 - 800 - 600 - 400 -200 - 100 - 50


É

Message

SCHEDULEDSERVICE

WITHIN: xxxx km

SCHEDULEDSERVICE

WITHIN: xx days

SCHEDULEDSERVICE

EXPIRED: 0 km

SCHEDULEDSERVICE

EXPIRED: 0 days

meaning of the message

Indicates the number of kilometres to go before next

Scheduled Servicing

Indicates the number ofdays to go before next

Scheduled Servicing

Indicates that the car hasreached the km required to

perform the ScheduledService operation

Indicates that one year haspast since last Scheduled

Service operation

Remarks

Contact a Lancia Dealershipto programme the Scheduled

Service operation

Contact a Lancia Dealership to programme the Scheduled

Service operation

Contact a Lancia Dealershipas soon as possible to carry out the

programmed Scheduled Serviceoperation

Contact a Lancia Dealership as soonas possible to carry out the pro-

grammed Scheduled Service operation

INSTRUMENTPANEL WARNINGLIGHTS AND MESSAGES

On the instrument panel are set themain warning lights. Certain warn-ing lights with the relevant warningmessages are present also on theinstrument panel multifunction dis-play.

Many indications/info are displayedwith a symbol only on the multifunc-tion display with the correspondingwarnings for the driver.

IMPORTANT Indications mayvary according to the car version.

GENERAL NOTES

Failure indications shown on themultifunction display together withbuzzer sounding and warning light(if any), are accompanied by spe-cific warning messages (e.g. “GOTO DEALER”, “SWITCH OFFENGINE”, etc.). These indicationsare concise and cautionary and areaimed to suggest the prompt actionthe driver must adopt when a carmalfunctioning appears. These indi-cations, however, shall not be con-sidered as exhaustive and/or as analternative to the specifications con-tained in this Owner Handbook,which shall always be read throughcarefully and thoroughly. In case offailure indication always refer tothe specifications contained inthis chapter.

Failure indications displayed onthe multifunction display are divid-ed into two categories: very seriousfailures and serious failures. Themessage and the warning indicationcorresponding to very serious fail-ures are displayed alternately forfew seconds. This “cycle” is repeat-ed indefinitely and it stops any pre-vious indication on the display. It isdisplayed every time the ignition keyis turned to MAR, until the cause ofmalfunctioning is removed. To stopthis “cycle”, briefly press (less thantwo seconds) the trip meter resetbutton. In this case the failure sym-bol stays on the display in the cen-tral area until the cause of malfunc-tioning is removed.

115

116

LEFT DIRECTIONINDICATOR

The warning light comeson when left direction indicators areon and, together with right directionindicators, when hazard lights areon.

RIGHT DIRECTIONINDICATOR

The warning light comeson when right direction indicatorsare on and, together with left direc-tion indicators, when hazard lightsare on.

SIDE/TAILLIGHTS

The warning light comeson when side/taillights or

parking lights are on.

DIPPED BEAMHEADLIGHTS

The warning light comeson when dipped beam headlights areon or when flashing the headlights.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS

The warning light comeson when front fog lights

are on (where provided).

Ÿ

Δ

3

1

5

The message and the warning indi-cation corresponding to serious fail-ures are displayed alternately forfew seconds. This “cycle” is repeat-ed for about 20 seconds and thengoes off, but it comes on again everytime the ignition key is turned toMAR. At the end of the cycle(approx. 20 seconds) when pressingbriefly (less than two seconds) thetrip meter reset button, the warningsymbol is reduced to icon at the bot-tom of the display and the screenpresent before the failure returns onthe display.

117

REAR SIDE BAGSDEACTIVATED(where provided)

The warning light comes on whenrear side bags are deactivated by therelevant key switch.

EOBD ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMFAILURE

In normal conditions, turning theignition key to MAR, the warninglight turns on, but it should go offwhen the engine has started.

If the warning light stays on orturns on when travelling togetherwith message “ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAULT” on the multi-function display:

Glowing steadily - means a faultin the supply/ignition system whichcould cause high emissions at theexhaust, possible lack of perfor-mance, poor handling and high con-sumption levels.

In these conditions it is possible tocontinue driving without howeverdemanding heavy effort or highspeeds. Prolonged use of the car withthe warning light on may causedamages. Contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

The warning light goes off if thefault disappears but it is howeverstored by the system.

FRONT PASSENGERAIRBAG DEACTIVATED

The warning light comeson when front passenger airbag isdeactivated by the relevant keyswitch.

SEAT BELTS

The warning light comeson with ignition key at

MAR when the driver’s seat belt isnot fastened.

F

<

U

À

REAR FOG LIGHTS

The warning light comeson when rear fog lights are

on.

AIRBAG SYSTEM FAILURE

Turning the ignition keyto MAR, the warning light turns onbut it should go off after a few sec-onds. The warning light comes onwith message “AIRBAG SYSTEMFAULT” on the multifunction dis-play to indicate an airbag systemfailure.

4

¬

If the ¬ warning lightdoes not turn on whenturning the ignition key to

MAR or if it stays on when travel-ling, (together with message ondisplay) this could indicate a fail-ure in safety retaining systems; un-der this condition air bags or pre-tensioners could not trigger in theevent of collision or, in a restrictednumber of cases, they could trig-ger accidentally. Stop the car andcontact Lancia Dealership to havethe system checked immediately.

LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL

Turning the ignition keyto MAR, the warning light turns onbut it should go off after a few sec-onds.

The warning light comes on togeth-er with the message “LOW BRAKEFLUID LEVEL” on the multifunc-tion display, when the level of thebrake fluid in the reservoir fallsbelow the minimum level, due topossible leak in the circuit.

118

INJECTION SYSTEMFAILURE

(where provided - JTD versions)

In normal conditions, turning theignition key to MAR, the warninglight turns on but it should go offafter a few seconds.

If the warning light stays on or turnson while travelling together with themessage “ENGINE CONTROL SYS-TEM FAULT” on the multifunctiondisplay, this indicates that the injec-tion system is not working perfectlywith possible lack of performance,poor handling and high consumption.

In these conditions it is possible tocontinue driving without howeverrequiring heavy effort or high speedfrom the engine. In any case, contacta Lancia Dealership as soon aspossible.

Do not use the car for long periodsat high speed with this warning lighton since this could result in seriousdamages especially in case of irregu-lar operation or misfiring.

U xFlashing - indicates the possibility

of damage to the catalyst (see“EOBD system” in this chapter).

If the warning light flashes, it isnecessary to release the acceleratorpedal to lower the speed of theengine until the warning light stopsflashing; continue driving at moder-ate speed, trying to avoid drivingconditions that may cause furtherflashing and contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

If, turning the ignitionkey to MAR, the U warn-ing light does not turn on

or if it turn on glowing steadily orflashing when travelling, contacta Lancia Dealership.

119

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE

Turning the ignition keyto MAR, the instrument

panel warning light turns on but itshould go off after a few seconds.

When there is failure the warninglight stays on or comes on whentravelling together with message“ABS SYSTEM FAULT” on themultifunction display. In this casethe braking system keeps its effec-tiveness unchanged, but without thepotential offered by the ABS system.It is however recommended to con-tact a Lancia Dealership as soonas possible.

In the event of instrument panelwarning light failure, the warninglight on the multifunction displaycomes on together with message“ABS INDICATOR FAULT”: con-tact a Lancia Dealership as soonas possible.

In this case heavy brak-ing may cause the rearwheels to lock before

time, with the possibility of skid-ding, stop the car immediatelyand contact a Lancia Dealership.

>EBD SYSTEMFAULT(ELECTRONIC

BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTOR)

The car is fitted with electronicbraking distributor (EBD). Theturning on at the same time of thex and > warning lights on theinstrument panel together with mes-sage “EBD SYSTEM FAULT” onthe multifunction display with theengine running indicates an EBDsystem failure.

x>If the x warning lightcomes on when travelling,stop immediately and

contact a Lancia Dealership.

In the event of instrument panelwarning light failure, the warninglight on the multifunction displaycomes on together with message“BRAKE FLUID INDICATORFAULT”: contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

120

ESP SYSTEM (ELEC-TRONIC STABILITYPROGRAM) FAILURE

Turning the ignition key to MAR,the warning light turns on but itshould go off after a few seconds.

If the warning light does not go offor stays on when travelling togetherwith the message “ESP SYSTEMFAULT” on the multifunction dis-play, contact a Lancia Dealership.

Warning light flashing when dri-ving indicates that the ESP system isactive.

In the event of instrument panelwarning light failure, the warninglight on the multifunction displaycomes on together with message“ESP INDICATOR FAULT”: con-tact a Lancia Dealership as soonas possible.

ELECTRIC PARKINGBRAKE (EPB)

Turning the ignition keyto MAR, the warning light turns onbut it should go off after a few sec-onds.

In case of x instrument panelwarning light failure, 3 warninglight comes on together with mes-sage “EPB INDICATOR FAULT -GO TO DEALER” on the multifunc-tion display: contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible.

á x

If the x warning lightdoes not go off or stays onwhen travelling together

with the message “EPB FAULT -GO TO DEALER” on the instru-ment panel display, contactimmediately a LanciaDealership.

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAYWARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The following pages give a list ofmonitored car systems or parame-ters and the corresponding symbols,failure and warning messages thatcould be shown on the multifunctiondisplay.

The following tables show the fail-ure/warning indications with thecorresponding meaning and theproper actions to take.

Indications may vary according tothe car version.

Screen A (failure message) and B(warning message) (fig. 111) are anexample of the indications displayedalternately.

fig. 111L0

A02

40g

121

122

Follow me home device


-

Instrument dimmer


x


Indicates the set lighting level (for instrument panel,

display and buttons)


Indicates that the “Follow mehome” device is on, externallights will therefore stay on

for the set time

Remarks

–

Remarks

Minimum: 30 seconds, maximum: 210 seconds, 30

seconds intervals

Steering wheel lock


-

Message

FOLLOW MEXXs

Message

STEERING LOCKED WHENDOORS CLOSED


Steering will be locked whenlocking the doors

with the remote control

Remarks

–

Message

DIMMERINSTRUMENT

123

Doors


8

9

Action

Close the door indicated

Close the doors indicated


The door indicated by the symbol is not closed correctly

The doors indicated by the sym-bol are not closed correctly

Message

DOOR OPEN

DOORS OPEN

124

Bonnet and boot


7

v

w

Message

BONNET OPEN

BOOT OPEN

BOOT AND BONNET OPEN


The engine bonnet is not closed correctly

The boot is not closed correctly

Engine bonnet and boot are not closed correctly

Action

Close the engine bonnet

Close the boot tailgate

Close bonnet and boot

Window anti-trap safety system


5

Message

WINDOW ANTI-TRAPSYSTEM FAULTFRONT LEFT

GO TO DEALER

WINDOW ANTI-TRAP SYSTEM FAULT FRONT RIGHT

GO TO DEALER

WINDOW ANTI-TRAP SYSTEM FAULT

REAR LEFTGO TO DEALER

WINDOW ANTI-TRAP SYSTEM FAULT

REAR RIGHTGO TO DEALER


Front left-hand window anti-trap system sensor

fault

Front right-hand window anti-trap system sensor

fault

Rear left-hand windowanti-trap system sensor

fault

Rear right-hand window anti-trap system sensor

failure

Action

Contact a LanciaDealership




125

Lancia CODE, Keyless System (CID device) and alarm system


Y

Message

ALARM FAULTGO TO DEALER

THEFTATTEMPTED

VEHICLE PROTECTION SYSTEM FAULTGO TO DEALER


Alarm system failure

Theft has beenattempted

Failures detected in Lancia CODE system

Action


See paragraph “Electronic alarm”


126

Glow plugs (JTD versions)


m

èm

Message

–

PLUG PREHEATINGFAULT

GO TO DEALER


Symbol is displayed when glow plugs

are working. Symbol goes offwhen glow plugs reach the preset temperature.

When outside temperature is high symbol displaying can be unper-

ceivable

Plug preheating systemfault

Remarks / Action

Start engine as soon as symbol

goes off


Fuel level


K

Message

REFUEL


Low fuel in the tank. This message is displayed

when about 10 litres fuel are left in the tank

Remarks

Top up fuel as soon as possible

IMPORTANT Do not travel withthe fuel tank almost empty: thegaps in fuel delivery could damagethe catalyst

Action

IMPORTANT If the ¬ warning lightdoes not turn on when turning the ig-nition key to MAR or if it stays onwhen travelling, (together with mes-sage on display) this could indicate afailure in safety retaining systems; un-der this condition air bags or preten-sioners could not trigger in the event ofcollision or, in a restricted number ofcases, they could trigger accidentally.Stop the car and contact Lancia Deal-ership to have the system checked im-mediately.

127

Outside temperature (ice hazard)


❄Message

WARNING ICE HAZARD


Outside temperature is low and there could be ice on the road

Remarks

Under certain conditions(bridges, overbridges,curves or road sections in

the shade, etc.) the air temperatureat ground level can be lower thanthat at sensor level and thereforethere can be ice on the roadalthough this warning message isnot displayed

Message

AIRBAG SYSTEM FAULT

AIRBAG SYSTEM FAULT

SWITCH OFF ENGINE,DO NOT PROCEED


Airbag system failure

Airbag system failure

Airbag


¬

128

ABS SYSTEM


>Message

SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

ABS SYSTEM FAULTGO TO DEALER

ABS INDICATOR FAULTGO TO DEALER


System setting in progress

ABS system failure:in this case the braking system

keeps its effectiveness, but without the potential offered

by the ABS system. Drive with theutmost care specially

in all cases of less than perfect grip.

System is ok but the warning light is failing and

cannot indicate the presence offuture failures of the ABS system

Action

–

Contact a Lancia Dealership


ESP (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)


áMessage

SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

ESP SYSTEM FAULTGO TO DEALER

ESP INDICATOR FAULTGO TO DEALER



ESP system failure

System is ok but the warninglight is failing and cannot indicate

the presence of futurefailures/interventions of the ESP

system

Action

-



ASR SYSTEM (wheel antiskid system)


VMessage

ASR OFF

ASR ON

SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE


System has been deactivated manually

System has been activated manually


Action

–

–

–

EBD SYSTEM (electronic brakeforce distributor)


x>Message

EBD SYSTEM FAULTSWITCH OFF ENGINE,

DO NOT PROCEED

SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE


EBD system failure


Action

Stop the car and contact aLancia Dealership

The car is fitted with anelectronic brakeforcedistributor (EBD). The

turning on at the same time ofthex and> warning lights onthe instrument panel togetherwith message “EBD SYSTEMFAULT” on the multifunctiondisplay, with engine running,indicates and EBD system fail-ure; in this case heavy brakingmay cause the rear wheel lockbefore time, with the possibilityof skidding.

–

129

130

EPB (electric parking brake)


3

Message

EPB FAULTGO TO DEALER

EPB INDICATOR FAULTGO TO DEALER


Electric parking brake failure

Electric parking brake warning light failure

Action



EOBD (engine control system)


UMessage

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAULTGO TO DEALER


Engine control systemfailure

Action


Injection system (where provided - JTD versions)


UMessage

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAULTGO TO DEALER


Injection system failure

Action


131

Car speed


4

Message

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

SLOW DOWN


Car speed is exceeding the limit set on the CONNECT

Action

Reduce car speed

Cruise Control


ÜMessage

CRUISE CONTROL ON


The Cruise Control (constantspeed adjusting device) is activated

Remarks

-

132


–

ú–

àà

Message

RADAR CRUISE CONTROLOFF

RADAR CRUISE CONTROL ON

RADAR CRUISE CONTROL NOT ACTIVATED

RADAR CRUISE CONTROLFAULT

GO TO DEALER

RCC FAULT DIRTY LENS GO TO DEALER


The Radar Cruise Control is off

The Radar Cruise Control is on

The Radar Cruise Controlwas on but has been deactivated since the speed of the precedingvehicles has slowed down to 30

km/h or the brake pedalhas been depressed

Radar Cruise Control failure

System failure is due to radar sensor “blindness”

since the aerial lens is dirty

Action

–

–

–



Radar Cruise Control

For any information concerning symbols and messages displayed during normal system operation see paragraph “RadarCruise Control”.

133

Electronic automatic transmission (COMFORTRONIC)


t

Message

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAULT

GO TO DEALER SLOWLY

AUTOMATIC TRANSMIS-SION OIL TEMP. HIGHSWITCH OFF ENGINE,

DO NOT PROCEED


Electronic automatic transmission

(COMFORTRONIC) failure

Electronic automatic transmission (COMFORTRONIC)

oilis too hot

Action

Drive slowly to the nearestLancia Dealership

Turn the engine off and contact a Lancia Dealership

Power steering (VARIOSTEER)


gMessage

POWER STEERING FAULT GO TO

DEALER SLOWLY


Power steering(VARIOSTEER)

failure

Action


Suspensions (SKYHOOK - where provided)


‰

Message

SUSPENSION FAULTGO TO

DEALER SLOWLY


Suspensions(SKYHOOK)

failure

Action


134

Headlamp inclination adjustment system


6

Message

HEADLAMP INCLINATIONADJUSTMENT

SYSTEMFAULT

GO TO DEALER


Headlamp inclination adjustment system

failure

Action


Brake fluid level


x

Message

LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL


BRAKE FLUID LEVELINDICATOR

GO TO DEALER


Brake fluid in the reservoir is below the minimum level

due to possible leak in the circuit

Brake fluid warning light

failure

Action

Stop the car and contact a Lancia

Dealership


135

Engine oil pressure


v

èv

Message

INSUFFICIENTENGINE OILPRESSURE


ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAULTGO TO DEALER


Engine oil pressure is below the standard value

Engine oil pressure sensor failure

Action

Turn the engine off and contact a Lancia Dealership

IMPORTANT If engine has beentaxed, when running it idle thismessage can appear on the dis-play but it should go out when

slightly accelerating


Low battery charge


w

Message

ALTERNATOR FAULTGO TO

DEALER SLOWLY


Current generator failure resulting in poor car battery

charge

Action

Drive slowly to a LanciaDealership

136

Brake pads


d

Message

WORN BRAKE PADSGO TO DEALER


Brake pads are worn

Action


IMPORTANT Since the car is fit-ted with wear sensors for the frontbrake pads, when changing them,check also the rear brake pads

Engine coolant temperature


u

è

Message

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE HIGH


ENGINE COOLANT TEM-PERATURE

SENSOR FAULTGO TO DEALER


Indicates excessive engine coolanttemperature

Engine coolant temperature sen-sor failure

Action

Turn the engine off and contact aLancia Dealership

Contacta Lancia Dealership

Engine coolant level


n

Message

RADIATORLIQUID INSUFFICIENTSWITCH OFF ENGINE

CHECK THE HANDBOOK


Engine coolant level in reservoir

is near to the min. levelor is below the min. level

Action

Turn the engine off and top up before restarting followingthe instructions given in chapter

“Car maintenance”

137

Windscreen washer fluid level


)

Message

LOW WINDSCREENWASHER FLUID LEVEL

CHECK LEVEL


Windscreen washer fluid level in reservoir

is below the minimum level

Action

Top up as soon as possible, following the instructions given in

chapter “Car maintenance”

Side/taillights


k

l

m

n

Message

SIDE LIGHT FAULTFRONT LEFT

GO TO DEALER

SIDE LIGHT FAULT FRONT RIGHT

GO TO DEALER

TAILLIGHT FAULTLEFT

GO TO DEALER

TAILLIGHT FAULT RIGHT

GO TO DEALER


Front left-hand side light doesn’t turn on

Front right-hand side light doesn’t turn on

Left-hand taillight doesn’t turn on

Right-hand taillight doesn’t turn on

Action





138

Direction indicators


k

l

m

n

Message

INDICATOR LIGHT FAULT FRONT LEFT

GO TO DEALER

INDICATOR LIGHT FAULT FRONT RIGHT

GO TO DEALER

INDICATOR LIGHT FAULT REAR LEFT

GO TO DEALER

INDICATOR LIGHT FAULT REAR RIGHT

GO TO DEALER


Front left-hand direction indicator doesn’t turn on

Front right-hand direction indica-tor doesn’t turn on

Rear left-hand direction indicator doesn’t turn on

Rear right-hand direction indica-tor doesn’t turn on

Action





Brake lights


o

p

q

T

Message

BRAKE LIGHT FAULTLEFT GO TO DEALER

BRAKE LIGHT FAULTRIGHT GO TO DEALER

BRAKE LIGHT FAULTLEFT AND RIGHTGO TO DEALER

BRAKE LIGHT FUSE FAULT

GO TO DEALER


Left-hand brake light doesn’t turn on

Right-hand brake light doesn’t turn on

Brake lights do not turn on

Brake lights do not turn on since fuse is blown

Action





Action

Before reactivatingthe switch read care-fully through the

instructions given in the rele-vant paragraph

139

Rear fog lights


o

p

q

Message

REAR FOG LIGHT FAULT LEFT

GO TO DEALER

REAR FOG LIGHT FAULT RIGHT

GO TO DEALER

REAR FOG LIGHT FAULT LEFT AND RIGHTGO TO DEALER


Left-hand rear fog light doesn’t turn on

Right-hand rear fog light doesn’t turn on

Rear fog lights don’t turn on

Action




Number plate light


r

Message

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTFAULT GO TO DEALER


One or both number plate lights don’t turn on

Action


Inertia switch (Fuel cut-off switch)


s

Message

INERTIASWITCH ON


Inertia switch has cut in after an impact/collision

Action

The presence of waterin the fuel circuit maycause serious damage

to the entire injection systemand cause irregular engineoperation. If there is water inthe fuel filter or the sensor isfaulty contact a LanciaDealership as soon as possible

140

Parking sensors


t

Message

PARKING SENSORFAULT

GO TO DEALER


One or more parking sensorfailure

Action


Diesel fuel filter (JTD versions)


c

è c

Message

MOISTURE IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER

GO TO DEALER

DIESEL FUEL FILTERSENSOR FAULTGO TO DEALER


Water in diesel fuel filter

Water in diesel fuel filter sensor failure

141

Twilight sensor


1

Message

TWILIGHT SENSOR FAULT

GO TO DEALER


The twilight sensor, for switchingon/off automatically the external

lights is faulty

Action


Engine oil level sensor (JTD versions)


è k

Message

ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAULT

GO TO DEALER


Engine oil level sensor failure

Action


Message

ANTIPOLLUTIONFILTER

CLOGGEDSEE HENDBOOK


Anti-pollution filter clogged

Action

Keep the engine running until the symbol disappears from

the display

Antipollution filter clogged (2.4 JTD 20V CAE version)


è

Message

CHANGEENGINE OIL


Change engine oil

Action

Restore proper oil level (see “Checking levels” in section

“Car maintenance”)

Change engine oil (2.4 JTD 20V CAE version)


142

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

fig. 112L0A6018b

143

1 - Windscreen defrosting/demist-ing vents

2 - Front side windows defrost-ing/demisting vents

3 - Central directional andadjustable vents

4 - Side directional and adjustablevents

5 - Air vents on driver side

6 - Air vents on passenger side

7 - Directional and adjustablevents on front doors

8 - Front footwell air vents

9 - Rear footwell air vents

10 - Rear central directional andadjustable vents

11 - Rear side directional andadjustable vents

The climate control system can beoperated in one of the followingways:

– manually, by selecting the func-tions by means of the control panelbuttons;

– automatically, by means of thesystem electronic control unit.

The air is let into the passengercompartment through a set of ventson the dashboard, on the front doorpanels, on the rear central tunnel, ondoor posts and on the floor as shownin (fig. 112).

The amount of air is adjusted withcontrol B:O = all open

ç = all closed.

fig. 117

L0A

0056

b

fig. 116

L0A

0055

b

144

DIRECTIONAL ANDADJUSTABLE VENTS (fig. 113-114-115-116-117)

The vents can be turned upwardsor downwards and towards the leftand the right with control A. Frontdoor vents (fig. 115) can be turnedonly upwards or downwards.

fig. 115L0

A00

57b

fig. 114

L0A

0058

bfig. 113

L0A

0062

b

Fixed vents C (fig. 114) fordemisting or defrosting the frontside windows are located at thedashboard ends.

AIR VENTS

The car is fitted with three airvents set on the dashboard: twovents A (fig. 118) on driver side andone B (fig. 119) on passenger side,sending air in the passenger com-partment in a “diffused” mode.

This particular function conveys airat low speed, about half of the usualflow, through additional vents.Moreover, it reduces the air impacton the passengers and the noise dueto the air coming out of the vents,thus improving the passengers' com-fort.

IMPORTANT When the outsidetemperature is very high (over 30°C),to reach the selected temperature assoon as possible, it is suggested to op-erate air vents only after the systemhas reached steady working condi-tions.

IMPORTANT On versions equippedwith solar cell operated sunroof(where provided), to check operationat first speed of climate control sys-tem fan when the car is parked, dis-engage air vents and set air distribu-tion from central dashboard ventsonly before leaving the car.

fig. 119L0

A00

60b

fig. 120

L0A

0059

b

fig. 118

L0A

0061

b

145

Air vents (open) are actually usedonly when the control for directingair flow on the instrument panel isoperated.

Air vents are opened by rotatingthe dashboard central vent knobsbeyond the upper stop limit (fig.120):

– control A for air vents on driverside

– control B for air vent on passen-ger side.

At the stop limit of these controlsthere is a button which, if pressed,sends a signal to the climate systemcontrol unit.

146

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

GENERAL

The car can be equipped with atwo-zone or multi-zone automaticclimate control system.

The two-zone climate control sys-tem controls temperature, air distri-bution and flow inside the passengercompartment in two areas: driverside and passenger side.

The multi-zone climate control sys-tem controls temperature, air distrib-ution and flow inside the passengercompartment in three areas: driverside, passenger side or back-seat pas-sengers.

Control of front-seat passenger andback-seat passengers is alternated;when the button led REAR is turnedoff, the front-seat passenger controlis operating, whereas when buttonREAR is pressed (button led turnedon), the back control panel is acti-vated, thus excluding those for thefront-seat passenger.

Temperature check is based on the“heat balance” concept, whichmeans that the system works con-stantly to keep a regular balancebetween incoming and outgoing heatenergy, in order to stabilize temper-ature inside the passenger compart-ment and compensate possible vari-ations of outside climate, sun radi-ance included. For optimal controlof temperature in the two areas ofthe passenger compartment, the sys-tem is equipped with a sun ray sen-sor.

The system features a pollutionsensor which can automaticallyswitch the air recirculation functionon to reduce the unpleasant effectsof polluted air in cities, queues, tun-nels and when the windscreen wash-er is operated (with the characteris-tic smell of alcohol).

The air quality is controlled by anactive carbon dust/pollen filterwhich has the double function ofmechanically filtering the particlesdispersed in the air and attenuatingthe peak accumulation of certainpollutants.

Parameters and functions auto-matically controlled are the follow-ing:

– temperature of air let into dri-ver/passenger vents (front-seat/back-seats);

– air distribution to vents on dri-ver/passenger side (front-seat/back-seats);

– fan speed (continuos variation ofair flow);

– compressor activation (to coolair);

– air recirculation.

All these functions can be adjustedmanually, it means that one or moresystem functions can be selected andthat it is possible to change theirparameters. However, in this waythe system is unable to control man-ually selected functions which willbe changed by the system only forsafety reasons, while keeping therequired temperature.

147

IMPORTANT During air distribu-tion automatic management, all theair distribution button leds are off.User can select manually any distri-bution, and only in this case, theconcerned button led will be lit.

The manual settings have priorityover the automatic settings until theuser returns the system to automaticcontrol.

Manual setting of a function doesnot compromise automatic controlof the other functions.

The amount of air let into the pas-senger compartment does notdepend on the car speed. It is in factadjusted by an electronically con-trolled fan.

The temperature of the air let intothe passenger compartment isalways controlled automatically(unless the system is off), accordingto the temperatures set on the dri-ver’s and front/rear passenger’s dis-plays.

The following parameters andfunctions can be adjusted manually:

– air temperature on driver/pas-senger side (front/rear);

– fan speed (continuous variation);

– air distribution in seven positions(driver/passengers);

– diffused air distribution;

– compressor activation;

– priority of one-zone/two-zonedistribution (front/back);

– rapid defrosting/demisting func-tion;

– air recirculation;

– automatic/manual system con-trol;

– heated rear window;

– system off;

– activation of back control panel.

The defrosting/demisting functionincludes a set of operations enablingto defrost/demist rapidly both thewindscreen and the heated rear win-dow.

At each turning off, the systemafter storing control and functionconditions, sets up the open recircu-lation, thus creating the necessaryconditions for operation at firstspeed of climate control system fanat parking, fed by solar cell operatedsunroof (where provided).

IMPORTANT Best operation ofclimate control system fan at park-ing, fed by solar cell operated sun-roof (where provided), is obtainedby closing completely the windowsand sunroof. Furthermore, to checkoperation at first speed of climatecontrol system fan when the car isparked, disengage air vents and setair distribution from central dash-board vents only before leaving thecar.

When turning on, the systemrestores the conditions memorizedbefore turning off, except for therapid defrosting/demisting functionwhich is reset.

148

FRONT CONTROL PANEL (fig. 121)

fig. 121 L0A0054b

INITIALISING THE AIRCONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the battery is electricallyconnected again or it is reloadedafter being completely flat or afterreplacing one of the protection fuses,to restore the correct operation ofthe air conditioning, of the doorlocking and of the ESP system. It isnecessary to perform the initialisa-tion operations contained in theparagraph “If battery is to be dis-connected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

149

1 - Button for automatic systemselection (driver side)

2 - Inside temperature adjustmentknob (driver side)

3 - Air recirculation button (auto-matic, always turned on or off)

4 - Display for set inside tempera-ture and system status (driver side)

5 - Fan speed display

6 - Display for set inside tempera-ture and system status (passengerside)

7 - Air conditioner compressor offbutton

8 - Inside temperature adjustmentknob (front passenger side)

9 - Button for automatic systemselection (front passenger side)

10 - Air distribution buttons (frontpassenger side)

11 - Button for activation of backcontrol panel

12 - Button for turning on/offheated rear window and defrostingof external rearview mirrors

13 - Button for fan speed increase

14 - Button for fan speed reduction

15 - Button for turning on/off fastdefrosting/demisting of windscreen,front side windows, rear window,external rearview mirrors and wind-screen wiper nozzles

16 - Button for balancing tempera-ture and air distribution in the pas-sengers’ area (front/back-seats)with the driver’s area

17 - Inside temperature sensor

18 - Air distribution buttons (dri-ver side)

150

The cooling system usescoolant “R134a” refriger-ating fluid that meets cur-

rent regulations and does notpollute the environment if it acci-dentally leaks. Under no circum-stances should other fluids beused which are incompatiblewith the system components.

BACK CONTROL PANEL (fig. 122)

1 - Inside temperature adjustmentknob (back-seat passengers)

2 - Display for set inside tempera-ture (back-seat passengers)

3 - Fan speed display

4 - System status display (AUTO,FULL AUTO)

5 - Button for automatic systemselection (back-seat passengers)

6 - Button for rear footwell airvents

7 - Button for fan speed reduction

8 - Button for fan speed increase

9 - Button for air distributionthrough front back vents

fig. 122L0

A01

01b

151

HOW TO USE THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM

The system can be switched on invarious ways. We recommend start-ing by pressing the AUTO buttonand setting the required tempera-tures on the display.

Since the system controls threeareas of the passenger compartment,the driver and the front/back pas-sengers can select different tempera-ture values, with a maximum differ-ence accepted by the system of 7 °C.

In this way, the system will startworking fully automatically to reachthe required temperature as soon aspossible. It will maintain the tem-perature by adjusting the amountand distribution pattern of the air letinto the passenger compartment andmanage the recirculation functionand the climate control system com-pressor.

When the system is working auto-matically, the only possible manualfunctions are:

– MONO, to align air temperatureand distribution on the passengerside or in the back-seat passengers’area with that on the driver side;

– REAR, to activate the back con-trol panel;

– √, to switch off the compressor:in these conditions the system worksonly as a heater;

– air recirculation, to keep recircu-lation always turned on or off;

– -, for faster defrosting/demist-ing the front windows, rear window,external rearview mirrors and wind-screen wiper nozzles;

– (, for defrosting/demisting theheated rear window and externalrearview mirrors.

The temperature, air distributionand fan speed settings can bechanged at any time during auto-matic system operation. The systemwill automatically adjust to the newrequest. When the system is fullyworking in automatic mode (FULLAUTO), if air distribution and/orflow is changed, definition FULLdisappears. In this way functionspass from the automatic mode to themanual mode, until button AUTO ispressed again. There is only one fanspeed for all the passenger compart-ment areas and it can be changedalso by operating back controls,when activated.

With one or more functions manu-ally on, the air temperature let intothe passenger compartment is auto-matically managed by the systemunless the climate control compres-sor is off. In this condition, in fact,the air inlet into the passenger com-partment cannot have a lower tem-perature than that of the externalair.

152

CONTROLS

Knobs for adjusting air tempera-ture (2, 8 fig. 121 - 1 fig. 122)

Turn the knobs towards the rightor towards the left to raise or lowerthe air temperature required respec-tively in the front left-hand area(knob 2 fig. 121) and in the frontright-hand area (knob 8 fig. 121) orback area (knob 1 fig. 122) of thepassenger compartment.

Since the system controls threeareas of the passenger compartment,the driver and the front/back-seatpassengers can select different tem-perature values with a maximumdifference accepted by the system of7 °C.

Temperature control in the frontpassenger area and in the back pas-senger area is alternated; when thebutton led REAR is off, control offront passenger side is on, but whenbutton REAR is pressed (button ledon) the back control panel is activat-ed.

The set temperatures are shown onthe displays set near the respectiveknobs.

Press button 16 (MONO - fig. 121)to automatically align the(front/back) passenger temperatureto the temperature on driver’s side.Consequently the temperature in thetwo areas can be set simply by turn-ing the knob on the driver side 2(fig. 121). This function is providedto facilitate adjusting the temperaturein the passenger compartment whenonly the driver is present. The sepa-rate operation of the set temperaturesand air distribution is automaticallyreset when knobs 8 (fig. 121) or 1(fig. 122) are turned or button 16(MONO - fig. 121) is pressed again,when the button led is turned on.

Turn the knobs fully to the right orto the left to the end positions HI orLO, to obtain maximum heating orcooling, respectively:

– HI function (maximum heating):this is switched on by turning thetemperature knob to the rightbeyond the maximum value (32 °C).It can be independently switched onfrom driver’s side or from(front/back) passenger’s side orfrom both sides (also by selecting theMONO function).

This function can be switched on tospeed up heating in the passengercompartment by exploiting the sys-tem potential to the maximum. Thefunction employs the maximumcoolant temperature while the airdistribution and fan speed are set bythe system according to environ-mental conditions. In particular, ifthe coolant temperature is not suffi-cient, the function does not switchthe fan on at top speed to limit let-ting into air which is not adequatelywarm.

All the manually settings can beadjusted when the function is on.

153

To switch this function off, turnthe temperature knob to the left andset the required temperature.

– LO function (maximum cooling):it is activated by turning the temper-ature knob to the left beyond theminimum value (16 °C). It can beindependently switched on from dri-ver’s side or from (front/back) pas-senger’s side or from both sides (alsoby selecting the MONO function).

This function can be switched on tospeed up cooling the passenger com-partment by exploiting the systempotential to the maximum. Thisfunction cuts out the heater andswitches the air recirculation and theclimate control compressor on. Theair distribution and the fan speedare selected according to the envi-ronmental conditions. All the manu-ally settings can be adjusted whenthe function is on. To switch thisfunction off, turn the temperatureknob to the right and set therequired temperature.

Buttons for adjusting front airdistribution (10, 18 fig. 121)

Press these buttons to manuallyselect one of the seven possible airdistribution patterns in the frontpassenger compartment (right andleft side):

A Air flow to windscreen and frontside window vents for defrosting/demisting the windows.

F D Air flow to central and sidedashboard vents and the rear vents.

IMPORTANT On versions equippedwith solar cell operated sunroof(where provided), to check opera-tion at first speed of climate controlsystem fan when the car is parked,disengage air vents and set air distri-bution from central dashboard ventsonly before leaving the car.

S Air flow to the front and rearfootwells. The air distribution pat-tern, due to the natural tendency ofheat to move upwards, allows toheat the passenger compartment upas fast as possible. Furthermore, itoffers a prompt feeling of warmth tothe coolest parts of the body.

Air flow shared betweenfootwell vents (warmer air)

and central and side dashboardvents and the rear vents (cooler air).This air distribution pattern is par-ticularly useful in middle seasons(spring and autumn) when it is

sunny.

Air flow shared between thefootwell vents and the windscreenand front side windowdefrosting/demisting vents. This airdistribution pattern ensures a goodheating of the passenger compart-ment and prevents possible mistingup.

Air flow distribution betweencentral and side dashboard

vents, rear vents and windscreenand front side window vents.

Air flow distributionbetween all passenger com-

partment vents.

Air distribution setting is displayedwhen leds relevant to the selectedbutton are lit, which will be turnedoff in case of fully automatic opera-tion (FULL AUTO).

FSD

A

FAD

FASD

154

When a combined function is set, ifa button is pressed the main func-tion of the button pressed is activat-ed, together with those already set. Ifthe button corresponding to a func-tion which is already on is pressed,such function will be cancelled (therelated led turns off).

Press the AUTO button to restoreair distribution control after a man-ual setting.

When the driver selects the air dis-tribution to the windscreen, also thepassenger side air flow is automati-cally directed to the windscreen.Anyway, the passenger can selectanother air distribution pattern, bypressing the related buttons.

Buttons for adjusting rear airdistribution (6, 9 fig. 122)

When the back control panel isactivated, it is possible to set one ofthe three air distribution patterns forthe passenger compartment backarea by pressing the related buttons:

D Air flow to back central vents.

S Air flow to rear footwells. This airdistribution pattern, due to the nat-ural tendency of heat to moveupwards, offers a prompt feeling ofwarmth to the coolest parts of thebody.

SDAir flow shared between rearfootwell vents (warmer air) and cen-tral rear vents (cooler air).

Air distribution setting is displayedwhen leds relevant to the selectedbutton are lit, which will be turnedoff in case of fully automatic opera-tion (FULL AUTO).

When a combined function is set, ifa button is pressed the main func-tion of the button pressed is activat-ed, together with those already set. Ifthe button corresponding to a func-tion which is already on is pressed,such function will be cancelled (therelated led turns off).

Press the AUTO button to restoreair distribution control after a man-ual setting.

155

Buttons for adjusting fan speed(13, 14 fig. 121 – 7, 8 fig. 122)

Press respectively front controlbuttons 13 or 14 (fig. 121) and backcontrol buttons 8 or 7 (fig. 122) toincrease or decrease the fan speed soto adjust the amount of air let intothe passenger compartment whilekeeping the required temperatureconstant.

The fan speed is indicated by thebars which light up on the front dis-play 5 (fig. 121) and rear display 3(fig. 122), when the back controlpanel is active. Repeatedly pressbutton or keep pressed 13 (fig. 121)or 8 (fig. 122) to switch the fan onat top speed (all bars on).

Repeatedly press or keep pressedbutton 14 (fig. 121) or 7 (fig. 122)to switch the fan on at minimumspeed (one bar on).

When the fan minimum speed isset up (one bar on), by keepingpressed for at least two seconds but-ton 14 (fig. 121) or 7 (fig. 122), theclimate control system is deactivatedand all the fan bars on the displayturn off; OFF message is displayed.

The fan speed can be adjustedmanually through both the frontcontrol panel and the rear controlpanel, but it is the same one for thewhole passenger compartment.

IMPORTANT Press the AUTObutton to restore air distributioncontrol after a manual setting.

AUTO buttons (automatic operation)(1, 9 fig. 121 - 5 fig. 122)

Press the AUTO button on the dri-ver side and/or front/back-seat pas-senger side: the system will automat-ically control the air amount anddistribution pattern in the relatedpassenger compartment areas andwill cancel all the previously madesettings. This condition is marked bythe message FULL AUTO on thesystem front and rear display,besides the leds on the air distribu-tion buttons turning off.

If one of the functions automatical-ly controlled by the system (air recir-culation, air distribution, fan speedor air conditioner compressor deacti-vation) is manually adjusted, themessage FULL on the display turnsoff to indicate that the system is nolonger controlling the functions inde-pendently (apart from temperaturecontrol that is always automatic).

156

Should the system, as a result ofmanual settings, no longer be able toassure the selected temperature inthe various passenger compartmentareas, the selected temperaturevalue starts flashing to indicate thesystem difficulty and the messageAUTO automatically turns off.

To restore the system automaticcontrol at any moment after one ormore manual setting, press buttonAUTO.

MONO button(set temperature and air distrib-ution alignment) (16 fig. 121)

Press the MONO button to auto-matically align the front/back-seatpassenger’s side temperature and airdistribution to the temperature airdistribution on driver’s side.Consequently, the temperature andair distribution in the two areas canbe set simply by turning the knob ondriver’s side. This function is providedto facilitate adjusting the temperaturein the passenger compartment whenonly the driver is present.

To restore separate temperature andair distribution control in the twopassenger compartment areas, rotateknob 8 (fig. 121) or 1 (fig. 122) to setup temperature in the front/back-seat passengers’ area or press againbutton MONO 16 (fig. 121) when thebutton led is on.

REAR button (rear control panelactivation) (11 fig. 121)

Press the REAR button to switchthe rear control panel on and to cutout the front control panel. As aresult, back-seat passengers canselect temperature, air distributionand fan speed according to theirneeds.

When rear controls are activated,the led on button REAR is on.

IMPORTANT The fan speed canbe adjusted manually also by therear control panel, when activated,but it is the same one for the wholepassenger compartment.

The climate control system can bedeactivated also by the rear controlpanel, when operating: press repeat-edly or keep pressed button 7 (fig.122) until all the fan bars on the dis-play turn off and message OFF isdisplayed.

To exclude the rear control panel,press again button REAR; the but-ton led turns off and the front-seatpassenger’s controls are operatingagain.

Air recirculation on/off button (3 fig. 121)

The air recirculation function iscontrolled according to three strate-gies:

– automatic operation (button leftled on);

– forced ventilation on (recircula-tion always on), the right led on thebutton will come on;

– forced deactivation off (recircula-tion always off, air taken from theoutside), both leds on the button willgo off.

The three conditions are obtainedby pressing the air recirculation but-ton 3 in sequence.

When the air recirculation functionis automatically controlled by thesystem, the left led on the air recir-culation button is turned on, whilethe right led is on or off according tothe actual recirculation conditions(on or off).

During automatic operation, therecirculation function is automati-cally switched on when the pollutionsensor detects the presence of pollut-ed air, e.g. in cities, queues, tunnelsand during windscreen wiper opera-tion (due to the characteristic smellof alcohol).

In addition, if the compressor is onand the outside temperature is over5 °C, to prevent air polluted byexhaust gases getting inside the pas-senger compartment during stops,the system stops air recirculationwhen the car speed is lower than 6km/h. When the car speed returnsover 12 km/h, the system restoresthe previous conditions.

After using the air recirculationfunction for a long time (over 15consecutive minutes), the systemautomatically stops it for safety rea-sons, thus letting air be changed.

When air recirculation manualcontrol is set (button left led off),message FULL on the display is off.

157

158

IMPORTANT Air at a temperaturelower than that of the outside aircannot be let in to the passengercompartment when the compressoris off. Furthermore, in particularenvironmental conditions, the win-dows could mist up fast because theair is no longer dehumidified.

The setting will be stored when theengine is stopped. Either press √button again or press the AUTO but-ton to reset automatic control of thecompressor (in the latter case, themanual settings will be cancelled).The led on the √ button will go out.

IMPORTANT The air recircula-tion function will allow, according tothe system operation (i.e. heating orcooling) to reach the required condi-tions faster. We recommend notturning on this function on rainyand/or cold days as this will consid-erably increase window misting,especially if the climate control sys-tem is off.

In particular climateconditions (e.g. low out-side temperature or high

humidity) and with the inside airrecirculation automatic controlon, windows could start mistingup. In this case, press the airrecirculation button and set it toforced open position (both buttonleds off), and increase air flow tothe windscreen, if required.

Climate control systemcompressor off button (7 fig. 121)

Press the √ button, when the but-ton led is on, to switch the air condi-tioner compressor off. The led willgo off. By pressing again the buttonwhen the led is off, the system auto-matic control of the compressor acti-vation is restored; this situation isindicated by button led lighting up.

When the air conditioner compres-sor is off, if the system is no longerable to keep the requested tempera-ture, the message FULL AUTO onthe display turns off and the systemdeactivates air recirculation to pre-vent window misting up. Instead, ifthe system is still able to maintainthe requested temperature, the mes-sage FULL on the display will stayon.

159

The air let into the passenger com-partment cannot be cooled when thecompressor is off. Consequently:

– if the outside temperature islower than the set temperature, thesystem works normally and canreach and maintain the set tempera-ture also when the compressor is off;

– if the outside temperature ishigher than the set temperature, thesystem cannot reach the requiredtemperature. This will be signalledby flashing the external temperaturevalue on the display.

When the compressor is off, it ispossible to reset manually the fanspeed; on the contrary, when thecompressor is on and the engine isrunning, manual ventilation cannotbe lower than the bar indicated onthe display.

Button for fast windscreendemisting/defrosting (15 fig. 121)

Press this button: the climate con-trol system will automatically switchon all the functions required for fastwindscreen and side window demist-ing/defrosting, that is:

– climate control system compres-sor on;

– air recirculation off (if on);

– maximum air temperature (HI)on both displays;

– fan speed according to enginecoolant temperature in order to limitletting cold air into the passengercompartment for demisting the win-dows;

– air flow directed to the wind-screen and front side window vents;

– heated rear window, externalrearview mirror and windscreen noz-zle resistances on.

The fast windscreen demisting/defrosting function stays on forapprox. 3 minutes after the enginecoolant temperature exceeds 50 °C(petrol versions) or 35 °C (dieselversions).

When the fast demisting/defrostingfunction is on, the led on the relatedbutton and that on the heated rearwindow button are lighted, whileboth leds on the air recirculationbutton and that on button √ turnoff. Message FULL AUTO on thedisplay will turn off.

Only the fan speed can be adjustedand the heated rear window can beswitched off when the fast demist-ing/defrosting function is on.

Press the fast demisting/defrostingbutton again or air recirculationbutton or compressor off button toswitch the fast demisting/defrostingfunction off and reset the previoussystem operation conditions as wellas the last set function.

160

Button for demisting/defrostingthe heated rear window andexternal rearview mirrors (12 fig. 121)

Press this button to switch on theheated rear window and externalrearview mirror demisting/defrost-ing function. The led on the buttonwill come on.

The device will be automaticallyswitched off after ten minutes. Pressthe button again or stop the engineto switch the function off. It will notstart up automatically when theengine is started again.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stick-ers on the electrical filaments of theheated rear window inside part toprevent damage.

OFF button (system off)

The switch the climate control sys-tem off, keep pressed for at least twoseconds the fan button 14 (fig. 121)on the front control panel or button7 (fig. 122) on the rear controlpanel; all the fan bars on the displayturn off and the message OFF willbe displayed. The right led on the airrecirculation button will come on.

The climate control system condi-tions when the system is off are:

– air recirculation and compressoroff button leds off;

– set temperature displays off;

– air recirculation on, thus isolatingthe passenger compartment;

– climate control system compres-sor off;

– fan off.The heated rear window can be

switched on and off normally whenthe system is off.

IMPORTANT The windows maymist up fast when the climate con-trol system is off and in certain envi-ronmental conditions.

The climate control system elec-tronic control unit stores the systemsettings made before the system wasswitched off and restores them assoon as a button is pressed (with theexception of the heated rear windowbutton). The function which thebutton corresponds to will beswitched on, if it was off when thesystem was switched off. It will bekept if, on the other hand, it was onwhen the system was switched off.

Press the AUTO button to switchthe climate control system back onand ensure a totally automatic con-trol.

161

ACTIVE CARBONDUST/POLLEN FILTER

The filter has the specific capacityof combining a mechanical aircleaning action and an electrostaticeffect so that the air let into the pas-senger compartment is purified fromparticles such as dust, pollen, etc.

In addition to this function, the fil-ter efficaciously reduces the concen-tration of pollutants thanks to alayer of active carbon inside the fil-ter.

The filtering action is carried outon the air let in from outside (recir-culation off).

Have the filter checked at leastonce a year at a LanciaDealership, ideally at the begin-ning of the summer.

The efficacy of the cli-mate control system maybe considerably reduced

if the filter is not replaced.

Fan actuation is automatic and airdistribution corresponds to the latestsetting made before switching thecar off.

This function is useful especially onsummer days since it greatly reducesthe temperature inside the passengercompartment as well as the durationof the cooling cycle after car start-up, thus avoiding the accumulationof warm air in the air conditioningunit lines.

IMPORTANT Best operation ofthe fan when the car is parked isobtained by closing completely thewindows and sunroof. Furthermore,to check operation at first speed ofthe fan, disengage air vents and setair distribution from central dash-board vents only before leaving thecar.

You should have the filter checkedand if required replaced more fre-quently if the car is mainly used inpolluted or dusty areas.

VENTILATION DURING A STOP

In versions with sunroof, the rooftop features 21 photovoltaic cellssupplying a maximum power of 24W to supply the climate control sys-tem fan when the car is parked withthe roof closed or horizontally pivot-ing.

162

SUPPLEMENTARYHEATER(where provided)

The supplementary heater canwork with the engine off or on and itallows the following:

– to heat the engine coolant beforestart up

– to reduce the engine warming uptime after cold starting

– to warm up the passenger com-partment before departure

– to remove ice or condensate fromthe windows.

Using the heater in winter has thefollowing advantages:

– to reduce engine wear

– to reduce polluting emissions

– to improve comfort during dri-ving and stops

– to improve safety.

The supplementary heater functionis useful to integrate the enginecoolant warming up during drivingin order to reach and keep the opti-mal working temperature of the pas-senger compartment heater in thequickest way, especially if the cli-mate is extremely cold.

The system is composed of:

– a heating unit

– an electric pump for the enginecoolant circulation

– an exhaust pipe with muffler

– an electric pump metering thefuels

– a fuel delivery pipe

– a sensor for outside air tempera-ture.

The system is connected to the carthrough the engine cooling system,the fuel system and the electric sys-tem. The coolant coming out fromthe engine is conveyed to the heaterand made flow in the circuit by anelectric pump. The heater burner issupplied with the car fuel takendirectly from the tank by means ofan electric pulse pump and thenconveyed to the appropriate systempipe. The heater control unit sup-plies directly both electric pumps(fuel and coolant), activates andchecks the heater functions.

The supplementary heating systemworks both with the engine runningand the engine stationary. These twoconditions determine the type of sys-tem operating mode:

– when the engine is stationary thesupplementary heater can work in“programmable heater” or “parked-car heater” mode;

163

– when the engine is running thesystem works only in “supplemen-tary heater” mode.

Regardless of the operating mode,the start up procedure for the sup-plementary heater, once it has beenactivated, is the following:

1 - Fan activation for comburantair, for at least 30 seconds, to venti-late and oxygenate the combustionchamber. The fan speed is progres-sively increased until the averageoperating value is reached.

2 - After about 30 seconds, theheater control unit activates theelectric pump metering the fuel andthe comburant air fan is deactivatedfor at least 3 seconds, in order tofacilitate fuel burning. A spark plugstarts combustion inside the heater.

3 - At this point, there is a com-bustion stabilizing phase which lastsaround 15 seconds, during whichthe fan speed is kept at averagelevel.

4 - In the following 50 seconds thecontrol unit makes the fan reachnearly its highest speed.

5 - Once combustion has stabilized,the heater control unit deactivatesthe plug and the fan reaches itsmaximum speed.

6 - From now on the plug is usedby the system as a combustion andflame sensor.

7 - Regardless of the operatingmode, the heater extinction proce-dure is always based on the combus-tion chamber ventilation for about30 seconds, in order to eliminatecompletely any combustion remain-der.

IMPORTANT After switching thesystem off, both automatically ormanually, it can be switched onagain (ON) only approx. 3 minutesafter or when the CONNECT mes-sage “COOLING DOWN” disap-pears from the display.

IMPORTANT Although in a lesserquantity the heater burns fuel as theengine. Therefore, to prevent poi-soning and suffocation the supple-mentary heater shall never be turnedon, even temporarily, in confinedareas like garages and workshopsnot equipped with exhaust fans.

IMPORTANT The heater mustalways be turned off during refu-elling and at filling stations to pre-vent the risk of explosions.

IMPORTANT Do not park the carover flammable materials like paper,grass or dry leaves: risk of fire.

OPERATION WITH ENGINESTATIONARY

“Programmable heater” mode

With this operating mode, the sys-tem heats the engine coolant and thepassenger compartment beforestarting the engine, it keeps air recir-culation closed and activates air dis-tribution to the windscreen and thefloor by operating the passengercompartment fan.

164

This function can be activated withthe CONNECT (from the mainSETUP screen) or with the remotecontrol.

The system works with this mode onif the following conditions are present

– outside temperature lower than 20°C

– coolant temperature lower than 50°C

– ignition key at STOP or removed

– car battery charged

– fuel not in reserve.

When this mode is on, the heater isdeactivated when one of the followingconditions occur:

– end of planned working time

– OFF signal from the remote con-trol

– manual shutdown by the userthrough CONNECT

– ignition key at MAR

– partial battery rundown

– fuel in reserve

– malfunction detected by the heatercontrol unit.

Timed heater activation/deactivation through CONNECT

Timed heater activation and deacti-vation can be set through the CON-NECT. Select and confirm “Heater”on the main SETUP screen to displaythe parked-car heater settings.

Settings available are the following:

– Operate now

– Timer 1

– Timer 2.

To activate/deactivate the requiredfunction, select and confirm it withthe CONNECT right knob.

“Operate now”

The option “Operate now” enablesto warm the passenger compartmentwith the engine stopped and warmand the ignition key to MAR, usingthe engine coolant, heater coolant cir-culation pump, automatic air distrib-ution control (if not set manually) andclosing air recirculation. The timercannot be programmed when thisfunction is on.

To guarantee the required comfort,this function shall be mainly activatedwhen coolant is hot enough. Whencoolant temperature is lower than 50°C the control unit starts the heater,and when temperature is over 70 °C,the control unit turns the heater offand lets only the coolant circulationpump keep on working.

165

The “parked-car heater” mode isautomatically deactivated when oneof the following conditions takesplace:

– engine started

– limit time (around 30 minutes) ofheater and/or coolant pump func-tioning overcome

– turn off requested by the userthrough the CONNECT

– malfunction detected by the heatercontrol unit

– partial battery run-down or alter-nator fault.

“Timer 1” and “Timer 2”

The “Timer” options shall be usedto programme two heater daily cycles;for each cycle enter the time of acti-vation and the length of operationboth with 5 minute intervals.

Each cycle cannot last more than 60minutes. The default operation is 15minutes. The timer works regardlessof the ignition key position.

During heater operation, messagesreferred to the following conditionsare shown on CONNECT display:

– fuel level in reserve (continue any-way?)

– fuel level in reserve. Parked-carheater has been switched off

– parked-car heater not operatingbecause of cooling down

– parked-car heater not operatingbecause external temperature ishigher than 20 °C

– parked-car heater not operatingbecause motor is on

– parked-car heater has beenswitched off because of low voltage.

IMPORTANT For safety reasons,the timer must be programmed/con-firmed at any activation and con-firmed not later than 24 hours sinceprogramming. In addition, the usermust confirm every time the timer ac-tivation. The timer does not automat-ically correct standard time.

The timer can be in one of the fol-lowing conditions:

– off: in this condition the timer isprogrammable and parameters can beloaded or adjusted. Loaded parame-ters should be valued and approvedby CONNECT

– on: activated parameters approvedby CONNECT are stored in the mem-ory. The user confirms the set cyclewaiting for the programmed activa-tion moment which is indicated on theCONNECT display

– active: the heater is working in“programmable heater” mode con-trolled by the timer present on theCONNECT display. When the timeris activated, the CONNECT recordsthe system conditions

166

– stationary: with the “programma-ble heater” mode controlled by thetimer, the system conditions are con-trolled by CONNECT.

The timer is automatically deacti-vated if:

– the “programmable heater” modefunction is stopped by CONNECT if,at the timer start, the “programmableheater” mode is activated with the re-mote control

– if the user manually activates theheater during the timer operation

– if the timer is activated within 3minutes after the previous heatershutdown

– if the user manually deactivatesthe timer

– if the fuel level in the tank is lowwhen the timer is activated. This con-dition is indicated with a messagecoming from the system and the usermust confirm activation. If the userdoes not confirm activation, the timeris deactivated. The fuel level is indi-cated by the CONNECT; if this infor-mation is not available, it is taken intoconsideration the last record beforestopping the engine

– if the timer is activated when theheater operated by the remote controlis activated.

IMPORTANT If the heater is inprompt operating mode, the timer isautomatically stopped at the momentof activation. Parameters set with thetimer are stored in the memory. If thetimer has been deactivated orstopped, it should be manually reac-tivated by the user.

HEATER ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION WITH THEREMOTE CONTROL (fig. 123)

Activation/deactivation of the heatercan be operated with remote controlA.

The activation signal is issued by theremote control with a range of around600 meters and picked up by a spe-cific antenna placed on the car, thenit is transmitted to the supplementaryheater receiver and sent to CON-NECT.

IMPORTANT The maximum re-mote control range is reached on openland, while it is reduced in the pres-ence of buildings.

fig. 123

L0A

0263

b

167

This control is accepted by CON-NECT only if:

– outside temperature lower than 20°C


– the ignition key is at STOP or re-moved

– car battery charged

– sufficient fuel level

– the timer is deactivated.

Switching the heater on

To switch the heater on, press theremote control button ON for 1 or 2seconds, while keeping the antenna invertical position; the positive or un-successful activation is indicated bythe remote control red led B in the fol-lowing way:

– the led turns on for about 2 sec-onds = the signal has been correctlyreceived and the heater has been ac-tivated

– the led flashes for about 2 seconds= the signal has not been received.

In the latter case you are advised tomove before trying to activate it bypressing again the ON button.

After the confirmation activation,the led B will flash every 2 seconds forthe whole operation cycle duration.

IMPORTANT If led B turns on withgreen colour, press twice both remotecontrol buttons ON and OFF within 1second to set the red colour.

Activation length

When pressing the remote controlbutton ON the last recorded activa-tion length is always activated.

To see the recorded length, press atthe same time for three consecutivetimes within 1 second, the remotecontrol buttons ON and OFF, countthe number of flashes of led B thencompare them to those shown in thetable below, including also the firstflash appearing the third time youpress the buttons.

Default activation length is 30 min-utes but it can be changed throughthe following procedure:

– press at the same time for threeconsecutive times within 1 second, theremote control buttons ON and OFF

– count the number of flashes of ledB including also the first flash ap-pearing the third time you press but-tons ON and OFF

– press OFF to set the length suc-cessive to the set one (press OFF forseveral times to set the requiredlength in sequence)

– wait for about 10 seconds for timerstoring.

168

- the led comes on for about 2 sec-onds = the signal has been receivedcorrectly and the heater has been de-activated

- the led flashes for about 2 seconds= the signal has not been received.

In the latter case you are advised tomove before trying to deactivate it bypressing again the OFF button.

Checking and replacing thebatteries

To check the battery charge, pressON or OFF: if after about 5 secondsled B comes on with orange colour itmeans that the batteries are nearlydown and that they shall be replaced.

The batteries must be replaced withnew ones of the same type, availableat the usual sellers.

Replacing the batteriesKeep the ON and OFF buttons

pressed for about 10 seconds, until ledB turns off, to reset the 30 minutesstandard operation length.

Switching the heater off

To turn the heater off, press the re-mote control button OFF for 1 or 2seconds, while keeping the antenna invertical position; the positive or un-successful deactivation is indicate bythe remote control red led B in the fol-lowing way:

Used batteries pollute theenvironment. Dispose ofthem in the special con-

tainers as specified by current leg-islation. Keep batteries away fromopen flames and high tempera-tures. Keep away from children.

Number of flashes of led B

1

2

3

4

5

6

Heater activation length

10 minutes

20 minutes

30 minutes

40 minutes

50 minutes

60 minutes

169

OPERATIONWITH ENGINE RUNNING

“Supplementary heater” mode

This operating mode integrates theengine coolant warming up, immedi-ately after start up or during driving,to reach and keep the optimal work-ing temperature of the engine and thepassenger compartment heater in thequickest way.

This mode is activated automaticallyby the climate control unit when thefollowing conditions occur at the sametime:

– ignition key at MAR

– engine running


– the climate control unit detects(according to sensor detected temper-atures) that fast passenger compart-ment warming is required.

This mode is automatically deacti-vated when one of the following con-ditions occurs:

– coolant temperature higher than70 °C

– the heater control unit detects afault in the supplementary heater

– engine off.

The batteries must be replaced withnew ones of the same type, availableat the usual sellers.

To replace batteries:

– remove the remote control coverby pushing it in the arrow directionindicated on the cover

– remove exhausted batteries andtake note of their position

– fit the new batteries with pole (+)towards the remote control antenna

– fit down the cover.

Request for additional remotecontrols

The heater receiver will acknowl-edge up to three remote controls. Toorder new remote controls, or to re-place the original one, contact a Lan-cia Dealership.

170

CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS (fig. 124)

These come on when switch A ispressed, regardless of the position ofthe ignition key.

When these lights are on, the switchand the direction indicator warninglights on the instrument panel flash.

Press the switch again to turn thelights off.

IMPORTANT The use of hazardlights is governed by the traffic regu-lations of the country where the car isbeing driven. These laws should becomplied with.

fig. 124

L0A

0103

b

Maximum heat power

Reduced heat power

Rated voltage

Operating current

Idle current

Operating voltage

Operating temperature

Fuel consumption

Weight

Noise

about 5 kW

about 2,5 kW

12 V

45W to 13.5V; 34W to 12V

1mA (5mA with radio receiver)

10,25V ± 0,25V ÷ 15,50V ± 0,25V

- 40º C ± 2K to 70º C ± 2K

with reduced power 0,25 Kg/hwith maximum power 0,5 Kg/h

2,9 Kg

51 db.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

171

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (fig. 125)(where provided)

Press button A to switch the foglights 5 on (when the outside lightsare on).

When front fog lights are on, thewarning light 5 on the instrumentpanel turns on.

When driving, if side lights areturned off while front fog lights areon, the fog lights turn off as well andwill be lighted up again after sidelights have been turned on again.

The fog lights will be automaticallyswitched off when the ignition key isturned to STOP and will not come onagain when the engine is started un-less button A is pressed.

Press again button A to switch thelights off.

IMPORTANT The use of front foglights is governed by the Highwaycode. The front fog light system com-plies with EEC/ECE standards.

REAR fog lights (fig. 126)

These lights are switched on bypressing button A, when the dippedbeam headlights and/or front foglights are on.

When rear fog lights 4 are turnedon, panel warning light 4 will comeon.

fig. 125

L0A

0200

b

fig. 126L0

A02

01b

The rear fog lights will automaticallybe switched off when the engine isstopped or when switching off thedipped beam headlights or the frontfog lights. Press the button again toswitch the lights on after starting theengine again or switching on thedipped headlights or the front foglights.

IMPORTANT The rear fog lightsmay annoy the drivers following youwhen visibility is good. Conse-quently, use the light only when re-quired.

IMPORTANT Follow the local pre-scriptions governing the use of rearfog lights. The rear fog light systemcomplies with EEC/ECE standards.

172

INSTRUMENTDIMMER (fig. 127)

Turn ring A upwards or downwardswhen the outside lights are on to re-spectively decrease or increase instru-ment brightness.

HEATED REAR WINDOW(fig. 128)

Press button A to switch the heatedrear window on/off. The led on thebutton will come on.

The heated rear window will be au-tomatically switched off after about20 minutes.

The electrical rearview mirrordemister will also be switched on au-tomatically.

fig. 127

L0A

0202

b

fig. 128L0

A01

98b

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH ANDCIRCUIT BREAKER

The car is fitted with two safetyswitches that come into operation inthe case of an accident to block fuelsupply and power, thereby stoppingthe engine and the car electric utili-ties. It also prevents fuel spilling if thelines are broken in the accident orsparks and flashover due to electriccomponent damages.

After the crash, remember to turnthe ignition key to STOP to preventthe battery running down.

173

If, after an accident, youcan smell petrol or seethat the fuel feed system is

leaking, do not reset the switchesto avoid the risk of fire.

Mechanical connectionsof outside handles areactive only if the doors

are locked. In case the driver hasactivated the central door lockingfrom the inside and, after anaccident, the inertial switch wasnot able to activate the automaticdoor unlocking as a result of bat-tery loss or damage, it will not bepossible to reach the passengercompartment from the outside.

Anyway, door openingfrom the outside dependson their conditions after

the accident: if a door is distortedit might be impossible to open iteven if it is unlocked. In this casetry to open the other car doors.

Before resetting the fuelcut-off switch, carefullycheck for any fuel leaks or

damages to the car electric devices(e.g.: headlights).

fig. 129L0

A02

73b

If, after an accident, you cannot seeany fuel leaks or damages to the carelectric devices (e.g.: headlights) andthe car is in a fit state to continue itsjourney, reset the fuel cut-off switchand the circuit breaker according tothe following instructions.

Door unlocking in case of accident

In case of accident with activation ofthe inertial switch as a consequence,door locks are automatically unlockedto let rescuers reach the passengercompartment from the outside.

Resetting the fuel cut-off switch(fig. 129)

fig. 130

L0A

0030

b

174

Lift cover A set at the driver's leftand press button B to reset the fuelcut-off switch.

Resetting the circuit breaker

Before resetting the cir-cuit breaker, carefullycheck for any fuel leaks or

damages to the car electric devices(e.g.: headlights).

Circuit breaker is located on the leftside of the boot, inside a box directlyset and connected to the battery pos-itive terminal.

To reach the circuit breaker:

1) Open the tailgate.

2) Loosen knob A (fig. 130) and re-move the battery cover B.

3) Press tabs A (fig. 131) and re-move cover B.

4) Press button A (fig. 132) to resetthe circuit breaker.

Initialising the control units ofthe door locks, air conditionerand ESP system

After resetting the circuit breaker, torestore correct door locking, air con-ditioning and ESP system, performthe following operations:

1) Close the doors and the tailgate,fit the key into the lock of one of thefront doors and perform a door cen-tralised opening/closing cycle.

2) Start the engine and turn on thecompressor of the conditioner, settinga lower temperature value than thatof the environment and checkwhether the led on the disconnectionpush button of the conditioner com-pressor ò is lit.

3) Turn the steering wheel onefourth turn at least (the car can be atstandstill but the engine shall be run-ning) and start running the car for afew metres in a straight line until theESP warning light á is off.

fig. 131

L0A

0031

b

fig. 132L0

A03

47b

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE(EPB) (fig. 133)

The car is fitted with the EPB(Electric Parking Brake) that cuts inwhen switching the engine off andwill cut out when starting the engineand pressing the accelerator pedal(for manual gearbox versions whenreleasing the clutch pedal at thesame time). The EPB can also bedisengaged manually by pressingbutton A set on the central consolewith engine running or ignition keyto MAR.

After disengaging the EPB manual-ly, when opening the driver’s doorthe EPB will re-engage automatical-ly, press button A again to disengageit.

The button shape is rather large sothe brake can be engaged rapidly,even by the passenger, in case ofemergency.

The advantages of this system, com-pared to the usual lever, are several:

– no effort should be made toengage and disengage the parkingbrake

– the parking brake efficiency isalways at top level in any using con-dition, contrary to the lever whichguarantees the car complete stop onlywhen fully lifted

– the EPB is controlled by electricwires, therefore all problems regard-ing transmission cables, such asadjustments, freezing or tears, nolonger exist

– improved safety as a result of thesophisticated electronic control sys-tem, similar to the ABS one, prevent-ing wheels from blocking if the park-ing brake is engaged during driving

– improved safety when the car isstationary and children are leftinside the car; in this case the brakecannot be disengaged if the ignitionkey is at STOP or removed

– it has automatic functions thatother systems lack.

When the parking brake is engagedand the ignition key is at MAR, theinstrument panel warning light xturns on.

This warning light turns on whenthe parking brake reaches its highestworking level, and it turns off whenthe brake is disengaged and com-pletely released. Unlike usual park-ing brakes, whose warning lightturns on even when the lever is lift-ed a little bit, the EPB system warn-ing light turns on only when the carhas come to a complete stop.

When the brake is engaged, a typi-cal noise can be heard by the driver;the parking brake is completelyengaged or disengaged when theoperating noise stops.

fig. 133

L0A

0197

b

When engaging the park-ing brake keep the brakepedal always depressed.

175

176

Automatic engagement

The parking brake is automaticallyengaged whenever the engine isturned off and afterwards it cannotbe disengaged even if button A ispressed. Only after turning the igni-tion key to MAR it is possible to dis-engage the parking brake by press-ing the same button.

The EPB will also engage automat-ically when opening the driver’s doorwith the engine running. In this waythe car is completely safe even whenthe driver leaves it with the enginerunning (to open the gate, the garageetc.

The operation of the automatichandbrake function procedure whenthe engine stops or when the driver’sside door is open, is disabled whenthe car is running; should hence theengine be stopped or the driver’s sidedoor be opened when the car is not ata full standstill, to operate the hand-brake, it is necessary to perform theoperation manually.

Automatic disengagement

If a gear is engaged, the parkingbrake is released automaticallywhen pressing the accelerator pedaland (for manual transmission ver-sions) releasing the clutch pedal atthe same time. The control unit withbuilt-in gradient sensor, will releasethe brake gradually according to theroad slope, thus preventing jumpingor unrequired reverse movements.

This is very useful during uphillstarting: simply engage the parkingbrake (if not previously engagedautomatically as described before)and press the accelerator pedal(releasing the clutch pedal at thesame time, for manual transmissionversions) without having to gradual-ly release the lever as required withtraditional parking brakes.

IMPORTANT In certain cases, e.g.the car is approaching an obstacle, itcould be necessary to disengage theparking brake manually withoutmaking use of the automatic func-tion and to brake the car by the ser-vice brake, as it is usually done oncars equipped with the traditionalparking brake lever.

Deactivating the automatic operation

When it is required to leave the carparked with engine running andparking brake on (e.g. in car washtunnels), press button A after open-ing the driver’s door.

If it is necessary to deactivate theparking brake automatic engage-ment with the engine off in order tomove the car manually (e.g. in thegarage or in car wash tunnels), it ispossible to deactivate the relatedfunction through the CONNECTmenu. Deactivation of automaticoperation must be made with thekey at MAR and only with the carstationary. Press the SETUP key,select “Other setting”, deactivate the

In order to guarantee theautomatic operation of thehandbrake, cut off the en-

gine or open the driver’s side dooronly when the car is at a standstill.

177

“Automatic parking brake” functionand the press “OK”. Deactivation ofautomatic operation can be achievedalso in the following way:

– turn the key to STOP (the park-ing brake is engaged)

– turn the key back to MAR,depress the brake pedal and at thesame time keep button A pressed forat least 2 seconds. Warning light xflashes thrice to indicate the auto-matic operation deactivation.

When the key is turned again toSTOP the parking brake will not beengaged. The parking brake auto-matic operation will be automatical-ly restored when the key is turnedagain to MAR.

IMPORTANT If, after the parkingbrake has been disengaged, the carstarts moving at a speed higher thanthe usual manual movement, deacti-vation of the automatic mode isimmediately cancelled and the park-ing brake is engaged.

If, after the parkingbrake has been disen-gaged, the car starts mov-

ing at a speed higher than theusual manual movement, deacti-vation of the automatic mode isimmediately cancelled and theparking brake is engaged.

Proceed as follows: release theaccelerator pedal, press and keepbutton A (fig. 133) pressed for thewhole manoeuvre: the system elec-tronic control unit will come imme-diately into action with alternatebraking on/off cycles on the rearwheels (thus preventing wheel lock-ing). Braking cycles are appliedalternately on right and left wheel toguarantee roadholding, brakingcontinuity and to reduce brakingdistance.

Wheel locking could take placeunder the safety speed threshold(lower than 10 km/h).

A buzzer will sound during thewhole manoeuvre to indicate thatthe dynamic mode shall only be usedin an emergency, but this is also use-ful to warn the driver if the parkingbrake has been inadvertentlyengaged by other passengers.

Use in an emergency

In particular cases (e.g. fault in thewhole hydraulic brake system, bothservice and emergency brake), theparking brake can be used to stopthe car running (“dynamic mode”).

178

fig. 135

L0A

0275

b

fig. 134L0

A02

74b

Fault indication

The system is controlled by an elec-tronic control unit signalling possiblefailures by turning on the s! warn-ing light on the multifunction displaytogether with the message “EPBFAULT - GO TO DEALER”.

For a higher safety, every time theparking brake button is pressed dur-ing a failure, a buzzer will sound todraw the driver’s attention and thex warning light will turn on.

If the parking brake does not reachthe required working force (e.g.when the battery is partially flat),the instrument panel warning lightx starts flashing.

In case of instrument panel warn-ing light x fault, the s! warninglight on the multifunction displayturns on together with the message“EPB INDICATOR FAULT - GO TODEALER” to inform the driverabout the dangerous situation.

In case of failure indi-cated by the relatedwarning light and mes-

sage turning on, drive carefully toa Lancia Dealership because theparking brake might not work.

Emergency disengagement

The electric parking brake is fittedwith an independent battery whichcan be used to disengage the brake,for instance when the car main bat-tery is completely flat or it has bro-ken after an accident.

The additional battery, alwayskept charged by a dedicated elec-tronic control unit, can engage anddisengage the parking brake when itis necessary to push manually thecar.

To engage and disengage the elec-tric parking brake when the carmain battery is completely flat, turnthe key to MAR and press the mainbutton on the central console.

179

The car is fitted also with an emer-gency button A (fig. 134), placed inthe boot right compartment, whichcan be used to unblock the car if it hasbeen stopped on the road for a break-down or an accident and the key can-not be turned to MAR (accident withfire risk). To reach the button removethe compartment cover turning thecatch A (fig. 135) to 1 with the igni-tion key.

To disengage the parking brakethrough the emergency button pro-ceed as follows:

– press and release the main buttonon the central console

– press and release the emergencybutton in the boot

– press again and release the mainbutton on the central console.

The time elapsed between theseoperations should be lower than 30seconds.

MANUAL GEARBOXTo engage the gears, press down

the clutch and put the gear lever intoone of the positions shown in thediagram (fig. 136); the diagram isalso on the gear lever knob.

To engage reverse (R), wait for thecar to come to a standstill and liftthe ring A under the knob (with thefingers of the hand operating thelever).

Release the ring after engagingreverse gear. You do not need to liftthe ring to disengage reverse.

To change gear properlyyou must push the clutchpedal fully down. It is

therefore essential that there isnothing under the pedals: makesure mats are lying flat and donot get in the way of the pedals.

Reverse can only beengaged when the car is ata standstill. Wait for two

seconds or longer with the clutchfully pressed before engagingreverse when the engine is run-ning to prevent scraping anddamaging the gears.

Do not drive with yourhand resting on the gearstick as the force exerted,

even if only slight, could lead topremature wearing of the gear-box internal components.

fig. 136L0

A03

57b

180

ELECTRONICAUTOMATICGEARBOX(COMFORTRONIC)

The electronic automatic gearbox,besides the usual provided opera-tions, enables a manual operationsequential gear selection by shiftingthe related lever into the special sec-tor.

IMPORTANT In order to use theautomatic gearbox in the right wayit is necessary to read this paragraphfully, to learn from the very begin-ning how to perform correct opera-tions, also on the basis of the Shift-lock and Key-lock functions theautomatic gearbox is fitted with.

STARTING THE ENGINE

The engine can be started only withthe selector to P or N (fig. 137).

For safety reasons, it is advisable tostart the engine with the brake pedalpressed.

IMPORTANT At the moment ofdeparture, after starting the engine,do not press the accelerator pedalbefore and during the gear levershift. Observing this precaution isparticularly important when theengine is cold.

MOVING OFF

After starting the engine at idle andwhile keeping the brake pedalpressed (Shift-lock safety), shift thegear lever to D, or to the manualsequential operation position.Release the brake pedal and pressgradually the accelerator pedal.

IMPORTANT The lever shift fromP is possible only if the ignition keyis at MAR and the brake pedal isdepressed (Shift-lock safety).

The gear lever can be shifted freelyfrom position D to other positionswithout pressing the brake pedal,according to the diagram shown onthe mask. Only when shifting fromposition P it is necessary, for safetyreasons, to press the brake pedal tomove the lever.

fig. 137L0

A01

84b

181

Do not tax the engineuntil it has not reachedoperating temperature.

STOPPING THE CAR

To stop the car press the brakepedal, regardless of the gear leverposition.

If the brake pedal is notpressed, when the gearlever is to D or R and the

engine is running idle, even on aflat ground, the car starts moving.

The ignition key can be extractedfrom the ignition switch only whenthe gear lever is at P (Key-lock safe-ty) and the ignition key is at STOP.Letter P on the instrument paneldisplay (fig. 138) will come on for30 seconds, then it will go off.

IMPORTANT In case of emer-gency (failures, flat battery, etc.), itis possible to remove the ignition keyeven if the gear lever is not at P. Todo this, turn the key to STOP, pressbutton A (fig. 139) and at the sametime remove the key.

fig. 138L0

A02

38b

fig. 139

L0A

0178

b

182

SELECTING THE AUTOMATIC/MANUAL SEQUENTIAL OPERATION

The main characteristic of thisgearbox is the possibility to be usedin automatic mode or in manualsequential mode.

The operating mode can be select-ed by setting the gear lever to theright sector at D (automatic mode)or to the left sector at (+/-) (manualsequential mode).

On display A (fig. 140) of theinstrument panel it is possible to seethe engaged gear (1 to 5 in manualsequential mode) or the symbol D(automatic gearbox mode).

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

To activate automatic operation,move the lever to the right sector(fig. 137) to one of the followingpositions:

P - parking (the engine can bestarted)

R - reverse

N - neutral (engine can be started)

D - automatic forward gear.

IMPORTANT The lever can beshifted from position P is possibleonly with the ignition key at MARand the brake pedal pressed (Shift-lock safety).

The gear lever can be shifted freelyfrom position D to other positionswithout pressing the brake pedal,according to the diagram shown onthe mask. Only when shifting fromposition P it is necessary, for safetyreasons, to press the brake pedal tomove the lever.

fig. 140

L0A

0239

b

P - Parking

When parking the car shift the gearlever to this position. A gearboxdevice will block the driving wheels.

To avoid accidental engaging, shiftfrom position P to any other positionis possible only with the brake pedalpressed.

To bring the lever back to positionP it is not necessary to press thebrake pedal, but as a rule it is sug-gested to keep the brake pedalpressed even in this case.

IMPORTANT Shift the lever to Ponly when the car is stationary.

183

R - Reverse

Shift the lever to R with the carstationary, the engine running idleand the brake pedal pressed.

When the lever is at R backuplights turn on and a buzzer willsound for about 4 seconds to warnother people that reversing is inprogress.

IMPORTANT Even with the leverin position R, the reverse gear can-not be engaged if the car speed ishigher than the established value.When the speed is reduced, thereverse gear can be engaged and itremains engaged even if the carspeed overcomes that limit.

N - Neutral

This is the position to be used whenthe car must be pushed or towed.

D - Forward gear (automatic)

This is the position to be used whenall automatic gearbox functions arerequired.

The electronic control unit controlsthat the five gears are engaged auto-matically according to car speed,engine rpm, accelerator pedal posi-tion and pressing speed, togetherwith the main driving conditionssuch as hills, slopes, curves andbraking.

Indeed, the electronic automaticgearbox is able to choose, accordingto the type of driving adopted by thedriver, different programmes subdi-vided into comfortable driving,economy driving and sporty driving,with shift points ranging betweenlow and high.

Before leaving the car,check that the electricparking brake (EPB) is

on. Shift the lever to position Peven when the car is left with theengine running.

In case of emergency (failures, flatbattery, etc.), it is possible to shiftthe lever from position P to N, D orR by pressing lever A (fig. 141) setunder the gear lever mask. To reachthe lever, remove the press-fit odd-ment compartment shelf B in frontof the gearshift lever.

fig. 141

L0A

0276

b

184

If the accelerator pedal is pressedrapidly, the gearbox selects the sportydriving programme to meet the re-quest for a higher car performance.To disengage this function, release theaccelerator gradually.

If the accelerator pedal is pressedmore slowly, the economy programmeis automatically selected.

The electronic control unit is ableto recognize particular situationslike a curve, detected as a differentspeed of front wheel instant rotationthrough the ABS active sensors, thuspreventing shifting to the highergear until the engine revolution limitis reached. Only with this conditionor at the end of the curve will it bepossible to shift gear. This strategy isuseful to improve the car balanceand to guarantee a prompt accelera-tion when coming out of the curve,since the car has already the rightgear engaged.

Likely, during sudden braking, thelower gear is engaged to exploit theengine braking action at best. Incase of a curve, the new gear will beengaged during slowing down beforethe curve, therefore when comingout of the curve it will not be neces-sary to shift gear to accelerate.

Sporty driving on mixed roads isrecognized by the control unitbecause the accelerator pedal isreleased rapidly; if this condition isdetected, the gear selected is main-tained even if the accelerator hasbeen released, without shifting tohigher gears, in order to increase theengine efficiency for the followingacceleration.

The gear electronic control unit isable to recognize hills as a result ofthe torque signals coming from theengine on the basis of the car speed,therefore it is able to eliminate use-less gear shifts when the acceleratoris released (e.g. before cornering)and to use only those gears requiredto improve the driving comfort.

Likely, the control unit is able torecognize slopes and to preventshifting to higher gears when theaccelerator is released, in order touse the “exhaust brake” at best tothe advantage of the braking systemand the car control.

IMPORTANT The “exhaust brake”function and shifting to a lower gearduring braking is not activated whenthe ABS is operating.

A longer gear (5th) can be usedwhen the car is driving for long dis-tances with constant high speed, butlimited engine rpm, thus reducingdriving noise and fuel consumption.That is why, when a higher car per-

185

Winter programme

When starting to drive with areduced road grip (snow-covered,icy road, etc.), the shift control unitautomatically engage the “ICE” pro-gramme.

This programme allows startingwith the 2nd gear engaged, in order toimprove the gear shift efficiencyaccording to grip conditions.

“ICE” programme activation ispossible only when the gear lever isat D. If the lever is in the sequentialgear sector, the gear engaged at themoment of moving off is always thatselected by the driver.

When the “ICE” programme hasbeen activated, Kickdown is notoperating.

Kick down

When maximum acceleration isrequired (e.g. during overtaking), ifthe accelerator is rapidly and fullydepressed, lower gears are automat-ically engaged, provided the enginerpm enable this operation.

Later, when the accelerator pedalis released, the gear engaged isselected according to the type of dri-ving and the position of the acceler-ator.

Kick-down can be engaged onlywhen the gear lever is at D.

IMPORTANT It is suggested to useKick-down only when required, e.g.during overtaking, to limit the fuelconsumption.

When the engine is run-ning idle and the lever isat D, the car starts moving

even if on a flat ground: keep thebrake pedal pressed until movingoff.

formance is requested in terms ofacceleration and maximum speed,this gear is almost never selected.

The electronic automatic gearboxis fitted with a device reducinginside gearing dragging when the caris stationary and the brake pedaldepressed. The advantages of such afunction are a considerable noisereduction, with consequent vibra-tion reduction and limited fuel con-sumption.

186

MANUAL SEQUENTIAL OPERATION

To use the manual sequential oper-ation move the lever to the two-posi-tion left sector (fig. 137):

(+) = higher gear

(–) = lower gear.

Shifting to the manual sequentialsector is possible only from positionD: the gear automatically selectedwhen the lever is moved will remainengaged.

It is possible to pass to the gearmanual sequential control in anydriving condition.

To engage a higher gear, move thelever to (+) and to shift a lower gearmove the lever to (–).

IMPORTANT If gear shift gener-ates a runaway speed rate, such gearis cancelled by the electronic controlunit and the driver is warned by abuzzer and by the engaged gearflashing on the instrument panel dis-play.

When the manualsequential operation isset, gears shall be shifted

manually, as for versions with thetraditional manual gearbox. Onlywhen the car stops the gear auto-matically engaged is the first one.

If the lever is brought back to D thegearbox immediately starts to workautomatically and will be engagedaccording to the type of drivingselected.

IMPORTANT The electronic con-trol unit is programmed to shift onegear at a time, therefore rapid andrepeated actions do not correspondto rapid and repeated gear engaging.A higher or lower gear is engaged byshifting the lever to position (+) or(–) after the previous request hasbeen realized.

In case of failure of the manualsequential system, the electroniccontrol unit will select the automaticoperation.

187

Even in fault conditions it is possi-ble to move the lever to R, N and D.If the lever is in position D, the con-trol unit of the automatic gearboxwill select only certain gears, accord-ing to the type of failure detected.

In case of failure of theautomatic gearbox, takethe car immediately to a

Lancia Dealership to have thefailure eliminated.

FAILURE INDICATION

Automatic gearbox faults are indi-cated by multifunction displaywarning light t coming on withthe following messages:

– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONOIL TEMP. HIGH

– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFAULT.

Automatic transmission oil tem-perature high

This message is displayed when thegearbox oil has reached the maxi-mum preset temperature. In thiscase the electronic control unit hasan emergency programme.

Anyway, it is suggested to stop thecar, to set the lever to P or N and tokeep the engine running idle untilthe message displayed disappears.Then start driving again withouttaxing the engine.

If the message is displayed again,re-stop the car and let the enginerun idle until the message disap-pears.

If the interval between the first andsecond message appearance is lowerthan 15 minutes, stop the car, stopthe engine and wait until the engine-gearbox unit is completely cold.

Automatic transmission fault

If this message is displayed duringdriving, it means that there is a fail-ure in the automatic gearbox. In thiscase the electronic control unit hasan emergency programme.

In such conditions, stop the car andstop the engine for at least 1 minute.When the engine is restarted, theself-diagnosis system could excludethat failure, that however will bestored by the electronic control unit.

188

If the failure is signalled when theengine is started, it means that theelectronic control unit had stored itpreviously, before stopping theengine. Even in this case, go to aLancia Dealership to have theautomatic gearbox checked.

When driving with auto-matic gearbox faulty,drive carefully consider-

ing the limited car efficiency interms of acceleration and speed.In addition, when driving withautomatic gearbox faulty, thereverse block might not be oper-ating: for this reason it isabsolutely necessary to move thelever to position R while the caris moving.

SOUND SIGNAL

A buzzer will sound in the follow-ing conditions:

– for about 15 seconds when thedriver’s door is opened while theengine is running or not and the gearlever has a position different from P

– for about 15 seconds when theengine is turned off and the gearlever has a position different from P

– for about 4 seconds when thegear lever is shifted to R (reverse)

– with the manual sequential oper-ation on, when the selected gear isnot accepted by the electronic con-trol unit (e.g. since it might generatea runaway speed rate).

BUMP STARTING

Never bump starting the engine (bypushing, towing, etc.). In an emer-gency, when the battery is flat, startthe engine with the appropriateemergency battery according to theinstructions contained in chapter “Inan emergency”.

189

If these rules are notrespected, the automaticgearbox might be severely

damaged.The car can be towed only forshort distances and at a lowspeed: if it is necessary to tow itfor a longer distance, raise thedriving wheels so that the gear-box is not dragged during towing.

TOWING THE CAR

IMPORTANT To tow the carobserve local current laws and fol-low the instructions contained inchapter “In an emergency”.

If the car must be towed, observethe following precautions:

– if possible, transfer the car on atowtruck

– otherwise, tow the car by raisingthe front driving wheels

– even if the latter solution is notpossible, the car can be towed forless than 50 Km at a speed of 50km/h.

Towing shall be performed withgear lever to N.

Before starting towing,disengage the parkingbrake as described in the

relevant paragraph and leave theKeyless System CID (if any) in thepassenger’s compartment to pre-vent automatic steering lock. Donot tow the car with the enginerunning.

ESP AND ASRSYSTEMSESP SYSTEM (ELECTRONICSTABILITY PROGRAM): GENERAL

ESP is an electronic system con-trolling the car stability whichaffects the driving torque and brakesthe wheels in a different way in caseof grip loss, thus making the carrecover the right driving direction.

During driving the car is subject toside and longitudinal forces whichcan be controlled by the driver untiltire grip is acceptable. When the lat-ter is lower than the minimum level,the car starts skidding.

If the road bed is uneven (bumpyroad, presence of ice, mould, etc.)tyre grip is considerably reduced. Inthese conditions, when extrememanoeuvres are made, the car mightstart skidding.

190

If the sensors detect the conditionswhich might cause car skidding, theESP system affects the engine andthe brakes by generating a torquewhich makes the car recover theright driving direction.

The system operations,in terms of safety, shouldnot make the driver run

useless risks. The driving behav-iour must always be appropriate,according to the conditions of theroad bed, visibility and traffic.Anyway, the driver is heldresponsible for a safe driving. The ESP system helps the drivercontrol the car in case of tyre griploss, however the forces used bythe system to control the car sta-bility still depend on the gripratio between tyres and road bed.

ESP SYSTEM OPERATION

ESP is automatically started whenthe car is started and it cannot bedisengaged. On the contrary, it ispossible to exclude the ASR systemby pressing the related button on thecentral console.

The ESP main components are thefollowing:

– an electric-hydraulic control unitprocessing signals coming from thevarious sensors and choosing themost appropriate strategy by operat-ing solenoid valves and the enginecontrol unit;

– a sensor detecting the steeringwheel rotation angle;

– 4 sensors detecting the rotationspeed of each wheel;

– a sensor detecting the car rota-tion around a vertical axis;

– a sensor detecting side accelera-tion (centrifugal force).

The ESP core is a sensor, of aero-nautic origin, detecting the car rota-tions around its vertical axis.Centrifugal forces generated whenthe car is cornering are detected by ahigh-sensitive side acceleration sen-sor.

The ESP stabilizing action is basedon the signals coming from the steer-ing wheel rotation sensors, from theside acceleration sensors and thewheel speed sensors, thus recogniz-ing the driving direction selected bythe driver when turning the steeringwheel.

The control unit processes eachinformation coming from the sensorsand is able to recognize every singlemoment of the car position and tocompare it with the direction thedriver is willing to follow. In case ofdiscrepancy, the control unitinstantly selects and controls themost appropriate actions to makethe car recover the required direc-tion: it brakes with a different inten-sity one or more wheels and, if nec-essary, reduces the power suppliedby the engine. Corrections are con-

191

To make ESP, ASR andABS systems work prop-erly, the tyres must

absolutely be of the same brandand type on all wheels, in perfectconditions and, above all, of type,brand and size specified.

stantly changed and controlled inthe attempt to keep the driver’sdirection.

The ESP system considerablyincreases the car safety in severalcritical conditions and it is particu-larly useful during overtaking, whenthe grip conditions on the road bedchange.

ASR FUNCTION (ANTISLIPREGULATION)

General

The ASR function is part of theESP system and it checks the cardrive, taking action every time oneor both driving wheels slip, thus pre-venting car instability and tyre wear.

On the basis of slipping conditions,two different check systems are acti-vated:

– if slipping affects both drivingwheels, as a result of the excessiveforce transmitted, the ASR functionreduces the power supplied by theengine;

– if slipping affects only one of thedriving wheels, the ASR functionautomatically brakes the slippingwheel, with an effect similar to theself-locking differential.

The action of the ASR function isparticularly useful in the followingconditions:

– internal wheel slipping when cor-nering due to load dynamic varia-tions and excessive acceleration;

– excessive power supplied towheels according to the road bed;

– acceleration on slippery ground,covered with snow or ice;

– in case of grip loss on wet ground(aquaplaning).

ASR function activation

The ASR function is activatedautomatically whenever the engineis started.

During driving it is possible to dis-engage and engage this function bypressing button A (fig. 142) on thecentral console.

When the ASR function is on, sym-bol V is lighted on the multifunc-tion display together with the mes-sage “ASR ON”.

192

When the ASR function is off, sym-bol V is lighted on the multifunc-tion display together with the mes-sage “ASR OFF”.

The function deactivation is indi-cated by switching on of the relatedwarning light B on the button. If thisfunction is deactivated during dri-ving, it will be reactivated automat-ically at the following start up.

IMPORTANT During driving on asnow-covered ground, with snowchains on, it might be useful to deac-tivate the ASR function: in theseconditions driving wheel slipping atstart up is useful to reach higherdrive.

MSR SYSTEM(ENGINE DRIVE ADJUSTMENT)

The car is fitted with a system, partof ASR, affecting the engine torquein case of sudden gear shift, thuspreventing excessive driving wheeldragging which, in extremely lowgrip conditions, can make the carloose stability.

ESP SYSTEM ACTION

The ESP action is indicated byflashing of warning light á on theinstrument panel, to inform the dri-ver that the car is in critical stabilityand grip conditions.

ESP AND ASR FAILURE INDICATION

In case of failure, ESP and ASRsystems are automatically deactivat-ed and symbol á and message “ESPFAULT” will come on with fixedlight on the multifunction displaytogether with warning light B on theASR button.

If the failure affects only the ESPsystem, symbol á and message

“ESP FAULT” are lighted on themultifunction display, while thewarning light on button B is off andthe ASR system remains operating.

If the failure affects only the ESPsystem, symbol á and message“ESP FAULT” are lighted on themultifunction display, while thewarning light on button B is off andthe ASR system remains operating.

In case of ESP or ASR failure, thecar behaves in the same way as a carthat is not fitted with this system: inany case it is advisable to contact aLancia Dealership as soon as pos-sible.

fig. 142

L0A

0243

b

193

The following table summarizes warning light indications according to the different operating conditions.

Operating or failure conditions

Engine start up (key turned to MAR)

Driving innormalconditions

Driving inconditions whichmight lead toslipping

ASR fault

ESP fault

System condition

Warning light check

ASR onESP on

ASR offESP on

ASR activeESP active

ASR offESP active

ASR and ESP off

ASR onESP off

ASR on

ASR off manually

ASR on

ASR off manually

ASR button warning light

On for about 3 seconds

Off

On

Off

On

On

Off

ESP warning light oninstrument panel

On for about 4 seconds

Off

Off

Flashing

Flashing

On

On

INITIALISING THE ESP SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the battery is electrically connected again or it is reloaded after being completely flat or after replacing one ofthe protection fuses, to restore the correct operation of the ESP system, of the door locking, and of the air conditioning, itis necessary to perform the initialisation operations contained in the paragraph “If battery is to be disconnected” in the chap-ter “In an emergency”.

194

CRUISE CONTROL(CONSTANT SPEEDREGULATOR)

GENERAL

The electronic cruise control allowsto drive your car at the requiredspeed without pressing the accelera-tor pedal. This reduces fatigue whendriving on motorways, especiallyduring long journeys, because theset speed is automatically main-tained.

IMPORTANT The device can onlybe set to speeds exceeding 30 km/h(40 to 180 km/h for 2.4 JTD 20VCAE version).

The cruise control mustonly be used when theroad and traffic condi-

tions allow to keep a constantspeed in total safety for an ade-quately long time.

CONTROLS (fig. 143)

The cruise control is operated bymeans of switch A, ring B and but-ton C (RCL).

Switch A has two positions:

– OFF in this position, the device isoff

– ON this is the normal deviceoperating position. When the deviceis ON, symbol Ü lights up on themultifunction display, together withmessage “CRUISE CONTROL ON”.

Ring B is used to set and maintainthe car speed or to increase ordecrease the set speed.

The device is automaticallyswitched off when:

– the brake pedal is pressed

– the clutch pedal is pressed

– the gear lever is unintentionallyshifted to N.

In versions with auto-matic transmission, nevershift the lever to N when

the car is running.

fig. 143

L0A

0208

b

195

Turn ring B to position (+) to setthe speed reached or to increase thestored speed.

Turn ring B to position (–) todecrease the stored speed.

The speed will be increased ordecreased by approximately 1 km/heach time ring B is operated. Holdthe ring turned to set the speed con-tinuously. The new set speed will beautomatically kept.

Button C (RCL) allows to reset thestored speed.

IMPORTANT Turn the ignitionkey to STOP or switch A to OFF todelete the stored speed and switchthe system off.

Storing the speed

Move switch A to ON and take thecar to the required speed normally.Turn ring B to (+) for at least threeseconds and release it. The car speedwill be stored and you can nowrelease your foot from the accelera-tor.

The car will continue at the con-stant speed until one of the followingevents occur:

– the brake pedal is pressed

– the clutch pedal is pressed

– the automatic gear lever is unin-tentionally shifted to N.

IMPORTANT If required (e.g. forovertaking) you can accelerate sim-ply by pressing the accelerator. Thecar will return to the previously setspeed when the accelerator pedal isreleased.

Resetting the stored speed

To reset the stored speed afterswitching the device off, e.g. bypressing the brake or the clutch ped-als:

– accelerate progressively to reacha speed which is close to the previ-ously set speed

– engage the gear which wasengaged when the speed was set (4th,5th or 6th gear)

– press button C (RCL).

Increasing the stored speed

The stored speed can be increasedin two ways:

– by pressing the accelerator pedaland storing the new speed (turningring B for longer than three seconds)

196

or

– by momentarily turning ring B to(+): each turn of the ring will corre-spond to a small speed increase(approximately 1 km/h), while acontinuous pressure will correspondto a continuous speed increase.Release ring B: the new speed willautomatically be stored.

Reducing the stored speed

The stored speed can be decreasedin two ways:

– by switching the device off (e.g.by pressing the brake pedal) andthen storing the new speed (turningring B to (+) for longer than threeseconds)

or

– by turning ring B to (–) until thenew speed is reached. The new speedwill automatically be stored.

Deleting the stored speed

The stored speed is automaticallydeleted when:

– the engine is stopped

or

– switch A is turned to OFF.

When driving with thecruise control, do notshift the gear lever to neu-

tral. You should only switch thecruise control on when the trafficand road conditions allow this incomplete safety, i.e. straight anddry roads, motorways, fast mov-ing traffic and smooth road sur-face. Do not use the device incities or in heavy traffic.

The cruise control canbe switched on at speedshigher than 30 km/h (40

to 180 km/h for 2.4 JTD 20V CAEversion). The device can only beswitched on in 4th, 5th or 6thgear, according to car speed. Inversions with automatic trans-mission, the device must only beswitched on with the gear lever atD during automatic operationwithout shifting the lever subse-quently, or with the 3rd or 4th gearengaged during manual sequen-tial operation.When travelling down-hill thespeed may increase with respectto the stored value according tothe change in engine load.

197

RADAR CRUISECONTROL (RCC)(where provided)

GENERAL

The Radar Cruise Control (RCC)assists the driver by monitoring boththe cruise speed and the distance ofthe vehicle ahead along the runningpath: it allows to drive your car atthe required speed, without pressingthe accelerator pedal.

The system reduces fatigue whendriving on motorways, especiallyduring long journeys, since thestored speed is maintained automat-ically; moreover, the system con-tributes to keeping a safe distancefrom the vehicle ahead. Constantspeed driving also allows to cutdown fuel consumption and makestraffic smoother.

The Radar CruiseControl is not an “auto-matic pilot” but a driver-

assisting device; therefore, onlythe driver is responsible forhis/her driving behaviour andmust comply with the highwaycode regulations in force, as wellas with any other provision con-cerning road traffic.

This system detects justmoving vehicles andignores whatever immo-

bile object.

The Radar CruiseControl is not an anti-col-lision device: it cannot

detect the presence of obstacleson the road or stop the car in caseof danger. Any action performedby the driver on the brake oraccelerator pedals takes priorityover the cruise control system; forthis reason, the responsibility forroad safety always rests with thedriver.

The system is electronically con-trolled, self-contained and, there-fore, does not require communica-tion with other vehicles or the pres-ence of similar systems on the othervehicles.

The system cannot actu-ate emergency braking:the maximum decelera-

tion automatically performed bythe system is limited compared tothe actual braking power of thebrake system; therefore, emer-gency braking can and must beperformed only by the driver.

198

The Radar Cruise Controlmust only be used whenthe road and traffic condi-

tions allow to keep a constantspeed in total safety for an ade-quately long time.

IMPORTANT The system can onlybe switched on when the car speedranges from 30 to 160 km/h and isautomatically switched off by press-ing the brake pedal. If the car speedfalls below 30 km/h when the systemis on, a buzzer and a visual indicationwarn the driver to take control of carspeed again. When the car speed ex-ceeds 160 km/h after a slight acceler-ation (“override” mode), a buzzer anda visual indication will warn the dri-ver that the system is off.

IMPORTANT The Radar CruiseControl cannot be activated when thedriver has switched the ASR systemoff.

CONTROLS (fig. 144)

The Radar Cruise Control is oper-ated by three controls, as well as bythe accelerator (to increase speed)and the brake pedal (to switch thesystem off).

Controls are as follows:

– ring A to switch the system on/offand to set the distance from thevehicle ahead, depending on itsspeed

– ring B to increase/decrease theset speed

– button C to restore the storedspeed.

fig. 144

L0A

0020

b

As long as the car speed exceeds160 km/h, one of the following indi-cations will warn the driver that the

max. speed limit controlled by thesystem is exceeded.

If the road in front of car fittedwith Radar Cruise Control is free.

If a vehicle is detected in front ofthe car fitted with Radar CruiseControl.

199

Ring A has four positions:

OFF: system off

x: greatest distance from the vehi-cle ahead

x: intermediate distance from thevehicle ahead

x: shortest distance from the vehi-cle ahead.

The distance between the two vehi-cles is gradually increased as thespeed is increased, set levels beingequal.

IMPORTANT Turn the ignitionkey to STOP or ring A to OFF, todelete the stored speed and switchthe system off. To restore systemoperation, turn the ring A to OFFand repeat the setting operations.

When the system is on, that is, ringA is in any position other than OFF,symbol ú lights up on the multi-function display, together with mes-sage “RADAR CRUISE CONTROLON”. The warning light will remainon until the system is switched off byturning ring A to OFF.

Ring B is used to store the carspeed and keep it constant, or toincrease or decrease the storedspeed.

Turn ring B to (+) to store thespeed reached or increase the storedspeed.

Turn ring B to (–) to decrease thestored speed. Slowing down can alsobe obtained, when required, bybraking system automatic operation.

Every time ring B is turned, thespeed is increased or decreased byabout 1 km/h. By keeping the ringrotated, the stored speed will changecontinuously at intervals of 10km/h. The new speed reached willbe maintained automatically.

When ring B is turned, the car’sactual speed is considered as refer-ence speed (cruise speed). Thisspeed can automatically decreasedepending on traffic conditions, andthe system can shift from the speedcontrol condition to the distancecontrol condition. The driver isinformed of the system’s operatingcondition by the instrument paneldisplay.

Button C (RCL) allows to reset thestored speed. In fact, when drivingthe car with the system on, the dri-ver can switch the system off by sim-ply braking. In this case, the cruisespeed previously set is kept in thememory and can be enabled again atany time by pressing button RCL.

200

Storing the speed

Move ring A to any position otherthan OFF and take the car to therequired speed.

Turn ring B to (+), then release it.The car speed will be stored andshown on the instrument panel dis-play; now, the accelerator pedal canbe released.

The car will continue at the con-stant speed until one of the followingevents occur:

– the brake pedal is pressed– presence of a vehicle running

ahead more slowly along the run-ning path, in the same runningdirection.

IMPORTANT If required (e.g. forovertaking) you can accelerate sim-ply by pressing the accelerator. Thecar will return to the previously setspeed when the accelerator pedal isreleased. If 160 km/h speed isexceeded, restore the stored speed bypressing C (RCL).

Resetting the stored speed

If the system has been switched offby pressing the brake pedal, thestored speed can be resumed bypressing button C (RCL).

Increasing the stored speed

The stored speed can be increasedin two ways:

– by pressing the accelerator andstoring the new speed (turning ringB to (+)

or

– by temporarily turning ring B to(+): each turn of the ring will corre-spond to a 10 km/h speed increase,while a continuous pressure will cor-respond to a continuous speedincrease at intervals of 10 km/h.Release ring B: the new speed willautomatically be stored.

The new set speed will be shown onthe display in place of the previousone.

Reducing the stored speed

The stored speed can be decreasedin two ways:

– by switching the device off (e.g.by pressing the brake pedal) andthen storing the new speed (turningring B to (+)

or

– by turning ring B to (-) until thenew speed is reached. The new speedwill automatically be stored.

The new set speed will be shown onthe display in place of the previousone.

201

Deleting the stored speed

The stored speed is automaticallydeleted when:

– the engine is stopped

– ring A is turned to OFF.

When the system is switched off,any information shown on theinstrument panel display will bedeleted.

Maintaining speed and distance

The system will maintain thestored speed when no vehicle isdetected along the running path. If,on the contrary, a vehicle is detectedwhich runs at a low speed, the sys-tem will automatically perform theoperations (acceleration, decelera-tion or slight braking) required tokeep the set distance from the vehi-cle ahead.

The maximum decelera-tion performed by the sys-tem automatically is lim-

ited compared to the actual brak-ing power of the brake system;therefore, emergency braking canand must be performed only bythe driver. A buzzer will warn thedriver that the brakes shall beapplied.

Detecting a vehicle with thesystem active but not switched on

When the system is active (ring Aset to any position other than OFF),it can detect the presence of a vehi-cle only after it has been switched onat least once (by turning ring B to(+).

Subsequently, the presence of arunning vehicle will always be indi-cated, even when the system is off,until deactivating the system (ring Aset to OFF).

Pressing the brake pedal willswitch the system off, whereas it willalways be possible to accelerate, (e.gfor overtaking), without switchingthe system off; the system will auto-matically bring the car back to thestored speed when the acceleratorpedal is released (provided that 160km/h speed has not been exceeded).

The multifunction display gives tothe driver concise information on thestored speed, the presence of a run-ning vehicle (if any) and the set dis-tance.

202

Detecting a vehicle with thesystem switched on

When the system is switched on byturning ring B to (+),any vehicle run-ning in front of the car (within 130metres) and along the running pathwill be signalled to the driver on theinstrument panel display, with the fol-lowing icon:

set distancex

set distancex

set distance x

This icons indicate the engagementof speed and distance control with de-tection of a running vehicle along therunning path, “picked” by the system.The three different icons indicate thethree distance levels the driver can se-lect.

When the external temperature isless than 3 °C, the system will auto-matically be set to maintain a greaterdistance from the vehicle ahead, re-gardless of the distance set.

If the system is temporarily switchedoff by pressing the accelerator pedal,the stored speed will flash on the in-strument panel and the distance con-trol icon will disappear (if shown onthe instrument panel display). The

icon (if any) indicating the vehicle de-tected on the traffic lane will, on thecontrary, remain visible.

With system active and car speed ex-ceeding 80 km/h, switching the leftdirection indicators on to signal over-taking will cause the distance fromthe vehicle ahead (already “picked”)to be automatically decreased in or-der to facilitate the manoeuvre. If thedriver does not overtake within a fewseconds, the car will return to the setdistance.

If the Radar Cruise Control is activeand the braking power enabled forthe function does not ensure themaintenance of the set distance fromthe vehicle ahead, a sound and visualsignal (together with message“BRAKE SAFETY” shown on the

multifunction display) warn the dri-ver and invite him to resume speedcontrol.

IMPORTANT If the Radar CruiseControl is active and the speed of thevehicle ahead falls below 30 km/h, asound signal with message “RADARCRUISE CONTROL NOT ACTI-VATED” on the multifunction displaywarn the driver to resume speed con-trol

Therefore, the Radar Cruise Controldoes not ensure control when you aredriving in a queue; the driver musttherefore halt the car and start it offafter stopping in a queue, and hemust also switch on the speed controlfunction every time

IMPORTANT NOTESCONCERNING THE RADARCRUISE CONTROL

When driving with the Radar CruiseControl on, its regular operation couldbe affected by certain situations.

The system operation could be in-fluenced in the following cases:

If the vehicle picked by the car fit-ted with Radar Cruise Control leavesthe radar sensor detection range, thesystem could no longer be able to de-tect it and therefore it will speed upthe car or pick another vehicle run-ning ahead (fig. 145).

If a vehicle enters the area betweenthe car fitted with Radar Cruise Con-trol and the picked vehicle (fig. 146),the system could not be able to con-trol braking and it will therefore warnthe driver to take control of the car.

203

fig. 145L0

A03

48b

fig. 146

L0A

0349

b

204

If a vehicle enters the same runningpath as that of the car fitted withRadar Cruise Control and sets tooclose to it (fig. 147), the system couldnot be able to detect it.

If two heavy-duty vehicles (e.g.:trucks) overtake at low speed (fig.148), the car fitted with Radar CruiseControl could temporarily detect theroad as free.

When entering or leaving a curve(fig. 149), a vehicle running aheadcould temporarily get out of the radardetection range, or another vehiclerunning in the adjacent lane could bedetected.

When cornering (average-sharpcurve), any vehicle picked by theRadar Cruise Control could get out ofthe radar detection range (fig. 150)thus missing "picking".

At a slip-road (fig. 151-152), if fol-lowing a vehicle running at a speedlower than that set on the car fittedwith Radar Cruise Control, whenchanging lane the path will result freeand therefore the system will acceler-ate to restore the set speed.

fig. 147

L0A

0350

b

fig. 149L0

A03

52b

fig. 148

L0A

0351

b

fig. 150

L0A

0353

b

fig. 151

L0A

0354

b

205

When reaching a steep cat's back(fig. 153), the picked vehicle couldget out of the radar detection range(thus missing "picking").

The Radar Cruise Controlfeatures proper strategiesto keep adequate comfort

level when travelling on a roadwith curves, e.g.: reducing thecruising speed if required. TheRadar Cruise Control howevercannot detect the road turn; thedriver is therefore the only re-sponsible for adjusting the carspeed to curves, slip-road orsharp-curves, not necessarily onhighway sections.

Whenever the picked ve-hicle gets out of the radardetection range, the car

will accelerate to return to the setcruising speed.

FAULT INDICATION

System anomalies are signalled bythe lighting of symbol à on the mul-tifunction display, together with mes-sage “RADAR CRUISE CONTROLFAULT”. The fault indication re-mains on even when system ring A isturned to OFF.

Whatever the system's fault, theRadar Cruise Control is fully switchedoff.

fig. 152

L0A

0355

b

fig. 153

L0A

0356

b

206

The driver will be warned by a spe-cial display message when the systemis deactivated because the lens isdirty.

In this case, clean the sensor protec-tion lens, shown in fig. 150 with a wetcloth; do not use dry, rough or hardcloths. Should the dirty lens messagestay on after cleaning, contact a Lan-cia Dealership.

If the Radar Cruise Con-trol went off due to exces-sive lens dirt, when

restarting the car a few km shallbe covered before switching thesystem on again in order to let thesystem check if previous condi-tions (causing Radar Cruise Con-trol turn off) have been removed.

The sensor is built intothe front bumper: impactscan therefore damage it.

IMPORTANT Failure to one of thesafety systems connected to the RadarCruise Control (ABS or ESP system)will cause Radar Cruise Control fail-ure indication.

The Radar Cruise Controlshould be switched ononly when road and traffic

conditions allow the driver to drivesafely, that is, when the road isstraight and the surface is not slip-pery, when the car is driven on afreeway or motorway, and whentraffic flows smoothly. Do not usethe device when driving in urbanareas or when traffic is heavy.

fig. 154

L0A

0330

b

207

Do not use the RadarCruise Control under poorvisibility conditions (e.g.:

fog, heavy rain, snow, etc.), sincethe system performance could bebadly affected.

IMPORTANT As you approach abend, it may be necessary to reducethe stored speed or switch the systemoff by pressing the brake pedal.

The brake pedal is oper-ated by the Radar CruiseControl system: do not po-

sition your foot under the brakepedal.

IMPORTANT The Radar CruiseControl can only be switched on whenthe car speed ranges from 30 and 160km/h. The Radar Cruise Control isautomatically switched off when anyof the ABS, ASR, MSR and ESP sys-tems comes into operation. Moreover,it is switched off when engaging re-verse gear, neutral or the electronicparking brake (EPB).

IMPORTANT The Radar CruiseControl cannot be activated when thedriver has switched the ASR systemoff.

In the device is faulty ordoes not work, turn ring Ato OFF and contact a Lan-

cia Dealership

IMPORTANT Ring A can be con-stantly left in a position other thanOFF without damaging the RadarCruise Control. The device shouldhowever be switched off when not inuse by turning ring A to OFF to pre-vent storing speeds accidentally.

PARKING SENSORThe parking sensor provides dis-

tance information to the driver whenthe car moves near obstacles placedin front of and behind it.

The information on the presenceand distance of obstacles is sent tothe driver by means of sound sig-nals, the frequency of whichdepends on the obstacle distance.

By integrating the direct visualinformation with the sound signalemitted by the system, the driver cantherefore avoid possible collisions.

208

The responsibility forparking manoeuvres andother dangerous manoeu-

vres always rests with the driver.When performing such manoeu-vres, always make sure that nopersons or animals stand in thearea where the car is to beparked. The parking assist sys-tem should be considered as anaid to the driver; in any case,greatest attention must be paidwhen performing dangerousmanoeuvres, even at low speed.

The system front and rear sensorsare activated automatically whenengaging reverse with the ignitionkey at MAR. Disengaging thereverse gear will turn the rear sen-sors off; front sensors will stay onuntil 15 km/h speed is exceeded toallow concluding the parkingmanoeuvre.

Front sensors can be switched onby pressing button A (fig. 155)placed on the central console infront of the gear lever; when thefront sensors are on, warning lightB lights up on the button. Toswitch the sensors off, press buttonA again.

When the sensors are on, the sys-tem starts sending out sound sig-nals from the front or rear buzzersas soon as an obstacle is detected;the signal frequency increases asthe obstacle gets nearer. When theobstacle is at a distance of less than30 cm, a continuous sound is emit-ted. Depending on the position ofthe obstacle (in front or behind),the sound will be emitted from thecorresponding buzzer (front orrear). The sound signal will imme-diately stop if the distance from theobstacles increases. The tone cycleremains the same if the distancemeasured by the central sensorsdoes not change; however, if thiscondition occurs with side sensors,the signal will be interrupted afterabout 3 seconds, to avoid, forinstance, sending out signals incase of parking manoeuvres alongwalls.fig. 155

L0A

0016

b

SENSORS

The system detecting the distancefrom obstacles uses 4 sensors housedin the front bumper (fig. 156) and 4sensors housed in the rear bumper(fig. 157).

To ensure proper opera-tion of the parking assistsystem, it is essential that

the sensors placed on bumpersare always free from mud, dirt,snow or ice.

When cleaning the sen-sors, take the greatestcare not to scratch or

damage them; to this regard, donot use dry, rough or hard cloths.Sensors must be washed withclean water, to which car sham-poo can be added, if necessary. Incar-wash stations that use high-pressure or steam-jet hydrauliccleaning machines, clean the sen-sors fast by keeping the nozzle ata distance of at least 10 cm.

fig. 156

L0A

6019

b

fig. 157L0

A60

20b

When the bumper needsre-painting or the sensorarea needs touching-up

with paint, contact a LanciaDealership only. Incorrect appli-cation of paint could adverselyaffect the parking sensor opera-tion.

209

210

fig. 158

LOA

6021

b

Sensor operating rangeThe sensors allow the system to

monitor the car’s front and rearparts.

Their position covers the middleand side areas of the car’s front andback (fig. 158).

Obstacles placed in the middle areaare detected at a distance of lessthan approx. 0.9 m (front) and 1.50m (rear).

211

Obstacles placed in side areas aredetected at a distance of less than0.6 m.

Rear sensors are automaticallyswitched on by removing the trailercable plug.

FAULT INDICATIONS

The system control unit checks allthe system components every timethe ignition key is turned to MAR.Then, the sensors and their respec-tive electrical connections are con-stantly monitored during systemoperation.

Parking assist system faults are sig-nalled by the lighting of symbol ton the multifunction display, togeth-er with message “PARKING SEN-SOR FAULT”.

In case of fault signals, stop thecar, shut the engine off, then try toclean the sensors, making sure thatyou are not close to ultrasound-emitting sources (e.g. truck airbrakes or pneumatic hammers). Ifthe cause of the operation anomalyhas been remedied, the system fullyresumes its functions and the faultsymbol on the multifunction displaygoes out, together with its respectivewarning message.

Rear sensors are auto-matically switched offwhen the trailer’s electric

cable plug is inserted into the cartow hitch socket.

TOWING A TRAILER

212

If, on the contrary, the warninglamp remains on, go to a LanciaDealership to have the systemchecked even if the system keeps onworking. In fact, if the fault detectedby the control unit does not affectthe operation of the system, the lat-ter keeps on working and the mal-function is stored in the memory soas to be detected by the LanciaDealership during a subsequentcheck.

GENERAL NOTES

When parking your car, always paythe greatest attention to the obsta-cles that could be situated above orbelow the sensors. In fact, objectssituated at close range in the car’sfront or rear parts could, under cer-tain circumstances, not be detectedby the system and, therefore, dam-age your car or be damaged them-selves.

Moreover, signals sent by the sen-sors can be altered by damaged sen-sors, by accumulation of dirt, snowor ice on the sensors, or by ultra-sound systems (e.g. truck air brakesor pneumatic hammers) being oper-ated nearby.

INTERIOREQUIPMENT

FRONT CEILING LIGHT (fig. 159)

This ceiling light includes a centrallight and two courtesy lights.

To switch the central light on man-ually, press button A; to switch itoff, press the same button again.The light will light up and go outgradually. If the ceiling light hasbeen switched on by means of thebutton, it will automatically go outafter about 15 minutes after theengine has been shut off (by turningkey to STOP).

fig. 159

L0A

0098

b

213

To switch the courtesy lights onand off, press the respective buttonsB. The courtesy lights will automat-ically go out after about 15 minutesafter shutting the engine off (byturning the key to STOP).

The central ceiling light will switchon automatically, together with therear ceiling light, when a door isopened. The ceiling lights will go outafter about 3 minutes if one or sever-al doors remain open or if the doorsare closed beforehand, after about 10seconds after the last door has beenclosed or at doors locking.

If a door is left open, the ceilinglights will automatically go outafter about 3 minutes. To switchthem on again, it is enough to openand close a door.

Ceiling lights come on (for about 10seconds) when removing the ignitionkey (knob to STOP on cars fittedwith Keyless System) and operatingthe central door opening with theremote control.

In case of collision with actuationof the inertial switch, the ceilinglights will automatically light up forabout 15 minutes.

REAR CEILING LIGHT (fig. 160)

This ceiling light includes a centrallight and two courtesy lights.

The central light will switch on andoff gradually, together with the frontceiling light.

To switch the central light on man-ually, press button A; to switch itoff, press the same button again.

To switch the courtesy lights onand off, press the respective buttonsB. The courtesy lights will automat-ically go out after about 15 minutesafter the engine has been shut off(by turning the key to STOP).

DOOR PUDDLE LIGHTS(fig. 161)

A light is provided in the lower partof the door panel, to illuminate thearea through which passengers getinto and out of the car.

This light will automatically lightup when the door is opened, regard-less of the ignition key position.

With the door open, the light stayson for about 3 minutes, then it goesoff automatically.

fig. 160L0

A02

79b

fig. 161

L0A

0214

b

214

REARVIEW MIRROR LIGHTS(fig. 162)

The lower part of the externalrearview mirrors incorporate a lightto illuminate the area through whichpassengers get into and out of thecar.

This light will automatically switchon, for about 3 minutes, when thedoor is opened or when the door lockis released by means of the remotecontrol.

SUN VISORS (fig. 163)

The sun visors can swing up ordown or be pivoted sideways.

Release the visors from hooks A tomove them sideways.

COURTESY MIRRORS (fig. 164)

They are fitted on the back of thesun visors: they can be accessed byrotating the visors and lifting thecover A.

The mirrors are fitted with lightsthat will come on automaticallywhen lifting the cover and will goout when lowering it again or auto-matically after 15 minutes afterswitching the engine off (ignitionkey at STOP).

fig. 162

L0A

0195

b

fig. 163L0

A01

92b

fig. 164

L0A

0193

b

215

FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGARLIGHTER

The ashtray and cigar lighter areprotected by a single flap. Press theflap in the point shown (fig. 165).

Press button A (fig. 166) to workthe cigar lighter. After a few secondsit will return to its initial positionand be ready for use.

The cigar lighter will only workwhen the ignition key is at MAR.

Remove tray B to empty the ash-tray.

Always verify that thecigar lighter has beenswitched off.

The cigar lighter getsvery hot. Be careful howyou handle it and make

sure it is not used by children:danger of fire or burns.

REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 167)

Two ashtrays are provided for rearseats: they are incorporated into reardoor panels.

To open the ashtray, press on thepoint specified by the arrow.

To empty the ashtray, remove trayA.

fig. 165

L0A

0189

b

fig. 166L0

A01

88b

fig. 167

L0A

0053

b

216

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

A glove compartment with light islocated on the dashboard. The com-partment has a flap and lock.

To open the glove compartment,press button A (fig. 168); the buttonworks only when the key is at MARand for about 1 minute after remov-ing the key or turning it to STOP.

Glove compartment opening can bedisabled and enabled again bymeans of the CONNECT menu.

When the glove compartment isopened, ceiling light A (fig. 169) willlight up. The ceiling light can beswitched off by closing the compart-ment, or automatically, after about15 minutes after shutting the engineoff (turning the key to STOP).

The lower part of the glove com-partment houses the Compact Discplayer B (CD-changer, where fitted)and, on certain versions, the powersocket C.

IMPORTANT To use the powersocket, read the instructions of therelevant paragraph in this chapter.

Always close the glovecompartment when thecar is running: it could

hurt the passenger in the event ofan accident.

ODDMENT COMPARTMENT (fig. 170)

A pivoting oddment compartmentis incorporated on the left side of thedashboard. To open the compart-ment, press on point A, then releaseit.

To close the compartment again,push it into its seat.

Do not drive with thecompartment open: itcould hurt you in the

event of an accident.

fig. 168

L0A

0191

b

fig. 169L0

A03

25b

fig. 170

L0A

0190

b

217

FRONT BOTTLE/CAN HOLDER(fig. 171)

It is incorporated into the frontpart of the central console.

To open the holder, press on pointA then release it: the bottle/canholder will automatically open.

To close it, push cover B into itsseat.

CLIMATE-CONTROLLEDDRINK COMPARTMENT

The front armrest incorporates aclimate-controlled drink compart-ment (fig. 172) fitted with a light,which receives air directly from theclimate control system.

This compartment allows drinks tobe kept as long as possible at thetemperature they had when theywere put inside the compartment.

The compartment can be accessedby lifting armrest A (fig. 173) bypulling it from handgrip B.

To open the compartment air vent,lift control A (fig. 173). To close thevent, lower control A.

To close the compartment, lowerthe armrest until it is locked; tolower it further, press handgrip C.

IMPORTANT This compartmentis not a fridge or a drink warmer; itis used to maintain the temperatureof the drinks put inside it. For thisreason, the drinks must be warmedor cooled before being put inside thecompartment.

fig. 171

L0A

0186

b

fig. 172L0

A02

51b

fig. 173

L0A

0169

b

218

Take care not to spill thedrinks. In any case, thecompartment is provided

with a hole on its bottom, throughwhich any spilled liquid can bedischarged.

ODDMENT COMPARTMENT ONTHE DASHBOARD (fig. 174)

Oddment compartment A is placedin front of the gear lever.

DOOR POCKETS

Door pockets are located on thedoor panels:

– A (fig. 175) on front door panels

– B (fig. 176) on rear door panels.

fig. 174L0

A01

82b

fig. 176

L0A

0212

b

fig. 175

L0A

0194

b

219

REAR BOTTLE/CAN HOLDER(fig. 178)

Bottle/can holder A is incorporatedin the rear armrest.

To open it, press on the point spec-ified by the arrow, then release it:the bottle/can holder will automati-cally open.

To close the bottle/can holder,push it into its seat.

REAR ARMREST COMPARTMENT

Inside the rear armrest is an odd-ment compartment A (fig. 179), acard holder B and a power socket C.

Depending on versions, the armrestcan also include:

– the control buttons for heating,massage, lumbar adjustment and foradaptation of rear side seats

– the button to shift the front pas-senger’s seat

– the button to actuate the electricwindow shades

fig. 178L0

A00

73b

fig. 179

L0A

0075

b

fig. 177

L0A

0252

b

CENTRAL CONSOLE COMPARTMENT (fig. 177)

Versions with automatic, two-zoneclimate control system are providedwith an oddment compartment A,placed on the rear part of the centralconsole.

220

POWER SOCKET

It is located inside the rear armrest.

The power socket can be accessedby lifting the armrest from handgripA (fig. 180). To close the compart-ment, lower the armrest.

To use the socket, lift cover C(fig. 179).

Certain versions are fitted with apower socket inside the glove com-partment.

The socket is powered when thekey is turned to MAR. It can be usedonly for accessories with a maximumintake of 15A (power 180W).

ELECTRIC SUNSHADE (fig. 181)

The electric sunshade works withignition key at MAR.

The buttons for operating it arelocated on the central console, nearthe gearshift lever and inside therear armrest.

To operate the electric sunshadefrom the front seats: press button Ato open it and button B to close it.

To operate the electric sunshadefrom the rear seats: press the frontpart of button C to open it and pressthe rear part to close it.

Do not use the socket forpower devices with ahigher intake than that

shown.Prolonged current intake can

drain the battery and lead toproblems when starting theengine.

– the power socket

– the remote control used for theCONNECT HI-FI and TV functions

– the additional phone handset.

IMPORTANT To use the powersocket, read the instructions of therelevant paragraph in this chapter.

The compartment can be accessedby lifting the armrest from handgripA (fig. 180).

To close the compartment, lowerthe armrest.

fig. 180

L0A

0074

b

fig. 181

L0A

0280

b

221

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Electric/electronic devices installedafter buying the car or in aftermarketshall bear the and marking:

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the in-stallation of transceivers provided thatinstallation is carried out at a special-ized shop, workmanlike performedand in compliance with manufac-turer's specifications.

IMPORTANT Installation of devicesresulting in modifications of car char-acteristics may cause driving licenseseizing by traffic agents and also thelapse of the warranty as concerns de-fects due to the abovementioned mod-ification or traceable back to it di-rectly or indirectly.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all respon-sibility for damages caused by the in-stallation of non-genuine accessoriesor not recommended by Fiat AutoS.p.A. and installed not in compliancewith the specified requirements.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BYTHE USER

If after buying the car, you decideto install electrical accessories thatrequire a permanent power supply(e.g. satellite antitheft device), orany other accessory that burden theelectric supply, contact your LanciaDealership whose qualified person-nel, besides suggesting the most suit-able devices belonging to theLineaccessori Lancia, will also eval-uate the total electrical absorption,checking whether the car’s electricsystem is able to withstand therequired load or whether it must beintegrated with a more powerfulbattery.

fig. 182

L0A

0147

b

fig. 183L0

A02

22b

Before actuating thesunshade, make sure thatno object is placed on the

rear parcel shelf.

MAP POCKETS (fig. 182)(where provided)

Paper pockets are located on theback of the front seats.

HANDLES (fig. 183)

They are placed just next to thedoors.

Each rear handle includes a clotheshook A.

222

SOLAR CELLOPERATED SUNROOF

The sunroof is electrically con-trolled and its operation is possibleonly with the ignition key at MAR.The sunroof can slide lenghtwise,with various opening positions, untilit fully retracts into the special hous-ing, or can lift at the front (by pivot-ing) to allow passenger compart-ment aeration.

The upper part of the sunroofincorporates a set of solar cells thatfeed the climate control system fanat first speed when the car is parkedto reduce the temperature inside thepassenger compartment.


The sunroof is equipped with ananti-trap safety system, which con-trols the closing lenghtwise sliding aswell as pivoting.

The electronic control unit thatcontrols the system is able to detectthe presence of obstacles when theroof is closing or pivoting at the rear;in this case, the system will interruptthe sunroof travel and immediatelyreverse it for a short stretch.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS ANDCELLULAR TELEPHONES

Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.:e-tacs mobile phones, HAM radiosystems and the like) shall not beused inside the car unless a separateaerial is mounted outside the car.

The use of these devices inside thepassenger compartment (withoutexternal aerial) may cause electricalsystems equipping the car to mal-function. This could compromise carsafety in addition to constituting apotential hazard for the passengers.

In addition, transmission andreception of these devices may beaffected by the shielding effect of thecar body.

As concerns the use of mobilephones (GSM, GPRS, UMTS) pro-vided with official EC approval,strictly comply with the instructionsgiven by the mobile phone manufac-turer.

223

The sunroof must not beopened in the presence ofsnow or ice; otherwise, it

could be damaged.

IMPORTANT On versions fittedwith the Keyless System, do not laythe CID device outside the car on thesunroof, to avoid a fake identifica-tion of the CID itself as if inside thecar.

SUNROOF OPENING/CLOSINGAND PIVOTING

All the sunroof functions (opening,closing and rear pivoting) are con-trolled by selector A (fig. 184).

Six positions for lenghtwise open-ing and three for pivoting are pro-vided (fig. 185).

After rotating the selector, the sun-roof will move and stop automatical-ly in the required position.

When the sunroof is opened, adeflector A (fig. 186) will automati-cally lift in the front part, whichdeviates the air flow.

fig. 184

L0A

0281

b

fig. 186

L0A

0282

b

fig. 185L0

A02

84b

Improper use of the sun-roof can in any case bedangerous, even if the

anti-trap safety system is avail-able. Before and during sunroofactuation, make sure that pas-sengers are not exposed to therisk of injuries caused by themoving roof or by objects pulledor hit by the roof itself. Alwaysremove the ignition key when youleave your car, to prevent thesunroof from being unintention-ally actuated, which could bedangerous for the passengersinside the car.

224

After battery disconnec-tion or fuse interruption,the anti-trap system must

be initialized again as follows:1) turn selector A clockwise and

fully to its stop, to position 3 cor-responding to maximum pivoting(fig. 184)

2) keep selector A depresseduntil the sunroof jolts along to themaximum pivoting position

3) release the selector after thesunroof has stopped for at least 2seconds

4) press, within 5 seconds, theselector again and keep itdepressed

5) the sunroof will start movingwithin 5 further seconds and willperform a complete opening andclosing cycle, after which it willstop in the closed position

6) release the selector after thesunroof has stopped for at least 2seconds.

The system is thus initializedand resumes its normal opera-tion. If this does not occur, con-tact your Lancia Dealership.

If the operation is interruptedbefore it is completed, repeat theprocedure from the start.

Regularly check that thewater draining holes A(fig. 187 set at the corners

of the sunroof housing, are notobstructed.

fig. 187

L0A

0283

b

225

CENTRAL SUNROOF AND WINDOW LOCKING SYSTEM

Central locking/opening of sunroofand windows can be actuated at thefollowing conditions:

– ignition key removed

– all doors closed correctly.

To actuate central locking bymeans of the remote control, keepbutton B (fig. 188) depressed formore than 3 seconds after closingthe doors: the sunroof and windowwinders will be actuated until theyare completely closed or the buttonis released.

To actuate central locking bymeans of the remote control, keepbutton A (fig. 188) depressed formore than 3 seconds after openingthe doors: the sunroof and windowswinders will be actuated until theyare completely open or the button isreleased.

This function can be used beforegetting into the car when it has beenparked in the sun, in order to aeratethe passenger compartment.

Central locking can also be actuat-ed by turning the key in the lock ofone of the front doors: keep the keyturned to 2 (fig. 189) for more than3 seconds. The sunroof and windowwinders are actuated until they arecompletely closed or the key isreleased.

By keeping the key turned to 1(fig. 189) for more than 3 seconds,both the sunroof and all the win-dows will open. The sunroof andwindow winders are actuated untilthey are completely open or the keyis released.

fig. 188L0

A01

74b

fig. 189

L0A

6099

b

226

SOLAR CELLS

The upper part of the sunroofincorporates 21 solar cells that pro-duce a maximum power of 24 W tofeed the climate control system fan,when the car is parked with the sun-roof closed or in pivoting position.

Fan actuation is automatic and airdistribution corresponds to the latestsetting made before switching thecar off.

This function is useful especially onsummer days, since it greatlyreduces the temperature inside thepassenger compartment as well asthe duration of the cooling cycleafter car start-up, thus avoiding theaccumulation of warm air in the air-conditioning unit lines.

In winter, the ventilation functionreduces dampness inside the passen-ger compartment.

EMERGENCY MANOEUVRE

In case the electric actuation devicefails to operate, the sunroof can beactuated manually, proceeding asfollows:

1) Take the Allen screw wrench D(fig. 191) out of the tool kit and useit to actuate the sunroof in an emer-gency.

2) Remove front ceiling light capsA and B (fig. 190) by levering witha screwdriver on the outer side (thecaps are press-fitted).

3) Take out screws C (fig. 191)and remove the ceiling light byreleasing it from the front clamps.

IMPORTANT Do not disconnectthe ceiling light connectors.

4) Insert the Allen screw wrench Dinto the hexagonal seat of the sun-roof starter motor, then turn it:

– clockwise to open the sunroof

– counterclockwise to close thesunroof.

5) After completing the closing oropening operation, put the ceilinglight back to its place by fitting inthe front clamps first and then fixingthe rear screws.

IMPORTANT When refitting theceiling light, check that the electriccables are positioned correctly.

6) Press-fit the screw cover caps.

fig. 190L0

A01

29b

fig. 191

L0A

0329

b

227

BOOTThe boot can be opened both from

the outside and the inside of the car.

IMPORTANT Faulty closing of theboot is signalled by the lighting ofthe relevant symbol on the multi-function display, together with mes-sage “BOOT OPEN”

With the battery flat, orafter the interruption ofone of the protection

fuses, or if you want to disconnecta loaded battery (e.g. for a carstop period), before opening theluggage compartment bonnetcarefully read and comply withthe instructions contained in theparagraph “If battery is to be dis-connected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

OPENING FROM THE INSIDE

Boot tailgate is opened electrically.It can be opened only when the igni-tion key is at MAR and the car isstopped, or for 3 minutes after turn-ing the key to STOP without open-ing or closing a door.

To open the boot, press button A(fig. 192), placed on the central con-sole, as follows:

– a short pressure of the button willrelease the boot lock

– a prolonged pressure of the but-ton will release the lock and openthe boot.

Boot lifting is facilitated by theaction of gas dampers.

The dampers are cali-brated so as to ensurecorrect lifting of the boot

tailgate with the weights estab-lished by the manufacturer.Addition of extra equipment (e.g.spoiler, etc.) can adversely affectoperation and safety of use.

fig. 192

L0A

0167

b

228

OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDEWITH THE KEY (fig. 193)

The boot lock is electrified: pressbutton A on the tailgate to open it.

In an emergency (battery run downor electrical system failure), the tail-gate can be opened by fully turningcounterclockwise the key in the lockand exerting at the same time aslight pressure on the lower edge ofthe number plate holder to reducethe opening effort.

IMPORTANT If the boot wasopened using the key, at closing theautomatic function will be deacti-vated. To restore the automaticfunction press button A.

OPENING BY MEANS OF THEREMOTE CONTROL

The tailgate can be opened fromthe outside by pressing button A(fig. 194) on the remote control,even when the electronic alarm is on.

When the electronic alarm is on,boot opening is accompanied bydouble flashing of direction indica-tors; boot closing is accompanied byone flashing.

IMPORTANT If the boot is openedwith the key when the electronicalarm is on, the latter will not bedeactivated.

If the electronic alarm is on, boththe volumetric protection and theboot control sensor will be switchedoff, and the system will emit (exceptfor versions of certain markets) twobeeps.

fig. 193

L0A

0602

2b

fig. 194L0

A01

79b

229

Boot lock opening/closing by remote control


To open the boot tailgate

To close the boot tailgate

Off

Press tailgate button

When the boot isclosed, the lock

remainsunlocked

Bound to central door locking Not bound to central door locking

On

Press remote controlbutton

A (fig. 194),then press the tailgate

buttonor keep remote control button

depressed(more than 1 second)


remains unlocked. To lock the

tailgate lock, pressremote control button

B (fig. 194)

On






remains unlocked. To lock the

tailgate lock, pressremote control button

B (fig. 194)

Off






remains unlocked. The lock will automat-

ically lock when thecar speed

exceeds 20 km/h

FUNCTIONS THAT CAN BEMODIFIED BY THE CONNECTMENU

The CONNECT enables to switchon/off the following functions:

– locking/unlocking the boottogether with central doorlocking/opening

– automatic locking of the boot,door locks and fuel filler cap, whenthe car speed exceeds 20 km/h.


The following tables summarizethe operation logic of the boot lock,depending on the functions thathave been actuated.

230

Boot lock opening/closing by metal insert of the key


To open the boot tailgate

To close the boot tailgate

On



remainsunlocked.

To lock the tailgate lock, turn thekey counterclockwise

in the lock latch

Off

Turn the key clock-wise in thelock latch


remainsunlocked.


in the lock latch.

In any case, the lockwill automatically lock when the carspeed exceeds 20

km/h

On



remainsunlocked.


in the lock latch

Off

Press the tailgate but-ton


remainsunlocked

Not bound to central door lockingBound to central door locking

231

CLOSING THE BOOT

To close the bonnet,lower it down until you layit on the lock, without

however slamming it. The lock iselectric and the bonnet will closeautomatically.

BOOT CEILING LIGHT (fig. 195)

The boot is lit by ceiling light A,which switches on automaticallywhen the tailgate is opened.

The light switches off automatical-ly when the tailgate is closed.

If the tailgate is left open, the ceil-ing light will switch off after about20 minutes: to switch it on again,close and then open again the tail-gate.

LUGGAGE NETS

The boot is equipped with a fixednet (fig. 196) set on the left side,and (optional for versions/marketswhere applicable) a mobile net.

fig. 195L0

A01

80b

fig. 196

L0A

0049

b

232

The mobile net can be secured toone of the two positions provided inthe front part of the boot (fig. 197-198), by hooking it onto seats A andB (fig. 199).

To secure the net, insert hooks A(fig. 200) in seats B then pushdownwards.

The net can be unhooked by slip-ping it off upwards, by pressingdown button C on the attachment.

ANCHORING THE LOAD

The loads can be secured with belts(not provided), attached to the spe-cific rings (fig. 201-202) in the bootcorners.

fig. 197

L0A

0046

b

fig. 198

L0A

0047

b

fig. 199

L0A

0099

bfig. 200

L0A

0048

bfig. 201

L0A

0219

b

233

These rings can also be used to fas-ten the luggage net (optional, can bepurchased at a Lancia Dealership).

LUGGAGE TRANSPORT -IMPORTANT

The car is equipped with a systemthat automatically keeps headlightheight steady on different loadingconditions. The adjusting systemworks properly with the maximumallowed loads: always make surethat the load you are carrying doesnot exceed the values specified inchapter “Technical Specifications”.

When using the boot,make sure the load youare carrying does not

exceed the maximum allowedweight (see the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter). Alsoensure the items in the boot arearranged properly and fastenedwith straps to the specific hooksto prevent them being thrown for-wards and injuring passengersshould you brake sharply.

Heavy loads which arenot securely anchoredcould seriously injure

passengers in the event of anaccident.

If you need to carrypetrol in a jerry-can,always comply with the

law regulations and use a certi-fied can, which must be properlysecured to the fastening rings. Inany case, the risk of fire in case ofaccident is high.

fig. 202

L0A

0220

b

234

POWER SOCKET (fig. 203)(where provided)

It is located on the right-hand sideof the boot.

Open cover A to use the socket.

The socket is powered when thekey is turned to MAR. It can be usedonly for accessories with a maximumintake of 15A (power 180W).

Do not use the socket forpower devices with ahigher intake than that

shown.Prolonged current intake can

drain the battery and lead toproblems when starting theengine.

SKI TUNNEL (where provided)

The tunnel can be used to trans-port long objects (e.g. skis).Introduce objects into the tunnelfrom the boot.

Proceed as follows:

1) From the rear seat, lower thearmrest using handle A (fig. 204).

fig. 203

L0A

0218

b

fig. 204

L0A

0076

b

235

2) Lower the coating by pullinghandgrip B (fig. 205).

3) Open the flap by pressing but-tons C (fig. 206).

4) Take protection D (fig. 207) outand lay it on the armrest.

5) From the boot, lower the flap bypressing handle A (fig. 208).

fig. 206L0

A00

78b

fig. 205

L0A

0077

b

fig. 208

L0A

0080

b

fig. 207

L0A

0079

b

236

fig. 211

L0A

0094

b

After placing the load with the pro-tection, secure it by means of thebelt to prevent it from shifting incase of sudden braking or collision.

To secure the protection with theload:

1) Get the protection belt to passaround the armrest.

2) Hold the belt tight by pulling itsend, while holding buckle A (fig.209).

3) Secure the load by inserting theattachment of belt A (fig. 210) intothe buckle of the central rear safetybelt.

To release the protection with theload:

1) Release the belt by pressing thebutton on the safety belt buckle.

2) Loosen the tension of the belt bymaking the latter slide into buckle A(fig. 211) while pressing button B.

3) Slip the protection belt from thearmrest and fold it up into its seat.

Close the flaps by pushing theminto their seat to locking.

fig. 209

L0A

0093

b

fig. 210L0

A00

95b

237

BONNET

Open the bonnet onlywhen the car is station-ary.

To open the bonnet:

1) Open the driver’s door.

2) Pull lever A (fig. 212) in thedirection shown by the arrow.

3) Lift lever B (fig. 213) andrelease the bonnet from the safetyretainer.

4) Lift the bonnet.

IMPORTANT The bonnet is liftedby two gas struts (fig. 214). Do nottamper with the struts and followthe bonnet in its movement.

fig. 212

L0A

0019

b

fig. 213L0

A60

23b

fig. 214

L0A

0285

b

238

If repairs need to be car-ried out inside the enginecompartment when this is

still hot, be careful not to burnyourself and keep away from theelectric fan as this may cut in atany time, even if the key isremoved from the ignition switch.Wait until the engine has cooled.

Scarves, ties and otherloose articles of clothingcould easily get caught up

in moving parts.

To close the bonnet:

Lower the bonnet at approx. 20 cmfrom the engine compartment andthen let it drop, ensuring that it isfully closed and not just held in posi-tion by the safety catch. If the bonnetdoes not close properly do not push itdown but open it again and repeat theabove procedure.

For safety reasons thebonnet shall always beperfectly closed when trav-

elling. Always check for properbonnet locking. If the bonnet is leftinadvertently open, stop the carimmediately and close the bonnet.

FUEL FILLER CAPThe fuel filler cap flap is controlled

automatically controlled by the cen-tral door locking system.

When central door locking is on,the fuel filler flap cannot be opened;when central door locking is off, theflap can be opened by simply press-ing on the front part in point A (fig.215).

Open the fuel filler flap by turningit in the direction shown by thearrow until it is completely opened.

fig. 215

L0A

0012

b

239

In an emergency, the flap can bereleased by pulling wire B (fig. 216)on the right-hand side of the bootinside the service compartment.

To open the compartment flap,turn the catch C (fig. 217) to 1 usingthe ignition key and lower it.

IMPORTANT The airtight seal ofthe cap may lead to a slight increaseof pressure in the tank. A hissingsound when the cap is removed istherefore quite normal.

The cap is equipped with a devicewhich fastens it to the flap so that itcannot be misplaced D (fig. 218).

While you are filling up, fasten thecap to the device inside the flap asshown in the figure.

Do not put naked flamesor lighted cigarettes nearthe fuel filler hole as there

is a danger of fire. Do not bend tooclose to the hole either so as not tobreathe in harmful vapours.

REFUELLING

To guarantee full tank filling, carryout two refuelling operations after thefirst click of the fuel delivery gun. Avoidfurther topping up operations thatcould cause damages to the fuel system.

IMPORTANT Refuelling shall alwaysbe performed with engine off and igni-tion key to STOP. If the engine is offbut the key is to MAR, a wrong fuellevel could temporarily be indicated.This is due to the internal system con-trol logic and cannot be considered asa system malfunctioning.

fig. 217L0

A03

03b

fig. 218

L0A

0014

b

fig. 216

L0A

0015

b

240

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (2.4 JTD 20V CAE version)

The Diesel Particulate Filter is a me-chanical filter, integral with the ex-haust system, that physically trapsparticulate present in the exhaustgases of Diesel engines.

The diesel particular filter has beenadopted to eliminate almost totallyparticulates in compliance with cur-rent / future law regulations.

During normal use of the car, theengine control unit records a set ofdata (e.g.: travel time, type of route,temperatures, etc.) and it will thencalculate how much particulates hasbeen trapped by the filter.

Since this filter physically traps par-ticulates, it shall be cleaned (re-claimed) at regular intervals by burn-ing carbon particles. Reclaiming pro-cedure is controlled automatically bythe engine control unit according tothe filter conditions and the condi-tions of use of the car. During re-claiming the following phenomenacould take place: idling slight in-crease, fan activation, slight smoke in-crease, high exhaust temperatures.These situations shall not be consid-ered as faults and they do not affectcar performance and environment.

Diesel particulate filter clogged

When the Diesel particulate filter isclogged, the instrument panel warn-ing light è will turn on (on certainversions symbol è is displayed). Inthis case keep the car running untilwarning light è (or symbol è) turnsoff.

241

After travelling a fewkilometres, check that thescrews securing the rack

are tight.

Distribuite the loadevenly and remember,when driving the car, that

the car is now more susceptible toside wind.

Never exceed the per-mitted weights (refer tothe “Technical specifica-

tions” chapter).

ROOF RACK – SKI RACK

ANCHORAGE POINTS

The car roof features four bracketsfor anchoring the roof rack/ski rack(fig. 219); these brackets are hiddenby small covers.

To use the brackets, lift the coversby levering on point A (fig. 220).

Fasten the roof rack/ski rack to thebrackets, by following the providedinstructions.

After removing the roof rack/skirack, lower the covers by engagingthem into their seats.

IMPORTANT Strictly comply withthe law regulations in force concern-ing maximum overall dimensions.

Strictly follow the assemblyinstructions provided with the roofrack/ski rack set. Assembly shouldbe made by qualified personnel.

fig. 219

L0A

0083

b

fig. 220L0

A00

84b

HEADLIGHTSGAS-DISCHARGE (BI-XENO)MAIN BEAM / DIPPED BEAMHEADLIGHTS AND DYNAMICBEAM ADJUSTMENT DEVICE

These headlights, called Bi-Xeno,use a lamp with a xenon-filled bulb,both for the dipped beam and themain beam headlights.

The main characteristics of thistype of headlights are:

– higher brilliancy

– higher light beam width andadjustability

– lower consumption under work-ing conditions

– longer bulb life.

Each headlight is equipped with anelectronic control unit used to con-trol supply voltage. Due to high bril-liancy, bi-Xeno headlights requirethe adoption of a dynamic beamadjustment control system.

This system is controlled by anelectronic control unit operating attwo levels:

– constant headlight beam realign-ment as a function of the car load

– dynamic headlight beam align-ment to compensate car pitchingwhen running.

Operation

Light is projected onto the road bymeans of a spherical glass lens witha large surface (70 mm diameter).

A deflector lifts and lowers, so thatlight distribution is different forboth the main beam and dippedbeam headlights. The deflector iselectrically operated and themechanical lifting/lowering opera-tion is performed real-time whenlights are switched.

The xenon lamp consists of a bulbcontaining low-pressure xenon andtwo electrodes.

To obtain light emission, an elec-tric arc must be triggered betweenthe two electrodes and maintained.

Each headlight is equipped with acontrol unit which:

– checks the voltage/current valueunder working operation

– triggers the arc to the electrodesand cause salt evaporation atswitching on.

242

243

Automatic dynamic beam adjust-ment device

Bi-Xeno headlights require, due toproduced brilliancy, an automatic,dynamic beam adjustment system.

This system is managed by an elec-tronic control unit that controls theactuators mounted on each dippedbeam headlight. Actuator controldepends on the processing of the sig-nals from two orientation sensors.

This automatic dynamic beamadjustment system provides the fol-lowing advantages:

– it avoids dazzling the vehiclescoming from the opposite direction

– it stabilizes the illuminated areaso as to improve active safety.

Headlight beam adjustment con-trol unit

The control unit calculates theinstant car trim, by comparing thesignals from the orientation sensors.

A “correction” signal is sent to theactuators to adapt light beam orien-tation to the calculated car trim.

To avoid oscillation of the anti-dazzling beam in case of particularroad surfaces (paved surfaces, dirtroads, etc.) or abrupt movements ofthe car caused by the driver (clutchdisengagement, gear change, etc.),the control unit reduces the numberof corrections to be made on thelight unit.

Fault indication

Anomalies in the operation of oneor several system components aresignalled by the lighting of symbol6 on the multifunction display,together with message “HEAD-LAMP INCLINATION ADJUST-MENT SYSTEM FAULT”.

IMPORTANT In case of faults,contact a Lancia Dealership.

In case of component anomaly orvoltage drop, the system controls inany case system operation accordingto the following logic:

– faulty front sensor: trim calcula-tion is made by replacing the voltagevalue read on the faulty sensor witha stored, fixed value

– faulty rear sensor: the system isswitched to the safety operationmode and keeps the headlights in apreset position of maximum lower-ing allowed by the light beam.

244

– Failed connection of actuators: ifthe control signal is failing, the actu-ators will be brought back to theposition of maximum lowering per-mitted for the light beam

– control unit failure: depending onthe type of failure, the system canremain in the position where it waswhen the failure occurred, or setitself for the maximum lowering per-mitted for the light beam

– voltage drop: when voltage fallsbelow 9 V, the system remains in theposition where it was when the fail-ure occurred.

HEADLAMP ORIENTATION FORLEFT-/RIGHT HAND DRIVE

The car headlights are equippedwith Bi-Xeno lamps with high light-ing power; therefore, when you trav-el from a country with right-handdrive to one with left-hand drive, orvice versa, dipped beam headlightorientation must be modified.

This operation is necessary to avoiddazzling the vehicle coming from theopposite direction, as well as to opti-mize road edge illumination.

To carry out this opera-tion, contact a LanciaDealership.

When you go back toyour country of origin,remember to have the

dipped beam headlight orienta-tion modified again.

245

EOBD SYSTEMThe EOBD (European On Board

Diagnosis) system continuouslymonitors the engine emission systemcomponents. Furthermore, the sys-tem warns the driver of deteriorationconcerning the emission systemcomponents by means of the instru-ment panel warning light U comingon with message “ENGINE CON-TROL SYSTEM FAULT”.

The objective is to:

– monitor system efficiency;

– warn when failures can increaseemissions over the threshold estab-lished by the European regulations;

– warn of the need to replace dete-riorated components.

Furthermore, the system isequipped with a connector for inter-facing with specific tools used toread the error codes stored in thecontrol unit memory along with a setof diagnostic and engine specificparameters. This check can also beperformed by traffic controlleragents.

Contact a LanciaDealership as soon aspossible if the instrument

panel U warning light eitherdoes not come on when the key isturned to MAR or comes on, withfixed or flashing light, when trav-elling together with message“ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEMFAULT”. Warning light U oper-ation can be checked by trafficcontroller agents. Comply withthe regulations in force in thecountry where you are travelling.

IMPORTANT After eliminatingthe problem, your LanciaDealership will run a bench test tofully check the system. In somecases, a long road test may berequired.

246

ABSGENERAL

If this is the first car with ABS youdrive, get familiar with it by somepreliminary “driving tests” on poorgrip roadbeds, obviously under safe-ty conditions and in compliance withthe traffic regulations of the Countryyou are driving in. Read carefullythe following instructions.

The ABS (wheel anti-locking) sys-tem prevents wheel locking and con-sequent slipping in all road surfaceconditions. This ensures greater con-trol, as it is possible to steering andbrake at the same time, and reducesbraking space.

If the road conditions decrease thefriction coefficient (i.e. due to thepresence of water, snow, ice, etc.) awheel may slip; in this case, thewheel does not ensure correct decel-eration or the possibility of main-taining the running direction andthe ability to steer. Here, the ABS

system comes into operation, elimi-nating hydraulic pressure only fromthe brake caliper of the locked wheeland, as soon as the latter start spin-ning again, brakes it again, thusensuring optimum braking and cardriveability.

EBD (ELECTRONIC BRAKE-FORCE DISTRIBUTOR)

The car is equipped with an elec-tronic brakeforce distributor (EBD)which, by means of the ABS controlunit and sensors, makes it possibleto optimally distribute the brakingforce between the front and rearwheels, thus avoiding car skiddingin the most difficult situations.

ABS OPERATION

The electronic control unit receivesand processes the signals from thebrake pedal and from the four sen-sors on the wheels. It consequentlycontrols the hydraulic system so todecrease, hold or increase the pres-sure in the braking circuit of everysingle wheel, and prevent locking.

The main components of the ABSsystem are:

- an electronic-hydraulic controlunit, which processes the signalsfrom the various sensors and per-forms the most appropriate opera-tions by acting on the solenoidvalves

- four sensors which detect therotation speed of every single wheel

- a pump provided with pressureswitch, to restore brake fluid pres-sure.

IMPORTANT A slight pulsation ofthe brake pedal may be felt whenthe ABS system comes into play.

247

The car is fitted with anelectronic brake forcedistributor (EBD). The x

and> warning lights come on atthe same time on the multifunc-tion display, together with mes-sage “EBD SYSTEM FAULT”,when the engine is running toindicate that there is an EBD sys-tem failure. In this case violentbraking may be accompanied byearly rear wheel locking with thepossibility of skidding. Drive thecar extremely carefully to thenearest Lancia Dealership tohave the system checked.

If warning light xcomes on together withmessage “LOW BRAKE

FLUID LEVEL”, on the multi-function display, stop the carimmediately and contact a LanciaDealership. Fluid leakage willcompromise efficiency of both thetraditional brake system and theABS system.

The system performancein terms of active safetymust not lead the driver

to take unnecessary or unjusti-fied risks. Always suit your dri-ving style to the weather, visibili-ty and traffic conditions.

Excessive use of enginebraking (gears too shortand limited grip) may

make the wheels slip. The ABSwill have no effect on this type ofskidding.

The maximum possibledeceleration alwaysdepends on the available

road grip. Obviously, grip will beconsiderably decreased in thepresence of snow and ice. In theseconditions, the braking spacewill still be high, even with theABS.

The coming on of the > warning light on themultifunction display,

together with message “ABS SYS-TEM FAULT”, when the engine isrunning, normally indicates afault in the ABS system. In thiscase the braking system will stillbe effective although without theanti-lock device assistance. Inthese conditions, EBD systemoperation may also be reduced.Drive the car extremely carefullyto the nearest Lancia Dealershipto have the ABS system checked.

248

fig. 224

L0A

213b

SOUND SYSTEMThe car is equipped with a com-

plete sound system, consisting of thefollowing:

– RDS-TMC radio integral with theCONNECT system

– audio CD/navigation CD-ROMplayer A (fig. 221) on the dashboard

– audio cassette player B on thedashboard

– multiple compact disc player(CD-changer) C (fig. 222) in theglove compartment (where fitted)

– BOSE HI-FI system (where fit-ted).

For detailed instructions on theRadio, CD and CD-Changer, refer tothe CONNECT supplement provid-ed with the car.

SPEAKERS

Front speakers (fig. 223)

The front speakers A are housed infront door panels.

Rear speakers (fig. 224)

The rear speakers B are housed inthe rear door panels.

fig. 221

L0A

0210

b

fig. 222L0

A02

17b

fig. 223

L0A

0215

b

249

fig. 226L0

A28

6b

Speakers on the rear windowshelf (fig. 225)

Speakers C are located at the endsof the rear window shelf.

BOSE HI-FI SOUND SYSTEM

The HI-FI sound system consists of:

– two high-performance woofers(168 mm diameter), fitted in frontdoor panels

– two coaxial tweeters (50 mmdiameter) built-into the front doorwoofers

– two high-performance, wide-band mid-range speakers (160 mmdiameter), fitted in the rear doorpanels

– two high-performance sub-woofers (230 mm diameter), fittedon the rear window shelf

– speaker A (fig. 226) fitted in theupper central part of the dashboard

– one high-power hi-fi amplifier,five channels - four 25 W and one100 W - class D, with analogueequaliser for signal amplitude andphase, fitted on the right-hand sideof the boot A (fig. 227).

Total sound power: 300 W.

The HI-FI sound system wasspecifically designed for the THESISto offer the best acoustic perfor-mance and the musical realism of alive concert in each seat in the pas-senger compartment.

System characteristics includecrystalline treble and full, rich bass-es. Furthermore, the complete rangeof tones is played in the entire pas-senger compartment embracing thepassengers with the feeling of spacetypical of live music.

The system components arepatented and result from state-of-the-art technology. At the sametime, the system is easy and intuitiveto use and allows even the leastexperts to use the system to the best.

fig. 225

L0A

211b

fig. 227

L0A

209b

250

STARTING THE ENGINE

IMPORTANT The car is equippedwith electronic engine immobilisingsystem. If the engine fails to start,see paragraph “Lancia CODE sys-tem”.

We recommend thatduring the initial periodyou do not drive to full

car performance (e.g.: excessiveaccelerations, long journeys attop speed, sharp braking etc.).

It is dangerous to let theengine run in a garage orother closed area. The

engine consumes oxygen andgives off carbon oxide, a poiso-nous gas.

The ignition device is fitted with asafety device which obliges the dri-ver to return the key to STOP posi-tion before repeating the startingprocedure.

In the same way, when the engineis running, this device prevents anyshift from MAR to AVV.

Never leave the ignitionkey at MAR when theengine is off to prevent

battery draining due to currentabsorption.

DRIVING YOUR CAR

251

HOW TO START PETROL VERSIONS

IMPORTANT Never press theaccelerator before the engine hasstarted.

1) Ensure that the electric parkingbrake is on (instrument panel warn-ing light x on).

2) Ensure that electrical systemsand devices, especially high absorp-tion ones (e.g. heated rear window),are off.

3) On versions with manual gear-box, set the gear lever to neutral andpress the clutch pedal fully down toavoid the starter dragging the gears.

4) On versions with electronicautomatic gearbox, ensure that theselector is at P and keep the brakepedal pressed.

5) Turn the ignition key to AVVand release it as soon as the enginestarts.

6) If the engine fails to start, returnthe key to STOP and repeat the pro-cedure.

IMPORTANT If the engine doesnot start at the first attempt, do notkeep turning the ignition key toavoid damaging the catalyst.Contact a Lancia Dealership.

HOW TO START JTD VERSIONS

1) Ensure that the electric parkingbrake is on (instrument panel warn-ing light x on).

2) Put the gear lever to neutral.

3) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

4) Wait until the m warning lightis off: the hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen.

When the engine is particularly hotthe warning light may come on soquickly that it is impossible to noticeit.

5)Press the clutch pedal down tothe floor.

6) Turn the ignition key to AVVimmediately after the m warninglight goes out. If you wait too long,you will lose the benefit of the workdone by the glow plugs.

252

IMPORTANT Energy-absorbingdevices (climate control system,heated rear window etc.) are auto-matically disconnected at starting.

If the engine does not start at thefirst attempt, return the ignition keyto STOP before trying to start theengine again.

If starting is particularly diffi-cult,(with the Lancia CODE systemworking properly) do not keep try-ing too many times.

Use an auxiliary battery only if thebattery has insufficient charge.Never use a battery charger to startthe engine.

ENGINE WARMING UP

– Begin to move forward slowly let-ting the engine turn at medium revs.Do not accelerate abruptly.

– Do not push the engine to its limitfor the first few kilometers. You arerecommended to wait until thecoolant temperature has reached 50to 60 °C.

STOPPING THE ENGINE

– Release the accelerator pedal andwait until the engine is idling.

– Turn the ignition key to STOPand turn the engine off. For versionswith electronic automatic gearbox,put the selector to P before turningthe engine off.

IMPORTANT After a taxing driveyou should allow the engine to“catch its breath” before turning itoff by letting it idle to allow the tem-perature in the engine compartmentto fall.

253

Remember that until theengine has started, thebrake booster and power

steering systems will not workand a greater effort will thereforebe required to press the brakepedal and turn the steeringwheel.

For cars equipped withturbosupercharger inparticular, but generally

for any kind of cars, avoid abruptaccelerations immediately beforeturning the engine off. A quickburst on the accelerator servesabsolutely no practical purpose,wastes fuel and may damage seri-ously the turbosuperchargerrotor bearings.

EMERGENCY START-UP

If the Lancia CODE system fails torecognise that code transmitted bythe ignition key (symbol Y togeth-er with message “VEHICLE PRO-TECTION SYSTEM FAULT” on themultifunction display) the emer-gency start-up can be performed byusing the CODE card code.

For the correct procedure see chap-ter “In an emergency”.


connect an auxiliary battery,carefully read and comply withthe instructions contained in theparagraph “If battery is to be dis-connected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

Never bump start theengine (by pushing, tow-ing or coasting downhill)

as this could cause fuel to flowinto the catalytic exhaust systemand damage it beyond repair.

IMPORTANT If the engine turnsoff while the car is running, theLancia CODE symbol Y and themessage “VEHICLE PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAULT” may appear onthe multifunction display when theengine starts again. In this casecheck that the warning light switch-es off when turning the engine offand on again with the car stationary.Otherwise contact a LanciaDealership.

254

Never leave unsuper-vised children in the car;always remove the keys

and take them with you when youleave the car.

If the CID device isinside the car, the enginecan be started: therefore,

we recommend that you take thegreatest care since, in this cir-cumstances, the engine could bestarted unlawfully or by childrenleft unattended inside the car.

PARKINGTo park the car, proceed as fol-

lows:

– Stop the engine.

– Check for electric parking brakeengagement.

– Engage the 1st gear if the car isfacing uphill or reverse if facingdownhill.

– In automatic gearbox versionsput selector to P.

– Leave the front wheels steered soto stop the car immediately if theparking brake is accidentallyreleased.

On versions equipped with sunroof(where provided), the upper part ofthe sunroof incorporates a set ofsolar cells that feed the climate con-trol system fan at first speed whenthe car is parked to reduce the tem-perature inside the passenger com-partment.

Never leave the ignitionkey at MAR when theengine is off to prevent

draining the battery.


255

SAFE DRIVINGIn designing THESIS, LANCIA has

made every effort to come up with acar able to provide driver and pas-senger with top-class levels of safety.Nevertheless it is always the behav-iour of the person at the wheel thatdetermines road safety.

Below you will find some simpletips to help you travel in safetyunder different conditions. You willno doubt be familiar with many ofthem already, but it will be useful toread them all carefully.

BEFORE GETTING BEHINDTHE WHEEL

– Make sure all lights, includingthe headlights, are working proper-ly.

– Adjust the position of the seats,steering wheel, driving and doormirrors properly for the best drivingposition.

– Carefully adjust the headrestraints so that the back of thehead and not the nape of the neck issupported.

Make sure that nothing (mats etc.)gets in the way of the pedals whenthey are pushed down.

– Make sure that any childrestraint systems (child seats, carri-ers etc.) are properly fixed on therear seat.

– Place any objects in the boot insuch a way that they cannot bethrown forwards in the event of anaccident.

– Do not eat a heavy meal beforetravelling. Light eating will helpkeep your reflexes prompt. Aboveall, do not have anything alcoholic todrink.

Periodically, remember to check:

– tyre pressure and conditions;

– engine oil level;

– coolant level and cooling systemconditions;

– brake fluid level;

– power steering fluid level;

– windscreen washer fluid level.

WHEN TRAVELLING

– The first rule of safe driving isprudence.

– Prudence also means puttingyourself into a position where youcan predict wrong or imprudentbehaviour from other drivers.

– Stick closely to the rules of theroad in the particular country wherethe vehicle is being driven and,above all, do not exceed speed limits.

– Ensure that, besides yourself, allthe other passengers in the vehiclehave their seat belts fastened, thatchildren are sitting in the appropri-ate child seats and any animals inthe car are placed in suitable com-partments.

– You should be physically fit andmentally alert before setting out onlong journeys.

256

Make sure that any matsare appropriate in size:any hindrance, even

slight, to the braking system mayrequire a higher pedal strokethan normal.

Water, ice and salt onthe road may deposit onbrake disks, reducing

braking efficiency the first timethey are used.

Driving while drunk orunder the influence ofdrugs or certain medi-

cines is dangerous both for youand other road users.

Always fasten both frontand back seat belts,including child restraint

systems if there are children trav-elling with you. Travelling withseat belts unfastened increasesthe risk of injury or death if youare involved in a collision.

Take care when fittingadditional spoilers, alloyrims and wheel caps: they

might reduce ventilation of thebrakes, thus their efficiency dur-ing abrupt braking or long down-hill slopes.

Never drive with objectson the floor in front of thedriver’s seat: they might

get stuck under the pedals mak-ing it impossible to accelerate orbrake.

257

– Keep a greater safety distancefrom the cars in front of you thanduring daylight hours: it is hard tojudge how fast other cars are goingwhen all you can see are their lights.

– Only use main beam headlightswhen you are driving outside townand when you are sure they do notannoy other drivers.

– Dip your headlights as soon asyou see cars coming in the otherdirection and pass them with theheadlights dipped.

– Keep all lights clean.

– Be careful of animals crossing theroad when driving in the country.

DRIVING IN THE RAIN

Rain and wet road surfaces spelldanger.

All manoeuvres are more difficulton a wet road because the grip of thewheels on the tarmac is greatlyreduced. This is why braking dis-tances are much longer and road-holding is lower.

Here is some advice for driving inthe rain:

– Reduce speed and maintain agreater safety distance from the carsin front.

– If it is raining particularly heavi-ly, visibility is also reduced. In thesecases, switch on the dipped head-lights even if it is still daylight so youcan be seen more easily.

– Do not drive through puddles atspeed and hold on tightly to thewheel if you do: a puddle taken athigh speed might cause you to losecontrol of the car (“aquaplaning”).

– Move the ventilation controls tothe position for demisting the win-dows (see the section “Getting toknow your car”), so to avoid visibil-ity problems.

– Periodically check the conditionof the windscreen wiper blades.

– Do not drive too many hours at atime but stop at intervals to stretchyour legs and recoup your energy.

– Make sure the air in the car isbeing changed continuously.

– Never coast downhill (i.e.: withthe engine off): if you do, you losethe aid of engine braking and powerbrakes so that braking requiresgreater effort.

DRIVING AT NIGHT

There are the main rules to followwhen you are driving at night.

– Drive especially carefully: it isharder to drive at night.

– Slow down especially if the roadis not lit.

– At the first signs of sleepiness,stop: continuing would be a risk foryourself and everybody else. Onlystart driving again when you havehad enough rest.

258

DRIVING IN FOG

If the fog is thick, do not start outon a journey unless you absolutelyhave to. If driving in mist, blanketfog or when there is danger of fogpatches:

– Keep your speed down.

– Turn on the dipped headlights,rear fog lights and front fog lightseven during the day. Do not drivewith your headlights at main beam.

IMPORTANT On stretches of roadwith good visibility, switch off yourrear fog lights; the brightness ofthese lights could annoy the peopletravelling in the cars behind.

– Remember that fog also meansthe tarmac is very wet and thereforemanoeuvres of all kinds are moredifficult and stopping distances arelonger.

– Keep a good distance from thecars in front of you.

– As far as possible, avoid spurts ofspeed or sudden decelerations.

– Do not overtake other vehicles ifyou can help it.

– If you are forced to stop your car(breakdown, limited visibility etc.),try to stop off the road. Turn on thehazard lights and, if possible, thedipped beam headlights.Rhythmically sound the horn if yourealise another car is coming.

DRIVING IN THE MOUNTAINS

– When driving downhill use theengine braking effect by engaging alow gear so as not to overheat thebrakes.

– Under no circumstances shouldyou drive downhill with the engineoff or with the gear in neutral, letalone with the ignition key out.

– Drive at a moderate speed with-out cutting corners.

– Remember that overtaking whilegoing uphill is slower and thereforerequires more free road. If you arebeing overtaken while drivinguphill, make it easier for the othervehicle to pass.

259

DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE

– Here are some tips for driving inthese conditions:

– Keep your speed down.

– Use winter tyres or snow chainsfor driving on snow covered roads;see the respective paragraphs in thischapter.

– Prevalently use the engine brakeand avoid sudden braking.

– Do not accelerate suddenly andavoid swerving.

– In winter, even apparently dryroads may have icy patches. Be care-ful therefore when driving overstretches that do not get much expo-sure to the sun or are lined with treesor rocks where ice might not havemelted.

– Keep a good distance from thevehicles in front.

DRIVING WITH ABS

The ABS is a braking system thatessentially offers two advantages:

1) It prevents wheel lock and con-sequent skidding in emergencystops, particularly when the roaddoes not offer much grip.

2) It makes possible to brake andsteer at the same time so you canavoid unexpected obstacles anddirect the car where you want whilebraking.

To get the most out of ABS:

– During emergency stops or whengrip conditions are very poor, youwill feel a slight pulsation on thebrake pedal. This is the sign that theABS is working. Do not release thebrake pedal but continue to press soas not to interrupt the brakingaction.

– The ABS prevents the wheelsfrom locking, but it does notincrease actual grip conditionsbetween tyre and road. Therefore,even if your car is fitted with ABS,keep a safe distance from the car infront of you and keep your speeddown when driving into bends.

ABS serves to increase your controlover the car, not to enable you to gofaster.

260

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS AND POLLUTION

Some suggestions which may helpyou to keep the running costs of thecar down and lower the amount oftoxic emissions released into theatmosphere are given below.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

The overall state of the car is animportant factor which has amarked influence over fuel con-sumption and driving comfort andon the life span of your car. For thisreason care should be taken to main-tain your car by carrying out thenecessary checks and regulations inaccordance with the specificationsgiven in the “Service Schedule” (seesections: spark plugs, air cleaners,timing...).

Tyres

Tyre pressure should be checked atleast once every four weeks: if thepressure is too low fuel consumptionincreases as the resistance to therolling movement of the tyre isgreater. In this state, tyre wear isincreased and handling suffers,which will effect safety.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much load inthe boot. The weight of the car (intown traffic above all), and its trimgreatly effect consumption and sta-bility.

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof or ski racks fromthe car as soon as they are no longerneeded. These accessories reduce theaerodynamic penetration of the carand will increase consumption.When transporting particularlylarge objects, use a trailer, wherepossible.

Electrical devices

Use electrical devices for the neces-sary time only. The heated rear win-dow, fog lights, windscreen wipers,heater fan require large amounts ofelectricity and increasing the requestfor power will also increase fuel con-sumption (up to +25% when drivingin towns).

Climate control system

The climate control system is anadditional load which greatly effectsthe engine leading to higher con-sumption (up to +20% in average).When the temperature outsideallows, use the air vents where pos-sible.

261

Gear selections

As soon as the traffic and road con-ditions allow it, shift to a highergear. Using a lower gear to liven upacceleration greatly increases con-sumption. In the same way, improp-er use of the higher gears willincrease consumption, emissionsand wear and tear on the engine.

Top speeds

Fuel consumption increases con-siderably as speed increases. Forexample, when accelerating from 90to 120 km/h, fuel consumptionincreases up to approximately+30%. Your speed should be kept aseven as possible and superfluousbraking and acceleration avoided, asthis increases both consumption andemissions. A “smooth” driving styleshould be adopted by attempting toanticipate manoeuvres to avoidimminent danger, and to keep a safedistance from the vehicle in front toavoid braking sharply

Acceleration

Accelerating violently increasingthe revs will greatly effect consump-tion and emissions: accelerationshould be gradual and not exceedthe maximum torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Frequent cold starting will notenable the engine to reach optimalrunning temperature. It follows,therefore, that consumption will behigher (from +15 to +30% in towns)as will the production of toxic emis-sions.

Spoilers

The use of optional extras whichare not certified for specific use onthe car may reduce the aerodynamicpenetration of the car and increaseconsumption.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine when thecar is stationary or at high or lowrevs: in this way the engine willwarm up gradually increasing con-sumption and emissions. You shoulddrive off slowly straight away avoid-ing high revs so that the engine willwarm up more quickly.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid revving the engine whenstopped at traffic lights or beforeswitching off the engine and avoiddoubling the clutch as these actionshave no purpose on modern vehiclesand serve only to increase consump-tion and pollution.

262

Traffic and road conditions

Heavy traffic and higher consump-tion are synonymous, for examplewhen driving slowly with frequentuse of lower gears or in towns wherethere are numerous traffic lights.

Winding roads, mountain roadsand bumpy roads also have a nega-tive effect on consumption.

Enforced halts

During prolonged stops (levelcrossings, etc.) the engine should beswitched off.

Environmental protection has beenone of the guiding principles in theproduction of the THESIS.

It is not accident that its pollutioncontrol equipment is much moreeffective than that required by cur-rent legislation.

Nonetheless, the environment can-not get by without a concerted effortfrom everyone.

By following a few simple rules youcan avoid harming the environmentand often cut down fuel consump-tion at the same time. On this sub-ject, a few useful tips have beengiven below to supplement thosemarked by symbol #, at variouspoints of the handbook.

You are asked to read both the for-mer and the latter carefully.

CHEAP RUNNING THAT RESPECTS THEENVIRONMENT

LOOKING AFTER EMISSIONCONTROL DEVICES

The correct use of pollution controldevices not only ensures respect forthe environment but also has aneffect on the car’s performance.Keeping these devices in good condi-tion is therefore a fundamental rulefor driving that is easy on yourpocket and on the environment too.

The first step is to follow the“Service Schedule” to the letter.Only use unleaded petrol for petrolengines (95 RON), for JTD versionsonly diesel fuel (EN590 specifica-tion).

263

Ignoring the above rulesmay lead to fire.

When functioning nor-mally, the catalytic con-verter reaches high tem-

peratures. For this reason, do notpark the car over inflammablematerial (grass, dry leaves, pineneedles, etc.): fire hazard.

Do not allow anything tobe sprayed onto the cat-alytic converter, lambda

sensor and exhaust pipe.

Do not install other heatshields and do not removethose already fitted to the

catalytic converter and exhaustpipe.

Never run the engine with thespark plugs disconnected even fortesting purposes. Do not warm upthe engine by letting it idle for awhile before moving off unless theoutside temperature is very low and,even in this case, only do so for lessthan 30 seconds.

If you have trouble starting, do notkeep turning the ignition key forlong periods. Be especially careful toavoid bump starting the car bypushing, towing or rolling downhill:these are all manoeuvres that candamage the catalytic exhaust sys-tem. Use an auxiliary battery forstart-ups only.

If the engine begins to “lose itssmoothness” when travelling, con-tinue your journey but reduce thedemands you are making on theengine and have the car seen at aLancia Dealership as soon as youcan.

When the instrument panel fuelreserve warning light comes on, fillup as soon as possible. A low level offuel can cause an uneven supply offuel to the engine with the inevitableincrease in the temperature of theexhaust gas and serious damages tothe catalytic converter.

264

TOWING A TRAILER

GENERAL NOTES

The car must be fitted with ahomologated tow hitch and suitableelectrical system for towing a cara-van or a trailer. Have the tow hitchfitted by an expert who will issuespecific documentation for use onroads.

Fit special and/or additionalrearview mirrors in accordance withthe highway code.

Remember that towing a trailermakes it harder for the car to climbthe maximum gradients specified,increases braking and overtakingdistance, proportionally to the over-all weight of the trailer.

Engage a low gear when drivingdownhill rather than constantlybraking.

The weight the trailer exerts on thecar’s tow hitch coupling reduces thecar’s loading capacity by the sameamount. In order to be sure you arenot exceeding the maximum towingweight (as specified in the registra-tion book), you have to take intoaccount the trailer’s fully ladenweight, including accessories andpersonal luggage.

Do not exceed the speed limits fortowing a trailer in the country youare driving in. In any case, do notexceed the top speed of 100 km/h.

Trailer electrical connection shallonly be performed with ignition keyat STOP or removed.

When trailer electrical connectionis on and you switch on the rear foglights, only the trailer rear fog lightswill come on.

The ABS system will notcontrol the trailing brak-ing system. Great care

should therefore be taken whendriving on slippery road surfaces.

Under no circumstancesmodify the car’s brakingsystem for trailer braking

control. The trailer’s braking sys-tem must be completely indepen-dent of the car’s hydraulic sys-tem.

The rear parking sensorsare automatically deacti-vated when the plug of the

trailer’s electrical cable is insert-ed in the car’s tow hitch socket.The rear sensors activate auto-matically when the trailer’s plug isdisconnected.

265

TOW HITCH INSTALLATION

The tow hitch must be fixed to thebody by an expert in accordancewith the following instructions andrespecting the additional and/orintegrative information provided bythe tow hitch manufacturer.

The tow hitch to be fitted mustcomply with the current regulationsin force, with reference to Directive94/20/EEC and subsequent modifi-cations.

Use a tow hitch suited for the max-imum towable load of the car ver-sion on which the tow hitch is to befitted.

Use a unified coupling for the elec-trical connections. The coupling isgenerally fitted on a specific mountfastened to the tow hitch. A specifictrailer lights control unit shall beinstalled on the car.

For the electric connections, a 7pole 12VDC coupling must be used(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN stan-dards). Follow the instructions pro-vided by the manufacturer of the carand/or the tow hitch.

The electrical brake (where rele-vant) or other device (electricalwinch, etc.) must be powered direct-ly from the battery by means of alead with a cross-section area nosmaller than 2.5 mm2.

IMPORTANT Use the electricalbrake or winch only when the engineis running.

In addition to the electrical connec-tions, only the power wire for anadditional electrical brake and forinternal trailer lighting with a powernot exceeding 15W can be connect-ed to the car’s electrical system.

For connections use the specificcontrol unit with battery cable notless than 2.5 mm2.

INSTALLATION DIAGRAM (fig. 1)

Fasten the tow hitch in the pointsmarked with (1) using 18 M10screws and, in the points markedwith (2) use four M8 screws.

Fasten the tow hitch to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling andtrimming of the rear bumpers thatremains visible when the tow hitch isremoved.

IMPORTANT Fasten a tag in aclearly visible position at the sameheight as the tow hitch. The tag iscompulsory. It must be adequatelysized, made of suitable material andcarry the following information:

MAX LOAD ON BALL COUPLING75 kg.

After assembly, seal the fasteningscrews holes to prevent exhaust fumesfrom entering the passenger compart-ment.

266

fig. 1 L0A0264b

267

WINTER TYRESThese tyres have been specifically

designed for use on snow and iceand should be fitted in place of theexisting tyres.

Use only the homologated tyreslisted in log book.

Lancia Dealerships will be gladto provide advice on the most suit-able type of tyres according to yourneeds.

For information on the tyres to befitted, inflation pressure and wintertyre specifications, follow the pre-scriptions given in “Technical speci-fications”.

The performance of winter tyres isgreatly reduced when the treaddepth is less than 4mm. In this situ-ation it would be safer to have themreplaced.

Due to winter tyre features, undernormal conditions of use or on longmotorway journeys, the perfor-mance of these tyres is lower thanthat of standard tyres.

The use of these tyres should there-fore be limited to the conditions forwhich they were designed and certi-fied.

IMPORTANT When using wintertyres with a maximum speed indexbelow the one that can be reachedby the car (increased by 5%), placea suitable notice in the passengercompartment to inform the driver ofthe top speed at which the wintertyre can run (as per EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same(brand and track), to ensure greatersafety when driving, braking andcornering.

Remember that it is inappropriateto change the direction of rotation oftyres.

The maximum speed for wintertyres with “Q” marking is 160km/h, with “T” marking is 190km/h, whereas with “H” marking is210 km/h. Always respect the high-way code speed limit.

268

Snow chains cannot befitted on 225/50R17 (94W),225/50ZR17 (94W) and

245/40ZR18 tyres, since theyinterfere with the front suspension.

Keep your speeddown when snowchains are fitted.

Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pavementsand do not drive for long dis-tances on roads not covered withsnow to prevent damaging the carand the roadbed. Disconnect the ASR sys-

tem when snow chainsare fitted. Press the ASR-

OFF button: button led on.

SNOW CHAINSThe use of snow chains is regulated

by the legislation in force in thecountry the car is driven in.

Snow chains must only be appliedto the driving wheels (front wheels).

Versions

2.0 TB

2.4 - 2.4 CAE

2.4 JTD2.4 JTD 20V2.4 JTD 20V CAE

3.0 V6 CAE3.2 V6 CAE

Refer to the followingtable for information onthe wheels where snow

chains can be fitted; follow theprescriptions.

We recommend to contact aLancia Dealership before buyingor installing snow chains.

Check the tautness of the chainsafter driving some ten metres.

Tyres on which chains can be fitted

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

215/60 R16 95H M+S

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

215/60 R16 95H M+S

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

215/60 R16 95H M+S

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

215/60 R16 95H M+S

Type of snow chains tobe used

Low profile snow chains withmaximum height off the tyre

of 10mm

269

USING THE CAR AGAIN

Before using the car again after aprolonged period of inactivity, thefollowing operations are recom-mended:

– Do not dry-dust the car body.

– Check for fluid leaks (oil, brakeand clutch fluid, engine coolantetc.).

– Change engine oil and filter.

– Check the level of:

– brake and clutch fluid

– engine coolant.

– Check the air cleaner and changeit, if required.

– Check the tyre pressure and thetyres for signs of damage, cuts orcracks. If this is the case, have themreplaced.

– Check the engine belt conditions.

STORING THE CARThe following precautions should

be taken if the car will not be usedfor several months:

– Park the car in covered, dry andif possible well-ventilated premises.

– Engage a gear.

– If the car is parked on flatground, disengage the electric park-ing brake as described in the rele-vant paragraph.

– Clean and protect the paintedparts using protective wax.

– Sprinkle talcum powder on therubber windscreen and rear windowwiper blades and lift them off theglass.

– Slightly open the windows.

– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar abovethe normal specified pressure, leanthem on wood boards, if possibleand check it at intervals.

– Do not switch the electronicalarm system on.

– Remove the negative cable (-)from the battery terminal and checkthe battery charge. This checkshould be performed every month ifthe car is to be stored for long peri-ods. Recharge the battery if it fallsbelow 12.5V.

IMPORTANT Before opening theluggage compartment bonnet to dis-connect the battery, carefully readand comply with instructions con-tained in the paragraph “If battery isto be disconnected” in the chapter“In an emergency”.

– Do not drain the engine coolingsystem.

– Cover the car with a cloth or per-forated plastic sheet. Do not usesheets of non-perforated plastic asthey do not allow moisture on thebody to evaporate.

270

– Reconnect the negative batteryterminal (-) after checking the bat-tery charge.

IMPORTANT Before connectingthe battery again carefully read andcomply with instructions containedin the paragraph “If battery is to bedisconnected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

– With the gear lever to neutral,start the engine and let it idle a fewminutes, pressing the clutch pedalrepeatedly.

This operation must becarried out outdoor.Exhaust gas contains car-

bon monoxide, an extremelytoxic gas.

USEFULACCESSORIES

In addition to the legal require-ments we recommend keeping thefollowing in the car (fig. 2):

– first-aid kit with non-alcoholicbase disinfectant, sterile gauze, a rollof gauze bandage, plasters, etc.,

– torch,

– round-nosed scissors,

– work gloves,

- fire extinguisher.

These articles are all available fromLineaccessori Lancia range.

fig. 2L0

A01

70b

271

EMERGENCYSTART-UP

If the Lancia CODE system cannotdeactivate the engine immobilisingsystem, symbols Y and U willremain lit on the multifunction dis-play together with messages“ELECTRONIC KEY NOTRECOGNISED” and “ENGINECONTROL SYSTEM FAULT”, andthe engine will not start. Follow theemergency start-up procedure tostart the engine.

Read the whole procedure care-fully before trying to carry it out.

If you make a mistake in the emer-gency procedure you must turn theignition key back to STOP andrepeat the whole operation from thebeginning (step 1).

1) Read the five-digit electroniccode on the CODE card.

2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.

3) Press and hold down the accel-erator pedal. The warning light Uon the instrument panel will light upfor about 8 seconds, and then goout. At this point release the acceler-ator pedal and get ready to count theflashes of the warning light U.

4) Count the number of flashesthat corresponds to the first figure ofthe code on the CODE card, thenpress the accelerator pedal and keepit down until the U warning lightcomes on for four seconds and thengoes out. Release the acceleratorpedal.

5) The U warning light will startflashing again: after it has flashedthe number of times that corre-sponds to the second figure on theCODE card, press the acceleratorpedal to the floor and keep it there.

6) Do the same for the remainingdigits on the CODE card.

7) Once the final figure has beenentered, keep the accelerator pedalpressed. The U warning light willlight up for 4 seconds and then goout. Release the accelerator pedal.

8) The U warning light will flashrapidly for about 4 seconds to indi-cate that the operation has beencompleted correctly.

9) Start the engine by turning theignition key from MAR to AVV(without turning it to STOP).

If, however, warning light U stayson, turn the ignition key to STOPand repeat the procedure from step1).

IMPORTANT After an emergencystart, you should contact a LanciaDealership immediately as you willhave to repeat the proceduredescribed each time you want tostart the engine.

IN AN EMERGENCY

272

JUMP STARTINGIf the battery is flat, you can use

another battery to start the engine.Its capacity must be the same orslightly greater than the flat battery(see the “Technical Specification”chapter).

The battery is placed on the leftside of the boot, protected by acover.


connect an auxiliary battery,carefully read and comply withthe instructions contained in theparagraph “If battery is to be dis-connected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

Jump starting does not damage theLancia CODE system. Proceed asfollows:

1) Disconnect all electrical devicesthat are not strictly useful.

2) Lift the boot tailgate by turningthe key metal insert clockwise in thelatch.

3) Loosen the knob A (fig. 1) andremove the protective cover B.

4) Press flanges A (fig. 2) andremove the cover B.

5) Connect the positive terminals(+) A (fig. 3) and B of the two bat-teries with a jump lead.

6) With a second lead connect firstthe negative terminal (–) C of theauxiliary battery and then the earthbraid D of the car to be started.

fig. 1

L0A

0030

b

fig. 2L0

A00

31b

fig. 3

L0A

0032

b

273

7) Start the engine.

8) When the engine has started,remove the leads in the reverse orderto before: D, C, B and finally A.

IMPORTANT If the engine fails tostart after a few attempts, do not keepturning the key but have the car seento at a Lancia Dealership.

9) Put the cover back on the bat-tery positive terminal by fitting thelock flanges in.

10) Put the cover back and retight-en the knob.

11) Close the boot tailgate.

IMPORTANT When the tailgate isclosed, the boot latch is not locked.To lock it, turn the metal insert ofthe key anticlockwise in the latch.

Do not carry out thisprocedure if you lackexperience: if it is not

done correctly it can cause veryintense electrical discharges andthe battery might even explode.Do not to put naked flames orlighted cigarettes near the batteryand do not cause sparks: risk ofexplosion and fire.

Never use a batterycharger to jump start theengine: you could damage

the electronic system, with spe-cial reference to ignition andinjection control unit.

BUMP STARTING Do not bump start by pushing,

towing or coasting downhill. Thisway of starting could cause a rush offuel into the catalytic converter anddamage it beyond repair.

Remember that if the engine is notrunning, the brake booster and thepower steering will not work. Youtherefore have to use considerablymore effort on both the brake pedaland the steering wheel.

Never connect the nega-tive terminals of the twobatteries directly: sparks

could ignite the flammable gasfrom the battery. If the auxiliarybattery is installed on anothercar, prevent accidental contactbetween the metal parts of thetwo vehicles.

274

Signal the presence ofthe stopped car accordingto the laws in force: haz-

ard lights, reflecting triangle, etc.Passengers should get out of the

car and stay clear from oncomingtraffic while the wheel is beingchanged.

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED

Follow the instructions on this andthe following pages to use the jackand the spare wheel correctly.

If the wheel is beingchanged on a steep orbadly surfaced road,

place wedges or other suitablematerial under the wheels to stopthe car from moving.

Have the punctured tyrerepaired and fitted back as soonas possible. Do not lubricate thebolt threads before fitting themback: they could come loose.

Wheel bolts are specificfor the type of rim (alloyor steel) fitted. Never use,

also if in an emergency, wheelbolts for another type of rim.When changing rims (alloy rimsinstead of steel ones or viceversa), also the whole wheel boltset shall be changed with otherbolts specific for the new type ofrim adopted.

The jack should only beused to change a wheel onthe car for which it was

designed. It should not be put toother uses or employed to raiseother models of car. Under nocircumstances should it be usedwhen carrying out repairs underthe car.

An incorrectly positioned jackmay cause the car to fall.

Do not use the jack to lift loadsexceeding those indicated on thelabel attached to the jack itself.

The wheel cap may fly off whenthe car is moving if it is not fas-tened correctly. Never tamperwith the inflation valve. Do notinsert tools between the rim andthe tyre.

Check the tyre and spare wheelpressure regularly. Tyre pressureis shown in the “TechnicalSpecifications” chapter.

275

CHANGINGA WHEEL

Please note:

– the jack weighs 2.100 kg;

– the jack requires no adjustments;

– the jack cannot be repaired. If itbreaks, it must be replaced with agenuine spare part;

– no other tool, part from theratchet wrench, can be fitted to thejack.

Change the wheel as follows:

1) Stop the car so that it is not ahazard for other road users or your-self when changing the wheel. Theground should be as flat and firm aspossible.

2) Turn engine off and engage theelectric parking brake.

3) Engage first gear or reverse. Onversions with automatic gearboxshift the lever to P.

4) Open the boot.

5) Fold the boot carpet A (fig. 4).

6) Take out the warning triangle A(fig. 5) and the tool kit B.

7) Release the locking device A(fig. 6) and take out the jack holderB and the spare wheel C, then placethem next to the wheel to bechanged.

fig. 4

L0A

0033

b

fig. 5L0

A00

34b

fig. 6

L0A

0035

b

276

8) Unscrew manually the jack han-dle A (fig. 7) and remove it from thecontainer B.

9) Open the tool bag and take outthe tools to be used (fig. 8):

1 – tow ring

2 – flat/cross-head screwdriver

3 – ratchet wrench

4 – ratchet wrench bush

5 – wheel bolt (for versions withalloy rims)

6 – tool for removing the hub cap(for versions with alloy rims)

7 – bush for unscrewing/screwingthe wheel bolts by hand

8 – wrench for power steering re-servoir cap screws

9 – wrench for actuating the sun-roof in an emergency (where fitted)

10) On versions with alloy rims,remove the press-fit wheel hub capA (fig. 9), pulling it by tool B fittedinto C. On versions with steel rims,remove the press-fit wheel cap A(fig. 10).

fig. 8

L0A

0326

b

fig. 7

L0A

0038

b

fig. 9L0

A60

24b

fig. 10

L0A

6025

b

277

13) Position the jack under the carnear the wheel to be replaced in thepoint shown on the panelling atapproximately 20 cm from the fend-er edge, as shown in (fig. 12).

11) Place the bushing A (fig. 11)for the wheel bolts on the ratchetwrench B.

IMPORTANT The ratchet wrenchmust be used on one side to unscrewand on the other side to screw.

12) Loosen the wheel bolts byabout one turn, then rock the car tomake it easier to remove the rimfrom the wheel hub.

Warn anyone nearbythat the car is about to belifted. They must stay

clear and not touch the car untilit is back on the ground.

fig. 12

L0A

6026

b

fig. 11

L0A

0037

b

278

15) Insert the ratchet wrench A(fig. 14) with the bolt bush B on thejack groove.

IMPORTANT The ratchet wrenchmust be used on one side to unscrewand on the other side to screw.

16) Turn the jack handle and liftthe car until the tyre is a few cen-timetres off the ground.

17) Loosen the wheel bolts andremove the wheel.

IMPORTANT To make this opera-tion easier, use the proper bolt bushA (fig. 15).

18) Make sure the surfaces of thespare wheel that come into contactwith the hub are clean and free fromany impurities which could result inthe wheel bolts working loose.

fig. 15

L0A

0328

b

fig. 13

L0A

0040

b

14) Turn the jack handle A(fig. 13) by hand so to open it par-tially and position the jack under thecar.

Turn the jack handle until the jackgroove B fits onto the bottom edge Cof the underbody correctly.

fig. 14L0

A00

41b

279

19) On versions with alloy rims, tomake the wheel fitting easier, screwthe pin A (fig. 16), provided in thetool kit, to the hub and then placethe wheel and tighten up the fourbolts in the free holes. Finally,unscrew pin A and screw the lastbolt.

On versions with steel rims, fit thewheel making pin A (fig. 17) coin-cide with one of the holes B.

IMPORTANT To make bolt tight-ening easier, use the proper boltbush A (fig. 15).

Wheel bolts are specificfor the type of rim (alloyor steel) fitted. Never use,

also if in an emergency, wheelbolts for another type of rim.When changing rims (alloy rimsinstead of steel ones or viceversa), also the whole wheel boltset shall be changed with otherbolts specific for the new type ofrim adopted.

20) Lower the car and remove thejack (fig. 18).

fig. 16

L0A

0043

b

fig. 17L0

A03

66b

fig. 18

L0A

0044

b

280

Bolt tightening torquemust be 98 Nm (10 kgm).

After replacing thewheel, you are advised to havethe wheel bolt tightening checkedat a Lancia Dealership as soon aspossible.

Insufficient tightening couldactually make the wheel boltsloosen too much, with clearlydangerous consequences. If thebolts are tightened too much, theycould be damaged and theirresistance might be compro-mised.

23) Place the removed wheel, thejack and the tools in the boot andfasten appropriately.

IMPORTANT Put the jack backinto B (fig. 8) and clamp it byscrewing handle A (fig. 8) manuallyin order to prevent vibrations duringtravelling.

fig. 19

L0A

0045

b

fig. 20L0

A03

65b

fig. 21

L0A

6027

b

21) Tighten up the wheel bolts in acriss-cross fashion, following thesequence shown:

- fig. 19 = versions with alloy rims- fig. 20 = versions with steel rims.

22) On versions with alloy rims,refit the wheel hub cap pressing itslightly. On versions with steel rims,approach the wheel cap making theinflating valve A (fig. 21) coincidewith flaring B. Press the cap circum-ference starting near the inflatingvalve and proceeding until fittingthe cap completely.

IMPORTANT The wheel hub cap(alloy rims) or the wheel cap (steelrims) may fly off when the car ismoving if it is not fastened correctly.

281

You should, where pos-sible, have your bulbschanged at a Lancia

Dealership. The correct operationand slant of headlights is essen-tial for safe driving and compli-ance with legal requirements.

IF A BULB BURNS OUT

Modifications or repairsto the electrical systemcarried out incorrectly

and without bearing the featuresof the system in mind can causemalfunctions with the risk of fire.

The bulbs of (bi-Xeno)gas-discharge headlightsmust be replaced by a

Lancia Dealership.

Only touch the metalpart when handling halo-gen bulbs. You will

reduce the light intensity andpossibly compromise bulb life bytouching the glass bulb. If youtouch the bulb accidentally, rubit with a cloth moistened withalcohol and leave it to dry.

Halogen bulbs containpressurised gas which, ifbroken, may cause small

fragments of glass to be projectedoutwards.

Due to high voltage, thebulb of bi-Xeno gas-dis-charge headlights must

only be replaced by experts: dan-ger of death! Contact the LanciaDealership.

282

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

– When a light is not working,check that it has not fused beforechanging the bulb.

– For the location of the fuses, referto “If a fuse blows” in this chapter.

– Before replacing a bulb that doesnot work, check that the contacts arenot oxidised.

– Burnt-out bulbs must be replacedwith ones of the same type andpower.

– Always check the slant of theheadlight beam after changing abulb for safety reasons.

TYPES OF BULBS

Different types of bulbs areinstalled in the car (fig. 22):

A - All glass bulbs

Snapped into position. Pull toremove.

B - Bayonet connection bulbs

Remove from the bulb holder bypressing the bulb and rotating itanticlockwise.

C - Cylindrical bulbs

Remove by pulling away from ter-minals.

D - E Halogen bulbs

To remove the bulb, release theclip holding the bulb in place.

L0A

0105

b

fig. 22

283

Bulb

Main beam headlights/Dipped beam headlights

Additional main beam headlights

Front sidelights

Front direction indicators

Side direction indicators

Rear direction indicators

Front fog lights

Taillights

Brake lights

Third brake light

Reversing light

Rear fog lights

Number plate light

Front ceiling light

Courtesy lights

Rear ceiling light

Courtesy mirrors

Glove compartment

Boot

Doors

Power

35W

55W

6W

21W

5W

–

55W

–

–

–

21W

21W

5W

10W

5W

5W

5W

5W

10W

5W

Type

Gas-discharge

H7

H6W

H21W

WY5W

LED

H3

LED

LED

LED

P21W

P21W

C5W

Halogen

Halogen

Halogen

C5W

W5W

Halogen

W5W

Ref. figure 22

–

E

B

B

A

–

E

–

–

–

B

B

C

A

A

A

C

A

A

A

284

IF AN EXTERIORBULB BURNS OUT

FRONT LIGHT CLUSTER

The front light cluster includesmain beam headlights/dipped beamheadlights, additional main beamheadlights, direction indicators andsidelights.

Light layout is the following (fig. 23):

A – Main beam headlight/dippedbeam headlight (bi-Xeno bulb)

B – Sidelight

C – Additional main beam head-light

D – Direction indicator.

Any operation on thefront light cluster must bemade with the stalk at 0

(lights off) and ignition keyremoved for at least 15 minutes(to let bulb cooling and con-densers discharging): risk of elec-trical discharge!

fig. 23

L0A

0106

bTo replace front head-

light bulbs, front lightclusters shall be removed.

It is therefore recommended tothe bulbs replaced at LanciaDealership.

Due to high voltage, thebulb of bi-Xeno gas-dis-charge headlights must

only be replaced by experts: dan-ger of death! Contact the LanciaDealership.

285

SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS(fig. 25)

To replace the bulb:

1) Push the lens in direction 1,press tab A and remove the clusterfrom the back 2.

2) Turn the direction indicatoranticlockwise and remove the bulbholder B.

3) Remove bulb C and replace it.

4) Refit the direction indicator inthe bulb holder turning it clockwise.

5) Refit the direction indicator onthe fender first inserting the frontpart and then pressing the rear partuntil it fits.

If the front fog lights arenot adjusted properly,they could annoy other

drivers. Contact a LanciaDealership for a check and anyrequired adjustments.

fig. 24

L0A

0154

b

fig. 25

L0A

0121

b

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (whereprovided) (fig. 24)

To replace front fog lights it is nec-essary to operate under the vehicle,after removing the protective coverunder the engine. For this reason, itis suggested to have the bulbsreplaced at a Lancia Dealership.

286

REAR LIGHT CLUSTER (fig. 26)

Taillights, direction indicators andbrake lights consists of leds built-into the rear light cluster.

If the lights break down partiallyor completely go to a LanciaDealership.

REVERSING LIGHT AND REARFOG LIGHTS

Reversing lights and rear fog lightsare housed in the tailgate.

To replace the bulbs:

1) Open the tailgate and lift thecovering A (fig. 27) near the bulb tobe replaced.

2) Loosen the screw B and removethe bulb holder C.

3) Remove the clipped in glassbulbs (fig. 28).

D - B type, 12V-P21W bulb forreversing light.

E - B type, 12V-P21W bulb forrear fog light.

4) After replacing the bulbs, refitthe bulb holder and fasten it withthe screw.

5) Lower the tailgate cover.

fig. 26

L0A

0123

b

fig. 27L0

A01

24b

fig. 28

L0A

0125

b

287

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS (fig. 29)


1) Remove the lens using a screw-driver as a lever in point A.

2) Remove the bulb B by releasingthe side contacts and then replace it.

3) Refit the lens by inserting it firstfrom side C and then by pressing iton the other side until it fits.

ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHT(THIRD BRAKE LIGHT) (fig. 30)

If the third brake light breaksdown partially or completely go to aLancia Dealership.

IF AN INTERIORBULB BURNS OUT

FRONT CEILING LIGHT


1) Remove the clipped in caps Aand B (fig. 31) by levering with ascrewdriver on the external part.

fig. 29

L0A

0126

b

fig. 30L0

A02

87b

fig. 31

L0A

0129

b

288

2) Loosen the screws C (fig. 32)and remove the ceiling light.

3) To remove bulb holders turnthem anticlockwise (fig. 33).

D - Central ceiling light bulb.

E - Courtesy light bulbs.

4) Remove the clipped in glassbulbs from the bulb holder andreplace them.

5) Insert the bulb holders and turnthem clockwise.

6) Refit the ceiling light and secureit with the screws.

7) Refit the clipped in caps.

IMPORTANT When refitting theceiling light check that the electricalwires are positioned correctly.

REAR CEILING LIGHT


1) Remove the ceiling light by lev-ering with a screwdriver on the frontedge (fig. 34).

2) To remove bulb holders turnthem anticlockwise (fig. 35).

fig. 32

L0A

0130

b

fig. 33L0

A01

31b

fig. 34

L0A

0288

b

289

A - Central ceiling light bulb.

B - Courtesy light bulbs.

3) Remove clipped in glass bulbsfrom the bulb holders and replacethem.

4) Insert the bulb holders and turnthem clockwise.

5) Refit the ceiling light by insert-ing first the rear part and thenpressing the front part until it fits.

IMPORTANT When refitting theceiling light check that the electricalwires are positioned correctly.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT


1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A(fig. 36).

2) Press the two sides of shield B(fig. 37) at the fastening clips andturn it.

3) Replace the clipped in bulb C.

4) Close the shield B by clipping itinto its housing.

5) Refit the lens by inserting side D(fig. 36) first and then pressing theother side to engage clip A.

fig. 37

L0A

0135

b

fig. 36L0

A01

34b

fig. 35

L0A

0133

b

290

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHTS

To replace the courtesy mirrorbulbs:

1) Lift the mirror cover A (fig. 38).

2) Remove the mirror by leveringin B.

IMPORTANT Be very carefulwhen removing the mirror to avoiddamaging its frame and the mirroritself.

3) Remove the bulbs C (fig. 39)releasing them from the side con-tacts and replace them.

4) Refit the mirror inserting firstthe upper edge and then pressing thelower edge until it fits.

BOOT LIGHT


1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A(fig. 40).

2) Press the two sides of shield B(fig. 41) at the fastening clips andremove it.

fig. 38

L0A

0136

b

fig. 39L0

A01

37b

fig. 40

L0A

0139

b

291

3) Replace the clipped in bulb C .

4) Close the shield by clipping itinto its housing.

5) Refit the lens by inserting side Dfirst and then pressing the other sideto engage clip A.

DOOR LIGHTS (fig. 42)


1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Press the two sides of shield B atthe fastening clips and turn it.


4) Close the shield B by clipping itinto its housing.

5) Refit the lens by inserting side Dfirst and then pressing the other sideto engage clip A.

DOOR MIRROR LIGHTS (fig. 43)


1) Remove the lens by using ascrewdriver as a lever on clip A.

2) Remove the bulb holder B byturning it anticlockwise.


4) Insert the bulb holder and turnit clockwise.

5) Refit the lens by inserting side Dfirst and then pressing the other sideto fit it.

fig. 42L0

A01

38b

fig. 43

L0A

0141

b

fig. 41

L0A

0140

b

292

IF A FUSE BLOWS

GENERAL (fig. 67)

The fuse is a protective device forthe electric system. It comes intoaction (i.e. it cuts off) in the event ofa failure or improper actions on theelectric system.

If an electrical device is not work-ing, check whether the respectivefuse is blown. The conductor shouldnot be broken. If it is, replace it withanother with the same amperage(same colour).

A - Undamaged fuse

B - Fuse with broken filament.

Use the tongs C to extract a fuse tobe replaced. The tongs are to befound in the main fuse box.

Before changing a fuse,check the ignition key hasbeen removed and that all

the other electrical devices havebeen switched off.

fig. 67

L0A

0127

b

Never replace a fusewith metal wires or any-thing else. Always use an

intact fuse of the same colour(same value).

Never change a fuse withanother of higher amper-age: FIRE RISK!

If a general fuse (MIDI-FUSE or MEGA-FUSE)blows, do not repair it,

but go to a Lancia Dealership.

If the fuse blows again,have the car inspected at aLancia Dealership.

293

FUSE LOCATION

The main fuses of THESIS are con-tained into four fuse boxes, to befound on the left side of the dash-board, in the engine compartment,on the battery and in the right sidecompartment of the boot.

GENERAL FUSES (MIDI-FUSE and MEGA-FUSE)

The car is fitted with a set of gen-eral fuses (MIDI-FUSE and MEGA-FUSE) which separately protect thevarious electrical system functions inaddition to the individual devicefuses.

The general fuses are located in theleft side of the boot in a fusebox direct-ly connected to the positive batteryterminal.

To reach the fuses:

1) Open the tailgate.

2) Loosen knob A (fig. 68) andremove the battery cover B.

3) Press tabs A (fig. 69) andremove the cover B.

The systems and devices protectedby the general fuses (fig. 70) arelisted on the following pages.

fig. 68

L0A

0030

bfig. 69

L0A

0031

bfig. 70

L0A

0142

b

294

FUSES IN THE DASHBOARD

The fuses protecting the maindevices are arranged in a fuseboxlocated under the dashboard, on theleft of the steering column, behindthe glove compartment (fig. 72).

To reach the fuses open the glovecompartment A (fig. 71) and thenremove it by loosing the two screws Bwith a screwdriver. After replacingthe fuses, refit the glove compart-ment and secure it by the two screws.

The fusebox also contains tongs forremoving the fuses.

Spare fuses A (fig. 72) are housed inhorizontal position in the upper part ofthe fusebox. The spare fuse presentvarious amperages.

The devices protected by the fuses(fig. 73) are listed in the tables onthe following pages.

IMPORTANT Remember toreplace the spare fuse after replacinga fuse.

FUSES IN THE ENGINE COM-PARTMENT

The fusebox is located on the leftside of the engine compartment.

To reach the fuses remove thecover A (fig. 74) after releasing thefastening clips B.

fig. 71

L0A

0144

b

fig. 72

L0A

0143

bfig. 73

L0A

0265

bfig. 74

L0A

0145

b

295

The devices protected by the fuses (fig. 75) are listed in the tables onthe following pages.

After replacing the fuses refit thecover by refitting the fastening clips.

FUSES IN THE BOOT

The fusebox (fig. 77) is located onthe right side of the boot, inside theservice compartment.

To open the compartment flap turnthe catch A (fig. 76) to 1 with theignition key and lower it.

The spare fuses, with differentamperage, are housed in verticalposition at the sides of the fusebox.

The devices protected by the fuses (fig. 78) are listed in the tables onthe following pages.

fig. 75

L0A

0267

b

fig. 76L0

A02

75b

fig. 77

L0A

0146

b

fig. 78

L0A

0266

b

296

MIDI-FUSE and MEGA-FUSE

Dashboard fusebox 1

Dashboard fusebox 2

Boot fusebox

Engine compartment fusebox

Fuse

1

2

3

4

Ampere

70

50

60

150

Location

fig. 70

fig. 70

fig. 70

fig. 70

Exterior lights

External light control (twilight sensor adjustment)


Right-hand main beam headlight

Left-hand main beam headlight

Right-hand dipped beam headlight

Left-hand dipped beam headlight

Reversing light

Third brake light

Hazard lights

Front fog lights

Fuse

23

16

8

10

24

25

21

14

16

14

Ampere

7.5

10

10

10

15

15

7.5

10

10

15

Location

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 75

297

Interior lights

Boot ceiling light

Passenger compartment rear ceiling light

Door puddle lights

(*) As an alternative for certain versions/markets

Fuse

19 (*)13 (*)

19 (*)13 (*)

19 (*)13 (*)

Ampere

1010

1010

1010

Location

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 78fig. 73

Fuse

1-6-8-12-17-18-21-23

22

18

9

5

7

3

11

19

21

1425

1

15

Ampere

–

20

7.5

20

20

25

25

20

15

7.5

1015

10

7.5

Location

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

Devices and utilities

Available

Cigar lighter

Air bag

Power supply point boot 1

Power supply point boot 2

Amplifier for sound system with HI-FI system

Rear head restraints (tilting)

Boot (electrified lock actuator)

Spark plugs (petrol versions)

Engine compartment relay coils

Headlight beam adjustment control unit

Trailer control unit (presetting)

Power steering control unit

298


Horn

Windscreen wiper controls

Brake light control (NC)

Brake light control (NA)

Ignition switch

Air conditioner compressor

Cruise Control (satellite controls)

Cruise Control (Adaptive point)

Climate control system fan

Engine cooling electric fan (first)

Engine cooling electric fan (second)

Right-hand headlight (control unit)

Left-hand headlight (control unit)

Diesel fuel filter (PTC)

Electronic injection system

Injectors (diesel versions)

Driving position point interface

Automatic transmission point interface

Climate control system point interface

Fuse

11

23

20

14

7

12

20

20

5

3

4

10

10

16

13

19

14

1523

615

Ampere

15

7.5

7.5

10

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

40

60

20

7.5

7.5

20

7.5

20

20

107.5

107.5

Location

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 78

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 73fig. 73

299


Engine control system point interface

Brake system point interface

Headlight washers

Heated rear window

Automatic gearbox starter

NIM

Passenger position point

Steering lock point

Brake Assistant point(*) As an alternative for certain versions/markets

Braking system point (NFR 1)

Braking system point (NFR 2)

Infotelematic point

Yaw Lateral point(*) As an alternative for certain versions/markets

Keyless System point

Driver door point

Driver door point (power supply)

Passenger door point

Fuse

22

29

15

17

17

6

14

22

19 (*)13 (*)

19

1

6

6

19 (*)13 (*)

19

22

11

8

1123

Ampere

7.5

7.5

20

30

30

10

10

10

10107.5

40

40

10

10107.5

10

20

20

207.5

Location

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78fig. 73fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 73


fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 73

fig. 78fig. 73

300


Passenger door point (power supply)

Instrument panel point

Steering angle sensor point(*) As an alternative for certain versions/markets

Parking sensor point

TV tuner point

Boot point

Steering wheel point

Central console control panels

Fuel pump

Doors (electrified lock actuators)

Spark plug pre-heating

EOBD system diagnostic socket

Current socket in boot

Current socket in rear armrest

Parking heater (control unit)

Additional heater

Fuse

10

1416

19 (*)13 (*)

19

15

1415

11

15

15

21

11

2

6

22

132

3

49

Ampere

20

1010

10107.5

7.5

107.5

20

7.5

7.5

15

20

60

10

20

2015

20

5020

Location

fig. 73

fig. 73fig. 73


fig. 73

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 75

fig. 78

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 78fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 75fig. 75

301


Heated windscreen defroster

Windscreen wiper nozzle defroster

SCS

Comfort driver’s seat

Comfort front passenger’s seat

Electric driver’s seat (movement)

Electric front passenger’s seat (movement)

Front seats (heating)

Rear seats (heating)

Primary services for electronic injection

Secondary services for electronic injection

Alarm siren (control unit)

Fuel flap (locking/unlocking ratiomotor)

Rear window sun visor

Windscreen wiper and washer

Sunroof (control unit)

Steering wheel (steering column adjustment)

Ampere

15

15

7.5

30

30

30

30

20

20

15

15

10

10

15

30

1520

7.5

Location

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 78

fig. 75

fig. 75

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73

fig. 73fig. 78

fig. 73

Fuse

7

7

15

5

9

5

9

16

20

20

18

6

11

4

12

42

15

302

IF BATTERY IS TO BE DISCONNECTED

Battery is housed on the left side ofthe luggage compartment, protectedby cover B (fig. 79). To remove coverunscrew knob A.

DISCONNECTING THE LOADED BATTERY

Should the charged battery be dis-connected (e.g. during a car inactivitytime) perform these operations in thegiven order:

1) Depress the push button on thecentral console or on the remote con-trol to open the boot.

2) Depress manually the inside hookA (fig. 80) of the boot lock, and pushit back completely until the recallelectric travel is activated.

3) Remove the cover and disconnectbattery terminals.

4) Fully turn anti-clockwise the keyinto the outside bonnet lock to pullout the locking hook (fig. 81).

5) If necessary, it is now possible tofully close the boot, leaving the bat-tery disconnected.

6) When the battery it to be con-nected again, to open the bonnet, fully

fig. 79

L0A

0030

b

fig. 80L0

A03

32b

turn the key anticlockwise in the lock,and at the same time slightly press thelower edge of the number plate holderto reduce operation effort (fig. 81).

7) Connect battery terminals and as-semble the cover again.

8) Depress push button A (fig. 81)to restore normal lock operation.

9) Normally close the boot withoutslamming it down; the lock electricservo control will fully lock it.

10) Perform the initialisation of thedoor lock, air conditioner and ESPsystem control units, described below.

fig. 81

L0A

6022

b

303

DISCONNECTING THEUNLOADED BATTERY

Should the discharged battery bedisconnected (to have it chargedagain or to replace it) perform the fol-lowing operations in the given order:

1) To open the boot from the out-side, fully turn the key anticlockwisein the lock (fig. 81), and at the sametime slightly press the lower edge ofthe number plate holder to reduce op-eration effort.

2) Remove the cover and disconnectthe battery terminals.

3) Fully charge the battery again orreplace it.

4) Connect battery terminals and re-assemble cover.

5) Depress push button A (fig. 81)to restore normal lock operation.

6) Close boot normally withoutslamming it down: lock electric servocontrol will fully lock it.

7) Perform the initialisation proce-dure of the door lock, air conditionerand ESP system control units, here-after described.

INITIALISING THE CONTROLUNITS OF THE DOOR LOCKS,AIR CONDITIONER AND ESPSYSTEM

Whenever the battery is connectedelectrically or protection fuses are re-placed, to restore correct door locking,air conditioning and ESP system, per-form the following operations (afterconnection is performed or after re-placing one of the fuses):

1) Enter key into the lock of one ofthe front doors and perform a doorcentralised opening/closing cycle.

2) Start the engine and turn on thecompressor of the conditioner, settinga lower temperature value than thatof the environment and checkwhether the led on the disconnectionpush button of the conditioner com-pressor ò is lit.

3) Start running the car and drive itfor a few meters in a straight line (ac-celerating), until the ESP warninglight is off á.

It is not possible to closethe boot when battery isdischarged or discon-

nected for the purpose of being re-placed/ charged again: do not tryto close the boot by slamming itdown. The boot remains anyhowhooked on and it must be re-opened by turning the key in thelock.

304

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT

First of all, read the “Car mainte-nance” chapter for the steps to betaken to avoid the battery runningdown and to ensure it has a long life.

RECHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The description ofthe battery recharging procedure isjust for information. To carry outthis procedure go to a LanciaDealership.

You are advised to recharge thebattery slowly for a period ofapproximately 24 hours at a lowamperage. Charging for too longcould damage the battery.

Before reloading, care-fully read and comply withthe instructions contained

in the previous paragraph “If bat-tery is to be disconnected”.

Proceed as follows:

– Disconnect the terminal from thebattery negative pole (-).

– Connect the charger cables to thebattery terminals (observe polarity).

– Turn on the charger.

– When you have finished, turn thecharger off before disconnecting thebattery.

– Reconnect the terminal to thebattery negative pole (-).

The liquid in the batteryis poisonous and corro-sive. Do not let it touch

the skin or eyes. Recharging thebattery should be done in a well-ventilated area and away fromnaked flames or possible sourcesof sparks: explosion and fire risk.

JUMP STARTING

See “Jump starting” in this chap-ter.

305

Under no circumstancesshould a battery chargerbe used to start the

engine: it could damage the elec-tronic systems and in particularthe ignition and injection controlunits.

Carefully clean thethreading before fasteningthe tow ring. Before start-

ing to tow the car, make sure thering has been fully fastened.

Never try to charge afrozen battery: first let itthaw out, otherwise it

may bust. If the battery hasfrozen, check that the internalelements are not broken (risk ofshort circuit) and that the casingis not cracked causing the acid toleak out. This acid is poisonousand corrosive.

TOWING THE CARThe tow ring provided with the car

is to be found in the tool box underthe boot carpet.

To fit the tow ring proceed as fol-lows:

– Remove the clipped in A coverfrom the front (fig. 82) or rearbumper (fig. 83), by using a screw-driver as a lever in the point shownin the figure.

IMPORTANT To carry out thisoperation, if you use the providedflat-head screwdriver, cover its headwith a piece of cloth to prevent paintdamaging.

– Screw the tow ring B in its hous-ing.

fig. 82L0

A00

90b

fig. 83

L0A

0091

b

306

Before towing the car,disengage the parkingbrake by following the

instructions described in the rel-evant paragraph, and leave theKeyless System CID device (ifprovided) inside the passengercompartment, to avoid automaticsteering column lock. Do not towthe car with the engine running.

Before starting to tow,turn the ignition key toMAR and then to STOP.

Do not remove the key. If the keyis removed, the steering lockengages automatically which pre-vents the wheels being turned.Disengage the handbrake. Whilethe car is being towed with theengine off, remember that thebrake pedal and steering willrequire more effort as you nolonger have the benefit of thebrake booster and power steer-ing. Do not use flexible cables totow. Avoid jerking. Whilst tow-ing, ensure that the coupling tothe car does not damage the sur-rounding components. Whentowing, you must comply with thespecific traffic regulationsregarding the tow ring and how totow on the road.

IMPORTANT For versions withautomatic gearbox, check that theselector is in neutral (selector to N),that the car is moving becausepushed and act as for towing a carwith the manual gearbox, followingthe above mentioned procedure.

If you cannot set the gear lever toneutral, do not tow the car but con-tact a Lancia Dealership.

IMPORTANT On versions fittedwith an identification system (KeylessSystem), user is not authorised tomove the car unless the start-up knobis turned to the position MAR. Shouldit be necessary to tow the car, it is ad-vised to turn the knob to positionMAR before moving the car.

307

WITH AN ARM HOIST OR ASHOP JACK

The car can only be jacked up bypositioning the jack arms or the shopjack in the areas shown in fig. 84.

An incorrectly posi-tioned jack may cause thecar to fall. Do not use the

jack to lift loads exceeding thoseindicated on the label attached tothe jack itself.

Be very careful not tosqueeze the brake pipes,the fuel pipes or the side

member ribbing.

fig. 84

L0A

6026

b

JACKING THE CARWITH THE JACK

See “If a tyre is punctured”, in thischapter.

Please note:– the jack weighs 2.100 kg;– the jack requires no adjustments;– the jack cannot be repaired. If it

breaks, it must be replaced with anew jack.

The jack should only beused to change a wheel onthe car for which it was

designed. It should not be put toother uses or employed to raiseother models. Under no circum-stances should it be used whencarrying out repairs under thecar.

308

– In pile-ups on the motorway,particularly when the visibility isbad, there is a high risk of othervehicles running into those alreadystopped. Get out of the car immedi-ately and take refuge behind theguard rail.

– If the doors are blocked, do notattempt to smash the windscreen toget out of the car. It is made of lay-ered glass and is very hard. Side andrear window are much more easilybroken.

– Remove the ignition keys fromthe vehicles involved.

– If you can smell petrol or otherchemicals, do not smoke and makesure all cigarettes are extinguished.

– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket,sand or earth to put out fires nomatter how small they are. Neveruse water.

– If it is not necessary to use the carlight system, disconnect the negativeterminal (–) from the battery pole.

IF ANYONE IS INJURED

Never leave the injured person alone.The obligation to provide assistanceexists even for those not directly in-volved in the accident

– Do not congregate around the in-jured person

– Reassure the injured person thathelp is on its way and will arrive soon.Stay close by to calm him/her downin case of panic

– Unfasten or cut seat belts holdinginjured parties

– Do not give an injured person any-thing to drink.

– Do not move an injured person un-less the following situations arise

– Pull the injured person from thecar only if it risks catching fire, it issinking in water or is likely to fall overa cliff or similar. Do not pull his/herarms or legs, do not bend the headand, as far as possible, keep the bodyhorizontal.

IF AN ACCIDENTOCCURS

– It is important to keep calm.

– If you are not directly involved inthe accident, stop at least ten metresaway from the accident.

– If you are on a motorway do notobstruct the emergency lane withyour car.

– Turn off the engine and turn onthe hazard lights.

– At night, illuminate the scene ofthe accident with your headlights.

– Act carefully, you must not riskbeing run over.

– Mark the accident by putting thered triangle at the regulatory dis-tance from the car where it can beclearly seen.

– Call for rescue making the infor-mation you give as accurate as youcan. On the motorway use the spe-cial column-mounted emergencyphones.

309

FIRST-AID KIT (fig. 85)

The first-aid kit must at least con-tain

– sterile gauze for covering andcleansing wounds

– bandages of different heights

– antiseptic plasters of different sizes

– a roll of plaster

– a pack of cotton wool

– a bottle of disinfectant

– a packet of paper handkerchiefs

– a pair of scissors with rounded tips

– a pair of tweezers

– two haemostatic loops

It is a good idea to keep a fire extin-guisher and blanket in the car in ad-dition to the first-aid kit.

The first-aid kit and the fire extin-guisher are included in the Lineac-cessori Lancia range.

fig. 85

L0A

0128

b

311

SCHEDULEDSERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car isessential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition for a long time tocome.

This is why LANCIA has pro-grammed a number of service oper-ations every 20,000 kilometres:

IMPORTANT The Manufacturerrequires the Service Schedulecoupon related checks to be carriedout. Failure to do so could result inthe warranty being cancelled forthose defects that can be attributedto such failure.

Scheduled Servicing is performedat all Lancia Dealerships andthere is a set time scale for suchoperations.

If it is seen that further replace-ments or repairs are necessary inaddition to the work being carriedout, these will only be done after thecustomer has given his/her consent.

IMPORTANT You are recom-mended to get in touch with aLancia Dealership immediately ifany minor running problems cropup without waiting for the nextcoupon.

CAR MAINTENANCE

312

SERVICE SCHEDULE

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180thousands of kilometres

ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç ç



ç ç ç ç



ç ç

ç ç ç ç


ç ç

ç ç ç ç



Check tyre conditions and wear; adjust pressure, if required

Check primary and secondary battery charge status

Check wear of windscreen/rear window blades

Check rear disc brake pad wear

Inspect conditions of: underbody protection and outsidebodywork, piping (exhaust - fuel lines - brake lines), rubber parts(boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.), brake and fuel line hoses

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Sight check for conditions of Poly-V accessory drive belt

Check diesel engine smokiness in exhaust

Replace fuel filter (JTD versions)

Check fuel evaporation system operation

Replace air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)

Replace air cleaner cartridge (JTD versions)

Check and top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes,hydraulic clutch, power steering, windscreen washer, battery, etc.)

313

Inspect conditions of timing belt

Replacement of timing gear drive belt (*) and Poly-V accessory drive belt

Replace spark plugs (3.2 versions)

Replace spark plugs (2.0 TB)

Check engine control systems via diagnostic socket

Check manual gearbox oil level

Check automatic gearbox oil level

Change engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions)

Change engine oil and oil filter (2.4 JTD CAE version)(**)

Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)

Replace dust/pollen filter (or every year)

Clean engine cooling system

(*) Or every 4 years, in the event of demanding use (cold climate, use in cities, long idling, dusty areas).Or every five years, regardless of the distance travelled.

(**) Actual interval for changing engine oil and oil filter depends on the conditions of use of the car and it is indicated by the rele-vant message on the display (see section “Warning lights and messages”).

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180thousands of kilometres

ç ç

ç

ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç ç ç

ç ç

ç ç ç ç


(ç) (ç) (ç) (ç) (ç) (ç) (ç) (ç) (ç)

ç ç ç



314

ADDITIONALCHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before longtrips, check and top up as necessary:

– engine coolant level

– brake/hydraulic clutch fluidlevel

– power steering fluid level

– windscreen/rear window andheadlight washer fluid level

– tyre pressure and conditions.

Every 3,000 km check the engineoil level and top up as necessary.

You are recommended to use FLSelenia products that are designedand produced specifically for LAN-CIA cars (see “Capacities” in“Technical Specifications”).

ANNUALINSPECTIONSCHEDULEThe following annual inspectionschedule is recommended forcars travelling less than 20,000km a year (e.g. approximately10,000 km). The scheduleincludes the following opera-tions:

1) Check tyre condition and wearand adjust pressure (including sparewheel)

2) Check wear on windscreen/rearwindow blades

3) Check rear disc brake pad con-ditions and wear

4) Inspect conditions of: under-body protection and outside body-work, piping (exhaust - fuel lines -brake lines), rubber parts (boots -sleeves - bushings, etc.), brake andfuel line hoses

5) check for bonnet and boot lockcleanness, lever cleanness and lubri-cation

6) Check primary and secondarybattery charge status

7) Check conditions of various con-trol belts

8) Check and top up fluid levels(engine coolant, brakes, windscreenwasher, battery, etc.)

9) Change engine oil

10) Replace engine oil filter

11) Replace dust/pollen filter.

315

Do not smoke whileworking in the enginecompartment: the pres-

ence of flammable gas andvapour could cause a fire.

Be careful not to mix upthe various types of fluidswhen you are topping up:

they are all mutually incompati-ble and could damage the car.

Maintenance of your carshould be entrusted to aLancia Dealership. For

ordinary routine maintenanceoperations which you are able tocarry out yourself, ensure thatyou have the necessary tools andoriginal Lancia spare parts andfluids available. Do not carry outservicing operations if you haveno experience.

IMPORTANT - Engine oil

If the car is normally driven in oneof the following particularly severeconditions:

– towing a trailer

– on dirty roads

– for short, repeated trips (lessthan 7-8 km) with outside tempera-ture below zero

– with engine frequently idling orfor long distances at low speed (e.g.taxi, door-to-door deliveries) or pro-longed storage

change the engine oil more frequent-ly than shown in the ServiceSchedule.

IMPORTANT - Air cleaner

Replace the air cleaner more fre-quently than shown in the ServiceSchedule if the car is used on dustyroads.

If you are in doubt about how oftenthe engine oil or the air cleanershould be changed in relation to howyou use the car, contact a LanciaDealership.

316

IMPORTANT - Diesel filter

The different grades of purity indiesel fuel normally available mightmake it necessary to replace the fil-ter more frequently than indicatedin the Service Schedule. If the enginemisfires it shows the filter needschanging.

IMPORTANT - Dust/pollen filter

If the car is often used in dusty orextremely polluted environments,you should change the filter elementmore frequently. It should bechanged especially if the amount ofair introduced into the passengercompartment is reduced.

IMPORTANT - Battery

The charge in your battery shouldbe checked, where possible at thestart of the winter, to limit the riskof the battery electrolyte freezing.

This check should be carried outmore frequently if the car is mainlyused for short trips or if it is fittedwith accessories that permanentlytake in electricity even when theignition key is removed, especially inthe case of after market accessories.

If the car is used in very hot cli-mates or particularly demandingconditions check the battery elec-trolyte more frequently than shownin the “Service Schedule” in the“Car maintenance” chapter.

317

CHECKINGFLUID LEVELS

1) Engine oil

2) Brake fluid

3) Windscreen/rear window andheadlight washer fluid

4) Engine coolant

5) Power steering fluid

L0A0343b

L0A0344b

fig. 1 - 2.0 TB version

fig. 2 - 2.4 - 2.4 CAE versions

318

1) Engine oil

2) Brake fluid

3) Windscreen/rear window and headlight washer fluid

4) Engine coolant


L0A0345b

L0A0341b

fig. 3 - 2.4 JTD version

fig. 4 - 2.4 JTD 20V - 2.4 JTD 20V CAE versions

319

1) Engine oil

2) Brake fluid

3) Windscreen/rear window and headlight washer fluid

4) Engine coolant


L0A0342b

L0A0358b

fig. 5 - 3.0 V6 CAE version


320

IMPORTANT After topping up, letthe engine turn for a few secondsand wait a few minutes after stop-ping it before you check the level.

Engine oil consumption

Max. engine oil consumption isusually 400 grams every 1000 km.

When the car is new, the engineneeds to run in, therefore the engineoil consumption can only be consid-ered stabilised after the first 5000 -6000 km.

ENGINE OIL (fig. 7-8-9-10-11-12)

Check engine oil with the car onlevel ground and while the engine isstill warm (approximately five min-utes after stopping the engine).

Remove dipstick A and clean it,than plunge it down and checkwhether the oil level is includedbetween the MIN and MAX refer-ence lines on the dipstick. The gapbetween the MIN and MAX refer-ence lines corresponds to approxi-mately one litre of oil.

Do not add oil with dif-ferent specifications (class,viscosity, etc.) from the oil

already in the engine.

If the oil level is near or even belowthe MIN line, pour in oil through thefiller hole B, until it reaches theMAX line.

IMPORTANT If during a routinecheck you will find that the oil levelis above the MAX reference line,contact a Lancia Dealership tohave the proper level restored.Be very careful under the

bonnet: you risk burningyourself. Remember that

when the engine is hot, the fancan start up and cause injuries.

fig. 7 - 2.0 TB versionL0

A03

23b

fig. 8 - 2.4 - 2.4 CAE versions

L0A

0291

b

321

IMPORTANT The oil consump-tion depends on the driving style andthe conditions under which the car isused.

Used engine oil and re-placed oil filters containsubstances which can harm

the environment. We recommendyou have the car seen to at a Lan-cia Dealership for the oil and filterchange. It is suitably equipped fordisposing of used oil and filters inan environmentally friendly waythat complies with the law.

ENGINE COOLANT (fig. 13)

Do not remove the reser-voir cap when the engine ishot: you risk scalding

yourself!

Check coolant level when the engineis cold and with the car on flatground. The level should be includ-ed between MIN and MAX referencelines on the reservoir.

If the level is low, loosen the reser-voir cap A and top up withPARAFLU UP until reaching theMAX reference line.

fig. 9 - 2.4 JTD version

L0A

0324

b


L0A

0155

bfig. 13

L0A

0292

b

fig. 10 - 2.4 JTD 20V -2.4 JTD 20V CAE versions


L0A

0346

b

L0A

0359

b

322

fig. 14L0

A02

93b

fig. 15

L0A

0158

b

The engine cooling sys-tem works with PARAFLUUP. Top up only with the

same fluid contained in the cool-ing circuit. PARAFLU UP cannotbe mixed up with PARAFLU 11 orother fluids. Should this takeplace, do not start the engine andcontact a Lancia Dealership. Incase of need, lacking the speci-fied fluid, top up with water andcontact a Lancia Dealership tohave the proper proportionsrestored.

The cooling system ispressurised. If necessary,replace the cap with a

genuine spare part to avoid com-promising the system efficiency.The mixture of distilled waterand PARAFLU gives freeze pro-tection down to -35°C.

POWER STEERING FLUID (fig. 14-15)

Fluid level in the reservoir shouldbe at the maximum.

This check should be performedwhen the engine is cold and with thecar on level ground.

For topping up, remove cap A,after loosening the fastening screwsB with the wrench provided (in thetool bag), then remove hose C andloosen cap D.

Check that the level reaches theMAX reference line on the dipstickintegral with the reservoir cap (forcold check use the level indicated onthe 20 °C side of the dipstick).

If the fluid level in the reservoir isbelow the specified one, top up onlywith one of the products shown intable “Fluids and lubricants” inchapter “Technical Specifications”proceeding as follows:

– Start the engine and wait for theoil level in the reservoir to stabilise.

– With the engine running, turn thesteering wheel lock to lock a fewminutes.

– Top up to the MAX reference lineand then refit the cap D.

323

Oil consumption is ex-tremely low. If the oil levelneeds topping up again af-

ter a short period of time, have thesystem checked for leakage at aLancia Dealership.

BRAKE AND HYDRAULICCLUTCH FLUID (fig. 16)

Unscrew cap A: check that the fluidlevel in the reservoir is at maximum.

Fluid level in the reservoir shall notexceed the MAX mark.

If fluid has to be added, it is sug-gested to use the brake fluid in table"Fluids and lubricants" (see chapter"Technical characteristics").

NOTE Clean accurately the tank capA and the surrounding surface.

Prevent brake fluid, whichis highly corrosive, fromcoming into contact with

painted parts. Should it happen,immediately wash with water.

Do not let the powersteering fluid come intocontact with hot engine

parts. It catches fire very easily.

fig. 16L0

A02

94b

– Refit hose C.– Refit cap A and check for seal

proper positioning into its seat, thensecure the cap with screws B.

At plug opening, pay maximum at-tention in order to prevent any impu-rities from entering the tank.

For topping up, always use a funnelwith integrated filter with mesh equalto or lower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbsmoisture, for this reason, if the car ismainly used in areas with a high de-gree of atmospheric humidity, thefluid should be replaced at more fre-quent intervals than specified in the“Service schedule”.

324

WINDSCREEN/REARWINDOW/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID (fig. 17)

To top up, remove cap A and fillerB.

Pour in a mixture of water andTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35fluid in the following concentrations:

– 30% of the above specified fluidand 70% water in summer

– 50% of the above specified fluidand 50% water in winter

– if the temperature falls below –20°C use TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 undiluted.

Certain commercialadditives for windscreenwashers are inflammable.

The engine compartment con-tains hot components which mayset it on fire.

Do not travel with thewindscreen washer reser-voir empty. The wind-

screen washer is fundamental forimproving visibility.

fig. 17L0

A02

95b

To prevent damages tothe pump motor, do notuse the windscreen/rear

window/headlight washers whenthe reservoir is empty.

The symbol π on thecontainer indicates syn-thetic brake fluid, distin-

guishing it from the mineral kind.Using mineral fluids irreversiblydamages the special braking sys-tem rubber seals.

Brake fluid is poisonousand highly corrosive. Inthe event of accidental

contact, wash the parts involvedimmediately with neutral soap andwater, then rinse thoroughly. Callthe doctor immediately if the fluidis swallowed.

325

AIR CLEANERThe air cleaner is connected to the

air temperature and intake sensorswhich send the electrical signalsrequired for the correct operation ofthe injection and ignition system tothe control unit.

Consequently, the cleaner mustalways be in perfect conditions toensure correct operation of theengine and in order to contain con-sumption and exhaust emissions.

Replace the air cleanermore frequently thanshown in the Service

Schedule if the car is used ondusty roads.

The cleaner can be dam-aged if it is cleaned andconsequently the engine

can be damaged.

DIESEL FILTER(JTD versions)

DRAINING THE CONDENSE

The presence of water inthe fuel feed circuit canseverely damage the

injection system and make theengine misfire. Go to a LanciaDealership as soon as possiblewhen the c warning light comeson together with message“WATER IN DIESEL FILTER” onthe multifunction display to havethe bleeding operation carriedout.The air cleaner replace-

ment procedure is pro-vided for indicative pur-

poses only. Have the operationcarried out at a LanciaDealership. Car safety can becompromised if the cleanerreplacement procedure hereindescribed is not carried out cor-rectly.

326

Batteries contain sub-stances that are veryharmful for the environ-

ment. You are advised to have thebattery changed at a LanciaDealership. It is properlyequipped for disposing of usedbatteries in an environmentally-friendly way that complies withthe law.

With the battery flat, orafter the interruption ofone of the protection

fuses, or if you want to disconnecta loaded battery (e.g. for a carstop period), before opening theluggage compartment bonnetcarefully read and comply withthe instructions contained in theparagraph “If battery is to be dis-connected” in the chapter “In anemergency”.

DUST/POLLENFILTER

This filter has a mechanical/elec-trostatic air filtering action, provid-ed that windows and doors areclosed.

Have the dust/pollen filter checkedonce a year at a Lancia Dealership,preferably at the onset of summer.

If the car is often used in dusty orextremely polluted environments,have the filter replaced more fre-quently than specified in the ServiceSchedule.

IMPORTANT Failure to replacethis filter can significantly reduceclimate control system effectiveness.

BATTERYThe battery is of the “Low

Maintenance” type and is fitted withan indicator A (fig. 18) for checkingthe electrolyte level and batterycharge.

Under normal condition of use top-ping up the electrolyte with distilledwater is therefore not required. Aperiodical check is however neces-sary to make sure it is in efficientconditions through the indicator onthe battery cover which should bedark in colour with a green centralarea.

If the indicator is a bright colour,or dark without the green centralarea, contact a Lancia Dealership.

fig. 18L0

A01

64b

327

If the car is left inactivefor long periods at cold,remove the battery and

store it in a warm place to pre-vent freezing.

CHECKING THE BATTERY CHARGE

The quality of the battery charge can be checked through the indicator (whererequired).

If the battery is not fitted with electrolyte level indicator, the relevant checksmust only be carried out by authorised personnel.

To check the battery charge, slacken the two fastening screws and open thecover. Check the battery charge and then reclose the cover, take care to preventpinching and short circuits.

Depending on the colour of the indicator, proceed as described in the tablebelow or on the label B (fig. 18) on the battery.

Incorrect fitting of elec-trical and electronicaccessories can seriously

damage the car. If you want toadd accessories after buying thecar (free-hand phone kit, etc.)visit a Lancia Dealership. Theycan suggest the most suitableaccessories to get and checkwhether the electric system cansupport the required load orwhether a larger capacity batteryis required.

When working on thebattery or near it, alwayswear the proper goggles.

Running the battery withlow fluid level can dam-age the battery beyond

repair and could also cause itsexplosion.

Bright white colour

Dark colour without greencentral area

Dark colour with green central area

Top up electrolyte

Low batterycharge

Electrolyte level and battery chargesufficient


Charge the battery (advisable to contact a Lancia Dealership)

No action needed

328

CHARGING THE BATTERY

IMPORTANT The battery charg-ing procedure is described only forinformation purposes since thisoperation must be carried out by aLancia Dealership.

Charging should be slow at a lowamp rating for about 24 hours.Charging for a longer period of timemay damage the battery.

Before reloading care-fully read and comply withinstructions contained in

the paragraph “If battery is to bedisconnected” in the chapter “Inan emergency”.

To charge the battery proceed asfollows:

– Disconnect battery negative ter-minal (–).

– Connect the battery charger wiresto the battery terminals and checkfor proper bias.

– Turn the battery charger on.

– After charging, turn the batterycharger off before disconnecting itfrom the battery.

– Reconnect the battery negativeterminal (–).

The liquid in the batteryis poisonous and corrosive.Do not let it touch the skin

or eyes. Recharging the batteryshould be done in a well-venti-lated area and away from nakedflames or possible sources ofsparks: explosion and fire risk.

Never attempt to chargea frozen battery: it mustbe thawed first, otherwise

it may explode. If freezing hastook place, the battery should bechecked before charging by spe-cialised personnel, to make surethat the internal elements are notdamaged and that the body is notcracked, with the risk of leakingpoisonous and corrosive acid.

IMPORTANT A battery which iskept at a charge of less than 50% forany length of time will be damagedby sulphation leading to a reductionin cranking power and a higher riskof the battery electrolyte freezing(this may even occur at –10 °C). Ifthe car is inactive for a long periodof time, refer to “Storing the car”, inchapter “Driving your car”.

REPLACING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the batterywith a genuine spare part presentingthe same specifications. If a batterywith different specifications is fitted,the frequencies shown in the ServiceSchedule in this chapter will nolonger apply. Refer to the instruc-tions provided by the batteryManufacturer.

IMPORTANT Before opening theluggage compartment bonnet to dis-connect the battery, carefully readand comply with instructions con-tained in the paragraph “If battery isto be disconnected” in the chapter“In an emergency”.

329

USEFUL ADVICE FOR LENGTHENING THE LIFE OFYOUR BATTERY

To prevent rapidly draining thebattery and ensure that it continuesto work correctly, the followingshould be noted:

– Terminals must always be firmlytightened.

– Do not keep accessories (e.g.sound system, hazard lights, parkinglights, etc.).

– When you park the car, ensurethe doors, boot and bonnet areclosed properly. The ceiling lightsmust be off.

– Before working on the electricalsystem, disconnect the negativecable from the battery.

– If after buying the car, you wantto install electric accessories whichrequire permanent electric supply,visit a Lancia Dealership, whosequalified personnel, in addition tosuggesting the most suitable devicesbelonging to the LineaccessoriLancia, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption, checkingwhether the car’s electric system iscapable of withstanding the loadrequired, or whether it should beintegrated with a more powerfulbattery. These devices in fact takeelectricity also when the ignition keyis removed (car parked, engine off),and can gradually drain the battery.The overall intake of these devices(standard and after-market) mustbe less than 0.6 mA x Ah (of the bat-tery), as shown in the followingtable.

Battery Maximumidle intake

70 Ah 42 mA

80 Ah 48 mA

100 Ah 60 mA

It is also important to rememberthat high intake devices (such asbottle warmers, vacuum cleaners,cellular phones, frigo bar, etc.) willspeed up battery discharging whenpowered with engine off or runningidle.

– Please note that when installingadditional systems in the car, incor-rect wiring can be dangerous espe-cially when concerning safety sys-tems.

330

SPARK PLUGSThe cleanness and soundness of the

spark plugs are very important forkeeping the engine efficient and pol-luting emissions down.

The appearance of the spark plug,if examined by expert eyes, is a goodway of pinpointing a problem even ifit has nothing to do with the ignitionsystem. Therefore, if the engine hasproblems, it is important to have thespark plugs checked at a LanciaDealership.

The spark plugs must bechanged at the timesspecified in the Service

Schedule. Only use the type ofplugs indicated. If the heat ratiois less than required or the lifespecified is not guaranteed, prob-lems can arise.

ELECTRONICCONTROL UNITS

When the car is being used normal-ly, special measures are not neces-sary.

The following instructions must befollowed very carefully, however, ifyou work on the electrical system orin cases where emergency starting isnecessary:

– never disconnect the battery fromthe electrical system while theengine is running

– disconnect the battery from theelectrical system if you are recharg-ing it. The modern battery chargerscan discharge voltage up to 20V

– never perform emergency start-ups with a battery charger. Alwaysuse an auxiliary battery

– be particularly careful when con-necting the battery to the electricalsystem. Make sure that the polarityis correct and that the connection isefficient

– do not connect or disconnect theterminals of the electronic controlunit while the ignition key is at MAR

– do not check polarity throughsparking

– disconnect the electronic controlunits if you are electrically weldingthe car body. Remove the units iftemperatures exceed 80°C (specialoperations on the bodywork, etc.).

Modifications or repairsto the electrical systemcarried out incorrectly

and without bearing the featuresof the system in mind can causemalfunctions with the risk of fire.

331

WHEELSAND TYRES

TYRE PRESSURE

Check the pressure of each tyre,including the spare, every two weeksand before long journeys.

The pressure should be checkedwith the tyre rested and cold.

It is normal for the pressure to risewhen you are driving. If you have tocheck or restore the pressure whenthe tyres are warm, remember thatthe pressure value must be 0.3 barabove the specified value.

For proper tyre inflation pressure,see “Wheels” in chapter “TechnicalSpecifications”.

Tyre pressure must becorrect to ensure goodroad holding.

Wrong pressure causes unevenwear of the tyres (fig. 19):

A - Correct pressure: tyre wearsevenly.

B - Under inflated tyre: shouldertread wear.

C - Over inflated tyre: centre treadwear.

If the pressure is too lowthe tyre overheats andthis can cause it serious

damage.

Tyres must be replaced when thetread wears down to 1.6 mm. In anycase, comply with the laws in thecountry where the car is being dri-ven.

fig. 19L0

A01

61b

332

If you replace a tyre it is a goodidea to change the inflation valve,too.

To ensure the front and rear tyresall wear evenly, you are advised tochange the tyres over every 10-15thousand kilometres, keeping themon the same side of the car so as tonot reverse the direction of rotation.

Do not change the tyresover in criss-cross fash-ion by moving a tyre from

the left hand side of the car to theright and vice versa.

GENERAL NOTES

As far as possible, avoid sharpbraking and screech starts, etc.

Be careful not to hit the kerb, pot-holes or other obstacles hard.Driving for long stretches overbumpy roads can damage the tyres.Periodically check that the tyreshave no cuts in the sidewalls, abnor-mal swelling or irregular tyre wear.If any of these occur, have the carseen to at a Lancia Dealership.

Avoid overloading your car: thiscan seriously damage wheels andtyres.

If you get a flat tyre, stop immedi-ately and change it so as not to dam-age the tyre, the wheel, the suspen-sion and the steering. Tyres age evenif they are not used very much.Cracking of the tread rubber and thesidewalls are a sign of this ageing. Inany case, if the tyres have been fittedfor more than six years they shouldbe examined by an expert who canjudge whether they are still fit foruse. Remember to check the sparetyre particularly carefully too

If a replacement is necessary,always use new tyres and avoidusing ones the origin of which youare not certain about.

Lancia THESIS fits tubeless tyres.Under no circumstances use an innertube with these tyres.

333

RUBBERTUBING

Follow the Service Schedule to theletter as concerns braking, powersteering and fuel line rubber tubing.Ozone, high temperatures and longabsence of fluid in the system can infact cause the hardening and crack-ing of the pipes with possible loss offluid. A careful check is thereforeessential.

WINDSCREENWIPERS

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber partwith suitable products. We recom-mend TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35.

Change the blades if the rubberedge is warped or worn out. Youshould in any case change themapproximately once a year.

Some simple steps can reducepotential damage to the blades:

– If the temperatures falls to belowzero, make sure the rubber blade isnot frozen to the windscreen. If nec-essary, free it with a de-icing com-pound.

– Remove any snow that has settledon the glass: besides saving theblades you will avoid straining theelectric windscreen wiper motor andcausing it to overheat.

– Do not operate the windscreenwipers on dry glass.

Travelling with wornwiper blades is dangerousbecause it reduces visibil-

ity in bad weather.

Checking the blades

Before checking, clean the wind-screen and rubber blades carefullywith warm water and soap or withTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35windscreen washing fluid. Thewindscreen should be perfectly cleanand not greasy. If required, completethe cleaning operation with degreas-ing products (ammonia based) ordegreasing polishes.

334

SPRAY NOZZLES (fig. 21)

If there is no jet of liquid, firstmake sure that there is liquid in thereservoir. Then make sure that theholes in the nozzles are not cloggedup. Use a pin for this if necessary.

The windscreen washer jets can bedirected through screw A. Direct thespray so that it reaches the highestpoint reached by the blades.

fig. 21

L0A

0163

b

The blades must also be perfectlyclean before starting the check. Ifrequired, clean the corners withwarm water and soap.

1) Check the blades carefully. Theyshould not be broken or damaged inany part. Replace both the blades ifthey are broken or damaged.

2) If the blades are intact, continueby checking the operation. Operatethe windscreen washer and thewiper. If the blades clean the wind-screen perfectly they can be kept. Ifnot, replace them both.

Replacing the blades (fig. 20)

To replace the windscreen wiperblades:

1) Lift the windscreen wiper arm.

2) Press the lock spring tab andremove the blade A from arm B.

3) Insert the new blade in thewindscreen wiper arm until the lockspring clicks.

IMPORTANT After replacing,make sure that the blades are cor-rectly fastened to the windscreenwiper arm.

fig. 20L0

A01

62b

335

HEADLIGHTWASHERS

Regularly check that the nozzles(fig. 22) are intact and clean.

The headlight washers are auto-matically switched on when thewindscreen washer is operated andthe headlights are on.

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

During the winter, the climate con-trol system must be turned on atleast once a month for about tenminutes.

Before summer, have the systemchecked at a Lancia Dealership.

INITIALISING THE AIRCONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT

Whenever the battery is electricallyconnected again or it is reloaded afterbeing completely flat or after replac-ing one of the protection fuses, to re-store the correct operation of the airconditioning, of the door locking andof the ESP system. It is necessary toperform the initialisation operationscontained in the paragraph “If batteryis to be disconnected” in the chapter“In an emergency”.

fig. 22

L0A

0122

b

The system is filled withR134a refrigerant whichwill not pollute the envi-

ronment in the event of leakage.Under no circumstances shouldR12 fluid be used as it is incom-patible with the system compo-nents and contains CFC.

336

BODYWORK

PROTECTING THE CAR FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of rust are:

– atmospheric pollution

– salty and humidity in the atmos-phere (coastal or very hot andhumid areas)

– environmental conditions thatspecific to the season.

In addition, the abrasiveness ofdust in the atmosphere and sandcarried by the wind as well as mudand stones kicked up by other carsmust not be underestimated.

For your THESIS, LANCIA hasused leading-edge technologicalsolutions to effectively protect thebody from rust.

These are most important:

– Painting systems and productsthat make the car particularly resis-tant to rust and scratching.

– The use of zinc-plated sheet steelwhich is highly resistant to rust.

– The spraying of the underbody,engine compartment, inside thewheelhouses and other parts withwax-based products with a high pro-tective capacity.

– Spraying plastic-coating materi-als, to protect the most exposedpoints: under the door, inside thewings, the edges, etc.

– The use of “open” box sections toprevent condensation and waterfrom building up and rusting theinside of the parts.

BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY

Your THESIS is covered by war-ranty against any original structuralor body part being perforated byrust. Refer to the Warranty Bookletfor the general terms.

337

Detergents pollute water.For this reason the carmust be washed in an

area equipped for the collectionand purification of the liquidsused while washing.

TIPS FOR KEEPING THE BODYIN GOOD CONDITIONS

Paintwork

The paintwork is not only to makeyour car look attractive but also toprotect the steel.

If the paint is scuffed or scratcheddeeply you are therefore advised totouch up as necessary to prevent rustfrom forming.

Only use genuine products whentouching up the paintwork (see“Bodywork paint identificationplate” in chapter “TechnicalSpecifications”).

Ordinary maintenance of thepaintwork means washing it. Thefrequency you should do thisdepends on the conditions and theenvironment the car is driven in. Forexample, you should wash your carmore often if it is driven in areaswith a high level of air pollution oron road sprinkled with saltwash.

Before leaving your carinto the automatic car-wash tunnel, disengage

the parking brake following theinstructions given in the relevantparagraph, and leave the KeylessSystem CID (where fitted) in thecar to prevent automatic steeringlocking.

Before cleaning thewindscreen (e.g. at fillingstations), make sure to

have deactivated the rain sensorand turned the ignition key toSTOP. Deactivate the rain sensoralso when washing your car man-ually or at automatic carwash.

338

Outside plastic parts must becleaned following the usual carwashing procedure.

Where possible avoid parking thecar under trees; the resinous sub-stance that certain species of treeshed dull the paintwork and increasethe possibility of rust forming.

IMPORTANT Bird droppingsmust be washed off immediately andwith great care as their acid is par-ticularly aggressive.

Windows

Use specific window cleaners toclean the windows. Use very cleancloths to avoid scratching the glassor damaging the transparency.

IMPORTANT To prevent damageto the electric heater element, wipethe inside of the heated rear windowgently in the same direction as theelements.

To wash the car properly:

1) Remove the aerial from the roofto prevent damaging it when wash-ing the car in an automatic carwash.

2) Wash the body using a low pres-sure jet of water.

3) Wipe a sponge with a light neu-tral PH detergent solution over thebodywork, frequently rinsing thesponge.

4) Rinse well with water and drywith a jet of air or a chamois leather.

When drying the car, be careful toget at those parts which are not soeasily seen e.g. the door frames, bon-net and around the headlights wherewater can most readily collect.

You should leave the car out in theopen so that any water remainingcan evaporate more easily.

Do not wash the car after it hasbeen parked in the sun or while thebonnet is hot: it could take the shineoff the paint.

Cleaning chromiumplated/anodized bodywork parts

To clean body parts such as mold-ings, cappings, etc., use neutral pHdetergents. Avoid generic cleaningproducts.

These parts shall be rinsed well withwater and then dried with a jet of airor a chamois leather.

For further treatment use specialpolish for chromium plated/anodizedparts.

Suitable car cleaning products areavailable at Lancia Dealerships.

339

Engine compartment

At the end of each winter season,carefully clean the engine compart-ment without directing the water jetagainst electronic control units.Have this done at a garage.

Detergents pollute water.For this reason the carmust be washed in an

area equipped for the collectionand purification of the liquidsused while washing.

IMPORTANT The car shouldwashed with the engine cold and theignition key at STOP. After washingmake sure that the various protec-tions (e.g. rubber caps and variouscovers) have not been damaged orremoved.

INTERIORSFrom time to time check that water

has not collected under the mats(from dripping shoes, umbrellas,etc.) which could cause the steel torust.

Never use inflammableproducts like fuel oilether or rectified petrol

for cleaning inside the car. Theelectrostatic discharges generat-ed when rubbing to clean maycause fire.

Do not keep aerosol cansin the car. There is therisk they might explode.

Aerosol cans must never beexposed to a temperature above50°C; when the weather starts toget hot the temperature inside thecar might go well beyond that fig-ure.

PLASTIC PARTS INSIDE THE CAR

Use special products designed notto alter the appearance of the com-ponents.

IMPORTANT Do not use alcoholor petrol to clean the instrumentpanel.

CLEANING ALCANTARA SEATS

Alcantara upholstery is easy toclean. Follow the same instructionsprovided for velvet upholstery.

340

CLEANING VELVET SEATSAND FABRICS

– Remove dust with a soft brushand vacuum cleaner. Use a moistbrush to clean velvet upholstery.

– Brush the seats with a dampsponge with water and a neutralsoap.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS

– Remove the dry dirt with achamois leather or very slightlymoist loth without exerting toomuch pressure.

– Remove liquid or grease stainswith a dry absorbent cloth withoutrubbing. Then wipe with a chamoisleather or soft cloth moistened withwater and neutral soap. If the staindoes not come out, use a specialcleaning compound being particu-larly careful to follow the instruc-tions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use alcohol oralcohol-based products.

STEERING WHEEL/GEARLEVER KNOB WITH GENUINELEATHER COVERING

These components shall only becleaned with water and neutral soap.Never use spirit or alcohol-basedproducts.

Before using special products forcleaning interiors, read carefully labelinstructions and indications to makesure they are free from spirit and/oralcohol-based substances.

If when cleaning the windscreenwith special glass products, somedrops fall on the leather covering ofthe steering wheel/gear lever knob re-move them immediately and thenclean with water and neutral soap.

IMPORTANT Take the utmost carewhen engaging the steering lock toprevent scratching the leather cover-ing.

Upholstery of your carhas been designed to with-stand wear deriving from

common use of the car. You arehowever recommended to avoidstrong and/or continuous scratch-ing with clothing accessories suchas metallic buckles, studs, Velcrofastenings and the like, since theseitems cause circumscribed stressof the cover fabric that could leadto yarn breaking, and damage thecover as a consequence.

341

IDENTIFICATIONDATA

CHASSIS MARKING (fig. 1)

It is printed on the passenger com-partment floor in front of the right-hand front seat and can be reachedby lifting the carpeting and openingthe cover.

Marking includes the followingdata:

– car model

– chassis number.

ENGINE MARKING

The marking is stamped on thecylinder block and includes themodel and the chassis number.

fig. 1

L0A

0296

b

fig. 2

L0A

0297

b

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSMODEL PLATE

The plate (fig. 2) is to be found onthe left side of the boot (in the sparewheel housing) by lifting the bootcover. The plate bears the followingidentification data (fig. 3):

A - Manufacturer’s nameB - Homologation numberC - Car model codeD - Chassis numberE - Maximum vehicle weight fully

loaded

342

BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The plate (fig. 4) is applied on theinner bonnet panel.

fig. 4L0

A02

99b

fig. 5

L0A

0268

b

F - Maximum vehicle weight fullyloaded with trailer

G - Maximum vehicle weight onfront axle

H - Maximum vehicle weight onrear axle

I - Engine typeL - Body version codeM - Spare part codeN - Smoke opacity index (for diesel

engines)

fig. 3

L0A

6028

b

It bears the following data (fig. 5):

A - Paint manufacturer

B - Colour name

C - LANCIA colour code

D - Respray and touch up code

343

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

2.0 TB

2.4

2.4 CAE

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

3.2 V6 CAE

(*) EURO 4 version (for specific markets)(**) Version for specific markets

Engine code

841E000

841D000

841D000

841P000841N000 (**)

841L000

Bodywork version

841AXA1B 03D841AXA1B 03E (**)841AXA1B 03F (*)841AXB1B 00C841AXB1B 00D (*)

841AXB11 04C841AXB11 04D (*)

841AXN11 10841AXH11 06B (**)841AXM11 09 (**)

841AXF11 07

344

2.0 TB

841E000

Front,transversally-mounted

Otto

5 in line

4 - Hydraulictappets

82 x 75.65

1,998

8.5 : 1

136185

5,500

30831.42,200

Unleadedpetrol 95 R.O.N.

2.4

841D000


Otto

5 in line


83 x 90.4

2,446

10.3 : 1

125170

6,000

22623.03,500


2.4 CAE

841D000


Otto

5 in line


83 x 90.4

2,446

10.3 : 1

125170

6,000

22623.03,500


ENGINE

GENERAL FEATURESEngine code

Location

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Number of valves per cylinder

Diameter x stroke mm

Total capacity cc

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC): kWHP

corresponding ratio rpm

Maximum torque (EEC): NmKgm


Fuel

345

3.2 V6 CAE

841L000


Otto

6 V, 60°


93 x 78

3,179

10 : 1

169230

6,200

28929

4,800


2.4 JTD 20V CAE

841H000


Diesel

5 in line


82 x 90.4

2,387

17 : 1

136185

4,000

33034

1,750

Diesel fuel formotor vehicles

GENERAL FEATURESEngine code

Location

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Number of valves per cylinder

Diameter x stroke mm

Total capacity cc

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC): kWHP


Maximum torque (EEC): NmKgm


Fuel

346

2.0 TB

BOSCH ME7 Multipoint sequential electronic injection,

electronically controlled variable geometry

turbosupercharger with intercooler

Static electronic integral with ignition and single coil

1-2-4-5-3

-

BOSCH FR6KTC

Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

2.4

BOSCH ME3.1 Multipointsequentialelectronic injection


1-2-4-5-3

-

CHAMPION RC8BYCNGK BKR6EZ

2.4 CAE

BOSCH ME3.1 Multipointsequentialelectronic injection


1-2-4-5-3

-

CHAMPION RC8BYCNGK BKR6EZ

FUEL FEED - IGNITION

Fuel feed

Ignition

Firing order

Injection order

Spark plugs

347

Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’stechnical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

3.2 V6 CAE

BOSCH ME7 Multipointsequentialelectronic injection


1-4-2-5-3-6

-

NGK PFR6B

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

BOSCH COMMON RAIL MULTIJET direct injection,

BOSCH RADIALJET injection pump,

electronically controlled variable geometry turbosupercharger

with intercooler

-

-

1-2-4-5-3

-

Fuel feed

Ignition

Firing order

Injection order

Spark plugs

348

2.4

Mechanicalgearbox with

six forward gears and reverse

with synchromesh

Single disc, hydraulically

controlled

Front

2.0 TB

Mechanicalgearbox with

six forward gears and reverse

with synchromesh

Single disc, hydraulically

controlled

Front

2.0 TB

Self-ventilated discsSelf-ventilated discs

Electric control on rear discs,

automaticengagement/

disengagement

2.4




disengagement

2.4 CAE




disengagement

2.4 CAE

Automatic gearboxwith five forward gears and reverse

-

Front

TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive

BRAKES

Service brakes:- front- rear

Electric parking brake (EPB)

349

2.4 JTD 20V CAE




disengagement

3.2 V6 CAE




disengagement

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive

Service brakes:- front- rear

Electric parking brake (EPB)

2.4 JTD 20V CAE


-

Front

3.2 V6 CAE


-

Front

350

2.4

Independent wheel, 5-link Multilink type,

with aluminium wishbones, anti-roll bar,

coil springs and telescopic shock absorbers.Telescopic shock absorbers

with continuous damping actionvariation (SKYHOOK),

where provided.

Independent wheel, multiple links,

with lower wishbone and 3 control rods,

anti-roll bar, coaxial coil springs and

telescopic shock absorbers.Telescopic shock absorbers


where provided.

2.0 TB





where provided.






where provided.

2.4 CAE





where provided.






where provided.

SUSPENSIONS

Front

Rear

351

2.4



coil springs and telescopic shock absorbers. Telescopic shock absorbers with continuous damping

action variation (SKYHOOK),

where provided.




telescopic shock absorbers. Telescopic shock absorbers with continuous damping


where provided.

2.4 JTD



coil springs and telescopic shock absorbers. Telescopic shock absorbers with continuous damping


where provided.




telescopic shock absorbers. Telescopic shock absorbers with continuous damping


where provided.

Front

Rear

352

2.4

Rack-and-pinionpower steering gear.

Optional, where provided,(VARIOSTEER) hydraulic

power steering (power steering variable

with speed)

Energy-absorbing jointedsteering column with

manual or electric (position memory) angular

adjustment system

Energy-absorbingsteering wheel

12.2

2.24

2.0 TB

Rack-and-pinionpower steering gear.

Optional, where provided,(VARIOSTEER) hydraulic

power steering (power steering variable

with speed)



adjustment system


12.2

2.24

2.4 CAE

Rack-and-pinionsteering gear, with

VARIOSTEER hydraulic power steering (power steering

variable with speed)



adjustment system


12.2

2.16

STEERING

Control

Steering column

Steering wheel

Minimum steering circle metres

Number of steering wheel turns lock-to-lock

353

2.4 JTD 20V CAE




Energy-absorbingjointed steering

column with manual or electric (position memory)

angular adjustment system


12.2

2.16

3.2 V6 CAE




Energy-absorbingjointed steering

column with manual or electric (position memory)

angular adjustment system


12.2

2.16

Control

Steering column

Steering wheel

Minimum steering circle metres

Number of steering wheel turns lock-to-lock

354

2.4

7Jx16 H2-39

215/60 R16 (95W)215/60 ZR16 (95W)

7Jx17 H2-41

225/50 R17 (94W)225/50 ZR17 (94W)

215/60 R16 (95H) M+S

2.0 TB

7Jx16 H2-39

215/60 R16 (95W)215/60 ZR16 (95W)

7Jx17 H2-41

225/50 R17 (94W)225/50 ZR17 (94W)

215/60 R16 (95H) M+S

2.4 CAE

7Jx16 H2-39

215/60 R16 (95W)215/60 ZR16 (95W)

7Jx17 H2-41

225/50 R17 (94W)225/50 ZR17 (94W)

215/60 R16 (95H) M+S

2.0 TB

2.32.3

2.4

2.32.3

2.4 CAE

2.32.3

WHEELS

Standard tyresRims

Tyres

Optional tyresRims

Tyres (*)

Snow tyres

(*) Chains cannot be fitted on these tyres

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (excluding snow tyres)

Front and rear tyres- average load bar- full load bar

355

3.2 V6 CAE

2.32.3

2.4 JTD 20V CAE 3.2 V6 CAE

Standard tyresRims 7Jx16 H2-39 7Jx16 H2-39

Tyres 215/60 R16 (95W) 215/60 R16 (95W)215/60 ZR16 (95W) 215/60 ZR16 (95W)

Optional tyresRims 7Jx17 H2-37 7Jx17 H2-41

7Jx17 H2-418Jx18 H2-37

Tyres (*) 225/50 R17 (94W) 225/50 R17 (94W)225/50 ZR17 (94W) 225/50 ZR17 (94W)235/40 ZR18 (95Y)

Snow tyres 215/60 R16 (95H) M+S 215/60 R16 (95H) M+S

(*) Chains cannot be fitted on these tyres

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (excluding snow tyres)

Front and rear tyres- average load bar- full load bar

(*) Pressure for 235/40 ZR 18 (95Y) tyre

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

2.3/2.7 (*)2.3/2.7 (*)

356

RIMS AND TYRES

Alloy rims or steel.

Tubeless tyres with radial carcass.

The homologated tyres are listed inthe log book.

IMPORTANT In the event of dis-crepancies between informationgiven in the Owner Handbook andthat shown in the Log Book, refer tothe latter one.

To ensure safety of the car inmovement, it must be fitted withtyres of specified size and of thesame make and type on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use innertubes with tubeless tyres.

CORRECT TYRE READING

Below, please find the instructionsneeded to understand the meaningof the code stamped on the tyre, asshown in fig. 6.

The code may be in one of the waysgiven in the example.

Example:225/50 R 17 94 W

or225/50 ZR 17 94W

fig. 6L0

A02

57b

225 = Nominal width (S, distancein mm between sides)

50 = Percentage height/widthratio (H/S)

R = Radial tyre

ZR = Radial tyre, with speed over240 km/h

17 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø)

94 = Load index (capacity)

W = Maximum speed index.

357

Maximum speed index

Q = up to 160 km/h

R = up to 170 km/h

S = up to 180 km/h

T = up to 190 km/h

U = up to 200 km/h

H = up to 210 km/h

V = over 210 km/h

ZR = over 240 km/h

W = up to 270 km/h

Y = up to 300 km/h

Maximum speed index for snow tyres

QM + S = up to 160 km/h

TM + S = up to 190 km/h

HM + S = up to 210 km/h

Load index (capacity)

60 = 250 kg61 = 257 kg 62 = 265 kg63 = 272 kg64 = 280 kg 65 = 290 kg66 = 300 kg67 = 307 kg 68 = 315 kg69 = 325 kg70 = 335 kg 71 = 345 kg72 = 355 kg73 = 365 kg74 = 375 kg 75 = 387 kg76 = 400 kg77 = 412 kg 78 = 425 kg79 = 437 kg80 = 450 kg 81 = 462 kg82 = 475 kg83 = 487 kg

84 = 500 kg 85 = 515 kg86 = 530 kg87 = 545 kg 88 = 560 kg89 = 580 kg90 = 600 kg 91 = 615 kg92 = 630 kg93 = 650 kg94 = 670 kg 95 = 690 kg96 = 710 kg97 = 730 kg 98 = 750 kg99 = 775 kg100 = 800 kg 101 = 825 kg102 = 850 kg 103 = 875 kg104 = 900 kg 105 = 925 kg106 = 950 kg

CORRECT RIM READING

Below, please find the instructionsneeded to understand the meaningof the code stamped on the rim, asshown in fig. 6.

Example: 7 J x 16 H2 39

7 = rim width in inches (1)

J = rim drop centre outline (sideprojection where the tyrebead rests) (2)

16 = rim nominal diameter ininches (corresponds to diam-eter of the tyre to be mount-ed) (3 = Ø)

H2 = hump shape and number(relief on the circumferenceholding the tubeless tyrebead on the rim)

39 = wheel camber (distancebetween rim point of contactand wheel rim centre line)

358

2.0 TB

224

8.9

28.9

2.4

217

9.5

30.2

2.4 CAE

215

10.0

31.2

3.2 V6 CAE

240

8.8

29.3

2.4 JTD 20VCAE

222

9.7

31

2.0 TB

2° 40’–50’ ± 20’

–1 mm ± 1 mm

–41’ ± 20’+3 mm ± 1 mm

2.42.4 CAE

2° 40’–50’ ± 20’

–1 mm ± 1 mm

–41’ ± 20’+3 mm ± 1 mm

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

2° 40’–50’ ± 20’

–1 mm ± 1 mm

–41’ ± 20’+3 mm ± 1 mm

3.2 V6 CAE

2° 40’–50’ ± 20’

–1 mm ± 1 mm

–41’ ± 20’+3 mm ± 1 mm

PERFORMANCE

Top speed km/h

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h sec.

Kilometre with standing start sec.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Front wheels (STD A):– caster angle– kingpin angle– toe-in

Rear wheels (STD A):– kingpin angle– toe-in

359

DIMENSIONS

fig. 7

The sizes are in mm and refer to the car fitted with standard tyres. Slight size changes with optional tyres. Height is intended for an unladen car.Boot volume (as per VDA standards): 400 dm3

L0A0171b

(*) = 3.0 V6 CAE and3.2 V6 CAE versions

360

2.4

1,760

510

1,3001,3002,270

1,500500

80

75

5

2.4 CAE

1,790

510

1,3001,3002,300

1,500500

80

75

5

2.0 TB

1,780

510

1,3001,3002,290

1,500500

80

75

5

WEIGHTS

Empty weight (including all fluids, fuel tank at 90 % and with no optional): kg

Payload (*) including the driver kg

Maximum admitted loads (**):– front axle kg– rear axle kg– total kg

Towable loads:– trailer with brakes kg– trailer without brakes kg

Maximum load on roof kg

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) kg

Number of seats

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

361

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

1,820

510

1,3001,3002,330

1,500500

80

75

5

3.2 V6 CAE

1,820

510

1,3001,3002,330

1,500500

80

75

5

Empty weight (including all fluids, fuel tank at 90 % and with no optional): kg

Payload (*) including the driver kg

Maximum admitted loads (**):– front axle kg– rear axle kg– total kg

Towable loads:– trailer with brakes kg– trailer without brakes kg

Maximum load on roof kg

Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes) kg

Number of seats

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.), the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.

CAPACITIESPrescribed fuels

Recommended product

Unleaded petrol with a RON not lower than 95

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590)

50-50 mixture of distilled waterand PARAFLU UP

SELENIA RACING

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA CAR GI/V

TUTELA CAR GI/E

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

362

2.4

7510

––

8.6

5.50

–

1.70

–

1.05

approx 1.5

4.5

2.0 TB

7510

––

8.6

5.50

–

1.70

–

1.05

approx 1.5

4.5

2.4 CAE

7510

––

8.6

5.50

–

–

7.25

1.05

approx 1.5

4.5

Fuel tank: litres– including a reserve of litres


Engine cooling system litres

Engine oil (amount for periodical change – sump and filter) litres


Manual gearbox/differential kg

Electronic automatic gearbox litres

Hydraulic power steering litres

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS litres

Windscreen headlight washer reservoir litres

3.2 V6 CAE

7510

––

12.2

5.90

–

–

1.05

approx 1.5

4.5

363

Prescribed fuelsRecommended product

Unleaded petrol with a RON not lower than 95

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590)

50-50 mixture of distilled water and PARAFLU UP

SELENIA RACING

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR GI/V

TUTELA CAR GI/E

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35

2.4 JTD 20VCAE

––

7510

8.6

–

5.0

–

1.05

approx 1.5

4.5



Engine cooling system litres



Electronic automatic gearbox litres

Hydraulic power steering litres

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS litres

Windscreen headlight washer reservoir litres

364

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

PRODUCTS WHICH MAY BE USED AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use

Lubricants forpetrol engines

Lubricants for diesel engines

For regular operation of JTD versions fitted with DPF, use genuine lubricant only. In the event of an emergency, lacking the genuinelubricant, top up just once with max. 0.5 l and go to Lancia Dealership as soon as possibleShould non-genuine products be used, lubricants with minimum ACEA A3 properties for petrol engines and ACEA B4 for Diesel en-gines are tolerated; in this event top engine performance is not guaranteed.Using low-quality products, not compliant with ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 properties and specifications could cause engine damages notcovered by warranty.For very cold temperatures, consult Lancia Dealership for the proper Selenia product to use.

Original fluids andlubricants

SELENIA RACINGContractual TechnicalReference N° F007.A00

SELENIA WRContractual TechnicalReference N° F515.D06

ChangeFluid and lubricant specificationsfor correct car operation

Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 10W-60, FIAT 9.55535-H3 qualification.

Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40, FIAT 9.55535-M2 qualification.

Accordingto Service Schedule

Accordingto Service Schedule

365

Use

(*) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having characteristics different from those specified.(❒) When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and

demineralised water.

Applications

Mechanical gearbox and differential petrol version

Mechanical gearbox and differentials, diesel versions

Power steering

5-speed automatic transmission

CV joints on wheel side

CV joints on differentialside

Brake and clutch hydrauliccontrol

Cooling circuitsProportion:50% water and50% PARAFLU UP

To be used diluted or undiluted

Original fluidsand lubricants

TUTELA CAR TECHNYXContractual Technical Reference N° F010.B05

TUTELA CAR MATRYX Contractual TechnicalReference N° F108.F02

TUTELA GI/EContractual TechnicalReference N° F001.C94

TUTELA GI/V Contractual TechnicalReference N° F333.105

TUTELA ALL STARContractual Technical Reference N° F702.G07

TUTELA STAR 325Contractual TechnicalReference N°F301.D03

TUTELA TOP 4Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.A93

PARAFLU UP (*)Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01

TUTELAPROFESSIONAL SC 35Contractual Technical Reference N° F201.D02

Fluid and lubricant specifications for correct car operation

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85 that passes API GL 4 specifications Plus, Fiat 9.55550.

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85, that pass API GL4 specifications.

"ATF DEXRON III" oil..

Special lubricant for 5-speed transmissions with controlled slip torque converters

Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature appliances. N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency.y

Poly-urea oil synthetic-based grease suitable for high temperatures. NL.GI. 2 consistency

Synthetic fluid FMVSS no. 116, DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J-1704 CUNA NC 956-01

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on in-hibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula, thatpasses CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11

Brake fluid

Transmissionand hydraulicpower steering lubricants andgreases

Protective agentfor radiators

Windscreen/headlight washerfluid

366

FUELCONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption valuesshown in the following table weredefined according to the type-approval specifications in EuropeanDirectives.

Consumption values are defined bymeans of the following procedures:

– urban cycle: consisting of a coldstart and a simulated drive in citystreets;

– extra-urban cycle: consisting infrequent accelerations, in all gears,simulating normal conditions of use.Speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h;

– combined consumption: con-sisting of 37% urban cycle and 63%extra-urban cycle.

IMPORTANT Road and trafficconditions, weather, general condi-tions of the car, driving style, fittingsand accessories, use of the climatecontrol system, load, roof racks andother situations penalising aerody-namic penetration and effectingrolling resistance will influence fuelconsumption rates which can be dif-ferent from the values shown in thetable (see “Cheap running thatrespects the environment” in“Driving your car” chapter).

2.4

15.2

8.4

10.9

2.0 TB

15.5

8.5

11.1

2.4 CAE

17.4

8.8

12.0

2.4 JTD 20V CAE

12.1

6.9

8.8

3.2 V6 CAE

22.7

10.3

14.9

Consumption according to Directive1999/100/CE (litres x 100 km)

Urban

Extra-urban

Average combined

367

CO2 EMISSION IN EXHAUSTThe CO2 emission in exhaust shown in the following tables refers to the combined consumption.

2.4

260

2.0 TB

264

2.4 CAE

286

3.2 V6 CAE

355

2.0 JTD 20V CAE

234

CO2 emissions according to Directive 1999/100/CE

(g/km)

369

INDEX

ABS system ........................... 245

- EBD electronic

brakeforce distributor ....... 245

Accessories purchased by

the user ............................... 221

Active carbondust/

pollen filter........................... 161

- maintenance ..................... 326

Aerosol cans (important) ........ 340

Air bags (front and side) ........ 88

- front passenger

presence sensor ................. 91

- general notes ..................... 95

- manually deactivating

the passenger’s

front air bag ..................... 90

- manually deactivating

the rear side bags............... 94

- passenger’s

front air bag ..................... 90

- side air bags (Side bag –

Window bag) .................... 92

- “Smart Bag” system

(front Multistage

Airbags) ............................ 88

Air cleaner ............................. 325

Air vents ........................ 144-145

Anchoring the load.................. 232

Anti-lifting sensor .................. 42

Armrests

- front .................................. 65

- rear.................................... 67

Ashtray

- front ................................. 215

- rear ................................... 215

ASR system ............................. 189

Autoclose function .................. 50

Automatic climate control

system ................................. 146

- controls ............................. 152

- front control panel ............. 148

- general .............................. 146

- how to use the climate

control system.................... 151

- maintenance ..................... 335

- rear control panel ............. 150

Automatic gearbox display ...... 110

370

Battery

- checking the battery

charge................................ 327

- disconnecting the loaded

battery ............................... 302

- disconnecting the

unloaded battery................ 303

- initialising the control

units of the door locks,

air conditioner and ESP

system................................ 303

- jump starting............. 272-304

- maintenance ..................... 326

- recharging the

battery ...................... 304-328

- replacement ...................... 328

- useful advice ..................... 329

Bodywork

- maintenance ..................... 337

- version code ...................... 343

Bodywork paint

identification plate .............. 342

Bodywork versions (codes) ..... 343

Bonnet .................................... 237

Boot

- anchoring the load ............ 232

- ceiling light........................ 231

- closing the boot.................. 231

- functions that can be

modified by the

CONNECT menu............... 229

- luggage nets....................... 231

- luggage transport -

important notes ................. 233

- opening by remote

control ............................... 228

- opening from the inside .... 227

- opening from the outside

with the key....................... 228

- power socket ..................... 234

Boot light

- bulb replacement ............... 290

Bose HI-FI audio system ........ 248

Bottle/can holder

- front ................................. 217

- rear ................................... 219

Brake and hydraulic

clutch fluid .......................... 323

Brakes

- fluid level ......................... 323

- technical specifications ...... 348

Bulbs (replacing) .................... 281

- bulbs ................................. 283

- front light cluster ............... 284

- general instructions ........... 282

- rear light cluster ................ 286

- replacing an exterior light.. 284

- types of bulbs ................... 282

Capacities ............................. 362

Car maintenance .................. 309

- additional checks .............. 314

371

- Annual Inspection

Schedule ............................ 314

- Scheduled Servicing .......... 309

- Service Schedule ............... 312

Carrying children safely .......... 81

Catalytic converter

- oxidising catalytic

converter .......................... 7

- three-way catalytic

converter .......................... 6

Central console compartment .. 218

Chassis (marking) .................. 341

Cheap running that

respects the environment...... 262

Child lock safety device .......... 58

Child restraint systems ........... 81

- passenger seat

compliance with regulations

on child’s seat use.............. 84

- presetting for mounting

the “Type Isofix” child restraint

system................................ 85

Children

(transport in safety) ............ 81

CID (Customer

Identification Device) .......... 44

- battery replacement .......... 53

CID device

(Keyless System) ................. 44

Cigar lighter ........................... 215

Climate control system ........... 142

- air vents ........................... 145

- directional and

adjustable vents ................. 144




system................................ 303

- ventilation during a stop ... 161

Climate-controlled

drink compartment .............. 217

CO2 emissions.......................... 367

CODE Card

(Lancia CODE system) ....... 28

CONNECT controls ................ 15

CONNECT infotelematic

system .................................. 14

- CONNECT controls ........... 15

- controls on steering wheel.. 18

- control summarising table 21

- remote control .................. 19

Containing running costs

and pollution........................ 260

Controls ................................. 170

Controls on steering wheel ..... 18

Courtesy mirrors .................... 214

Courtesy mirror lights

- bulb replacement .............. 290

Cruise Control (constant

speed regulator) .................. 194

Dashboard ........................... 12

372

Dead lock device (doors) ......... 56

Delayed light switching off

(Follow me home) ............... 99

Diesel filter

- draining the condense ....... 325

Dimensions ............................. 359

Dipped beam headlights

- control .............................. 97


- control .............................. 100

- side bulb replacement ....... 285

Door lights


- puddle lights ..................... 213

Doors ..................................... 54

- Autoclose function ............. 50

- automatic door locking ..... 58

- child lock safety device ..... 58

- dead lock device ............... 56

- disabling rear door locking/

unlocking controls ............ 58

- door open indication ......... 57

- door pockets ..................... 218




system................................ 303

- lock release in case

of accident ......................... 59

- opening/closing

from the inside ................. 57

- opening/closing

from the outside................. 54

Drink compartment

(climate-controlled) ............. 217

Driving your car ................... 250

Easy Entry/Exit (system) ..... 43

EBD (electronic brakeforce

distributor)........................... 245

E.G.R. (exhaust gas

recirculation system) ........... 7

Electric parking brake(EPB) .. 175

- emergency

disengagement .................. 178

Electric sunshade ................... 220

Electric windows .................... 73

- anti-trap safety system ..... 73

- centralised window and

sunroof opening/closing

system................................ 75

- controls ............................. 74

- manual and automatic

operation .......................... 75

Electronic alarm ..................... 39

- anti-lifting sensor............... 41

- deactivating the alarm ...... 42


deactivated or modified .... 42

- indications of attempts

to break in ......................... 42

- ministerial homologation ... 43

- switching the alarm off ...... 41

- switching the alarm on ..... 40

- volumetric protection ........ 41

373

- what triggers the alarm

off ..................................... 42

Electronic automatic gearbox

(COMFORTRONIC)............. 180- automatic operation........... 182- bump starting .................... 188- failure indication ............... 187- gearbox display.................. 110- manual sequential

operation ........................... 186- moving off ......................... 180- selecting the automatic/

manual sequentialoperation ........................... 182

- sound signal ..................... 188- starting the engine ............ 180- stopping............................. 181- technical specifications ..... 348- towing the car ................... 189

Electronic brakeforce distributor (EBD) .................... 245Electronic control units

(important) ......................... 330

Engine

- identification code ............ 341

- marking ............................ 341

- technical specifications ..... 344

Engine compartment

(cleaning) ............................ 339

Engine coolant ........................ 321

Engine coolant temperature

gauge .................................. 108

Engine oil

- checking level ................... 320

- specifications ..................... 364

Engine oil consumption .......... 321

Engine oil level ....................... 320

Engine warming up ................ 252

Environment

(safety and protection) ......... 4-5

EOBD system ......................... 244

EPB (electric parking brake) .. 175

- emergency disengagement.. 178

ESP system ............................ 189

- ASR function .................... 191

- ESP system action ............. 192

- failure indication .............. 192

- initialising the control units

of the door locks, air

conditioner and ESP

system................................ 303

- MSR system ....................... 192

- operation .......................... 190

Exhaust gas

(recirculation system) .......... 7

External lights (controls) ........ 97

Flash consumption

gauge .................................. 109

Flashing the headlights

(main beam) ....................... 100

Fluids and lubricants .............. 364

Follow me home

(delayed light switching off) 99

Front ceiling light ................... 212


374

Front fog lights

- bulb replacement ............... 285

- control .............................. 171

Front passenger presence sensor

(airbag)................................ 91

Front seats ............................. 60

- armrests............................. 65

- Comfort Seats ................... 64

- electrically adjustable

seats ................................. 60

- head restraints .................. 65

- heating ............................. 62

- manually adjustable seats

(moving the seat backward

and forward) .................... 60

- paper pockets .................... 221

- storing the driver’s seat

positions ............................ 62

Fuel

- consumption ..................... 366

- cut-off switch .................... 173

- fuel tank cap ..................... 238

- level gauge ........................ 108Fuel consumption ................... 366Fuel cut-off switch and circuit

breaker................................. 173Fuel evaporation canister ....... 6Fuel feed/ignition

- technical specifications ...... 346Fuel filler cap.......................... 238Fuel gauge............................... 108Fuses (replacing) .................... 292

- fuses ................................. 296- fuses in the boot ................ 295- fuses in the dashboard ....... 294- fuses in the engine

compartment ..................... 294- general .............................. 292- general fuses ..................... 293- location ............................. 293

Getting to know your car.... 12Glove compartment ................ 216Glove compartment light


Handles ................................ 221

Hazard lights ........................ 170

Headlight washer

- control .............................. 101

- fluid .................................. 324

Headlights

- (Bi-Xeno) gas-discharge

lamps................................. 241

- headlight orientation

for left-/right-hand drive .. 243

Head restraints

- front ................................. 65

- rear ................................... 66

Heated rear window ............... 172

Identification data ................. 341

- bodywork paint

identification plate............. 342

- chassis marking ................ 341

- engine marking ................. 341

- model plate ....................... 341

375

If a tyre is punctured

(changing a wheel) .............. 274

If an accident occurs .............. 308

- if anyone is injured ............ 308

- first-aid kit ....................... 309

Ignition switch ....................... 24

In an emergency ................... 271

Instrument dimmer ................ 172

Instrument panel .................... 105

Instruments ............................. 107

Interior equipment ................. 212

Interiors (cleaning) ................. 339

“Isofix” child restraint system

(presetting for mounting) .... 85

Jack ...................................... 276

Jacking the car ........................ 307

- with an arm hoist or

a shop jack ........................ 307

- with the jack ..................... 307

Key ...................................... 27

- actuation logic of the boot

lock by means of the metal

insert ................................. 36

- actuation logic of the boot

lock by means of the

remote control .................. 35

- automatically actuated

functions............................ 37

- battery replacement .......... 38


actuated with the metal

insert of the key................. 34

- remote control functions .... 32

- request for additional

keys with remote control.... 39

Keyless System

(recognition system) ............ 44

- Autoclose function ............ 50

- bonnet opening ................. 50

- central locking/opening of

windows and sunroof ......... 51

- CID device ........................ 44

- CID device battery

replacement ....................... 53

- door unlocking to

access car........................... 49

- knob for activating

instrument panel and

engine start-up .................. 47


- locking the door and

leaving the car ................... 50

- “Garage” position

(emergency actuation) ...... 46

- ministerial homologation ... 53

- request for additional

CID devices ............................ 54

- system settings .................. 52

Kilometer counter and

trip meter ............................ 110

Kilometer counter and

trip meter display................. 110

376

Lambda sensors ................... 6

Lancia CODE (system) .......... 26

- CODE Card ...................... 28

Levels (check) ........................ 317

- brake and hydraulic

clutch fluid ....................... 323

- engine coolant.................... 321

- engine oil .......................... 320

- power steering fluid .......... 322

- windscreen/rear window

and headlight washer

fluid................................... 324

Light switch and

steering column stalks ......... 97

Load limiting devices ............. 79

Lubricants .............................. 364

Luggage net (boot) ................. 231

Main beam headlights

- control .............................. 100

- to flash the lights .............. 100

Manual gearbox ..................... 179

- technical specifications ...... 348

Model plate ............................ 341

MSR system ........................... 192

Multifunction display ............. 110

Number plate lights


Oddment compartment ........ 216

Oddment compartment

on the dashboard ................. 218

Outside mirror lights


Paper pockets ....................... 221

Parking ................................... 254

Parking lights ......................... 97

Parking sensor ....................... 208


- general warnings................ 212

- sensors .............................. 209

- towing a trailer .................. 211

Performance ........................... 358

Power socket

- in the boot ........................ 234

- in the rear armrest............. 220

Power steering fluid ............... 322

Pretensioners (seat belts) ........ 78

Radar Cruise Control ............ 197

- controls ............................. 198


- general .............................. 197

Rain sensor ............................ 102

Rear armrest compartment...... 219

Rear ceiling light .................... 213


Rear door safety lock ............. 58

Rear fog lights


- control .............................. 171

Rear seats ............................... 66

- armrests............................. 67

377

- Comfort Seats ................... 68

- head restraints .................. 66

- heating ............................. 67

Rearview mirror lights ............ 214

Rearview mirrors

- external ............................ 72

- internal ............................. 71

Recognition system

(Keyless System) ................. 44

- Autoclose function ............ 51

- bonnet opening ................. 50

- central locking/opening

of windows and sunroof..... 52

- CID device ........................ 44

- CID device battery

replacement ....................... 54

- door unlocking to

access car........................... 49

- knob for activating

instrument panel and

engine start-up .................. 47


leaving the car ................... 50


- “Garage” position

(emergency actuation) ...... 46


leaving the car ................... 50

- ministerial homologation .. 53

- request for additional CID

devices .............................. 53

- system settings .................. 52

Remote control (CONNECT) .. 19

Rev counter ............................ 107

Reverse lights


Rims ....................................... 354

- correct rim reading ............ 357

- important ......................... 356

Roof rack/ski rack................... 240

- anchorage points................ 240

Rubber tubing

(maintenance) ..................... 333

Safe driving ........................... 255

- before getting behind the

wheel................................... 255

- driving at night .................. 257

- driving in the fog ............... 258

- driving in the mountains .... 258

- driving in the rain .............. 257

- driving on snow and ice ..... 259

- driving with ABS ................ 259

- when travelling .................. 255

Seat belts

- front seat belt height

adjustment .......................... 77

- general instructions ............ 79

- how to keep seat belts

in proper working order...... 80

- load limiting devices ........... 79

- pretensioners ...................... 78

- use ...................................... 76

Side/taillights

- control ................................ 97

378

Ski tunnel ................................. 234

Snow chains ............................. 268

Solar cell operated sunroof ....... 222

- central locking/opening....... 225

- emergency manoeuvre......... 226

- opening/closing .................. 223

- pivoting .............................. 223

- solar cells ........................... 226

Sound system ........................... 247

- Bose HI-FI sound system .... 248

- speakers ............................. 247

Spark plugs

- maintenance ....................... 330

- type .................................... 346

Speakers ................................... 247

Speedometer ............................ 107

Starting the engine ................... 250

- bump starting ..................... 273

- emergency start-up..... 253-271

- engine stopping ................... 252

- engine warming up ............. 252

- ignition switch..................... 24

- JTD versions ...................... 251

- jump starting....................... 272

- petrol versions..................... 251

Steering

- technical specifications........ 352

Steering column lock ............... 24

Steering wheel........................... 70

- controls .............................. 18

- electric adjustment .............. 70

- manual adjustment ............ 70

Steering wheel stalks ............... 97

- left-hand stalk .................... 100

- right-hand stalk ................. 101

Stopping the engine ................. 252

Storing the car ......................... 269

- using the car again.............. 269

Sun visors ................................ 214

Supplementary heater............... 162

- operation with engine

running .............................. 169

- operation with engine

stationary ............................ 163

- technical specifications ....... 170

Suspensions


Symbols ................................... 9

Technical specifications ..... 341

Third brake light ..................... 287

Tools ........................................ 275

Towing a trailer ....................... 264

- important ........................... 264

- installation diagram ........... 265

- tow hitch installation ......... 265

Towing the car ......................... 305

Transmission


Twilight sensor ........................ 99

Tyre inflation pressure .... 354-384

- important ........................... 331

Tyres

- changing a wheel ............... 274

- correct tyre reading ............ 356

- important .................. 332-356

379

- maintenance ....................... 331

- pressure (important) .......... 331

- winter tyres ........................ 267

Useful accessories ................... 270

Volumetric protection ............ 41

Warning lights and messages. 115

Weights .................................... 360

Wheel geometry ........................ 358

Wheels

- changing a wheel ............... 275

- important ........................... 332

- inflation pressure ................ 354

- pressure (important) .......... 331

- technical specifications ....... 354

- wheel geometry ................... 358

Windscreen/rear window and

headlight washer fluid ........... 324

Windscreen washer

- control ................................ 101

- fluid ................................... 324

Windscreen washer blades

- maintenance ....................... 333

Windscreen wiper

- blade maintenance ............. 333

- control ................................ 101

Windscreen wiper spray nozzles

(maintenance) .............. 334-335

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE

For years now Lancia has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of theEnvironment through the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more“eco friendly” products. With a view to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance ofenvironmental standards and in response to the obligations imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Lancia offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the end of its life span withoutadditional costs.The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of thesame incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, inalmost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free ofcharge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002 on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried outfree of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essentialcomponent parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a qualityservice to our customers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmentalstandards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back,simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Lancia web site or call the toll free number 00800 526242 00.

* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

NOTES........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.Servizi al Cliente - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria AssistenzialeLargo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)

Print n. 603.81.230 - 09/2007 - 1st Edition

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) (snow tyres excluded)

ENGINE OIL CHANGE

5.50 5.50 5.0

FUEL CAPACITIES

5.90

75

10

75

10

75

10

75

10

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

225/50 R17 94W (*)225/50 ZR17 94W (*)

2.3

2.3

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

225/50 R17 94W (*)225/50 ZR17 94W (*)

2.3

2.3

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

225/50 R17 94W (*)225/50 ZR17 94W (*)

2.3

2.3

215/60 R16 95W215/60 ZR16 95W

225/50 R17 94W (*)225/50 ZR17 94W (*)

2.3

2.3

2.0 TB 2.4 2.4 CAE 2.4 JTD 20V CAE 3.2 V6 CAE

Front and reartyres

Reduced load bar

Full load bar

(*) Tyres that cannot be fitted with chains.0.3 bar should be added to the values given if the pressure is measured while the tyre is hot.

2.0 TB 2.4 - 2.4 CAE 2.4 JTD 20V CAE 3.2 V6 CAE

Engine oil (quantity for periodical remplacement -sump and filter) litres

# Dispose of waste oil properly.

2.0 TB 2.4 - 2.4 CAE 2.4 JTD 20V CAE 3.2 V6 CAE

Tank capacity litres

Reserve litres

Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only.Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications) only.

001-065 thesis gb

Documents